Who Should You License Your Content or Course To? with April Beach (Episode 325)

    Who Should You License Your Content or Course To?

     

    Struggling to scale your coaching or consulting business? In this episode, we dive into the powerful strategy of content licensing. We’re talking about how you can offer your training, courses, or systems to other companies, saving them time and boosting your income. Perfect for coaches, consultants, and service-based businesses wanting to expand their reach, this episode unpacks who would want to buy your content and why. From your current clients to even your competition, you’ll learn how to transform your existing content into new revenue streams.
     
    By the end of this episode, you’ll be equipped with the knowledge and strategies to make your content work harder for you, opening up new avenues for profit and impact. We’ll explore four levels of potential buyers for your content, starting with licensing to your own clients. Discover how empowering them to use your processes can be a quick and easy win for both parties. Then, dive into higher levels, such as turning your competition into partners and licensing to agencies, nonprofits, corporations, universities, and government organizations. This episode provides actionable steps to align your long-term business goals with scalable growth, leveraging your expertise without burning out.
     
     
    End Results:
    • You will be able to understand who to license your content to, from clients to large organizations.
    • Learn how to transform your competitors into partners by licensing your materials to them.
    • Make a decision on which level (clients, competition, agencies, large organizations) suits your content licensing strategy.
    • Understand how to navigate the complexities of higher-level deals with corporations, universities, and government organizations.
     
    Resources Mentioned:
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    325

    [00:00:47] Hey you guys, thanks for tuning in. This is episode number 325 and today we are talking about and answering the question, who can you license your courses, your content, and your trainings to? If you are new here to the show, please subscribe and make sure that you share this and see because everything I share here on this suite life entrepreneur podcast are proven business strategies and trainings that you can take to the bank that other coaches will charge you thousands of dollars for.

    [00:01:12] So you can rest assured that you can actually take action on every one of our episodes. Welcome. If we haven’t met before, I’m April Beach host here of the show and founder of the SweetLife Company. And on today’s show, we’re really diving into. Who can you license your content to, and you’re going to walk away with ideas and even strategic moves that you can make moving towards licensing and scaling your business faster.

    [00:01:36] So if that’s what you’re looking for, absolutely dive into the show. All of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco. com. Are you ready? Let’s go. Okay. So when we talk about content licensing, it means we are giving another company the ability to rent or utilize or distribute your training or your course, your system, your workshop or your process.

    [00:01:59] So you’re not distributing it yourself. And I have tons of resources for you on actually what is content licensing on our YouTube channel and our podcast. So make sure you’re checking those out and you are not missing those. Now I really want to dive into specifically. Answering this question, who can you license your stuff to?

    [00:02:17] So I get this question all the time. People are like, okay, April, this is really cool concept, but who would want to buy my stuff? And so let me share with you some basic mindset strategies first with the preface of saying, I’m not a mindset coach. I’m a business strategist, but I think this is important for you to understand.

    [00:02:37] Companies identify that it’s faster to buy your trainings, courses, programs, your systems, and your processes than it is for them to create them themselves. Especially larger companies know that they probably don’t have somebody in their team that can do as great of a job as you can do by teaching your expertise.

    [00:02:58] So they know that they can actually save time and save money by bringing your content in. Other coaches and consultants know that as well. So when you have a niche specialty that you are, it’s your genius, right? And you’ve gotten people great results, whether it’s through consulting or coaching before.

    [00:03:16] Other companies want this. They know it’s very valuable to them. Increases the value of what they do. It helps deliver better results to their teams and even to their clients. So again, I have so many other resources for you on why licensing a different licensing strategy. I really want to move into who you can license it to, but I felt like that was important foundational information in case you, you haven’t tapped into our other resources before.

    [00:03:40] So now. Answering the question, who can you actually license to? So the first thing I want you to be aware of is that licensing first starts with your individual personal business strategy, your personal goals of where you want to see your personal brand, your business brand, and the content of your work in the next five, 10 and 15 years.

    [00:04:01] Licensing is a really cool process where we expand the reach of your work, but in order to decide who the best people are. Companies are to actually license your information to, we want to make sure that the strategy is right for you. So please take a moment and think about where you want to see your business, your personal brand, and your content.

    [00:04:21] And as we move into talking about this, it will give you some more clarity. So there are four different levels that I’m going to generally share with you In this training, right? In this recording that we’re doing here, this video, four different levels of buyers, and we’re going to talk through each one of these here briefly to give you some information to be thinking about if that’s a right fit for that long term strategy for you.

    [00:04:46] So number one, the first buyer, if you will, the first potential user or licensee of your content, you could consider actually licensing to your own clients. Okay. So hear me out. If you have a training or a process that you have taught your own clients, let’s say you’re a marketing coach and you have a specific way of creating, you know, content or, or doing online marketing processes, right?

    [00:05:13] You’ve taught actual individuals, even other companies, but you know, individuals how to do that. Okay. Can you, should you, do you want to actually give those individuals who have already gone through your training, they’ve already completed your process, the ability to now utilize your trainings to share in their own business with their own clients.

    [00:05:32] This is really, really a powerful option in licensing to your own clients. It’s usually one of the fastest ways that we see that we can start licensing your material without big, huge heavy sales calls or negotiations like we do in, in bigger corporations. So number one, I want you to think about. Are you in a place where you are ready to start releasing some of your processes to clients that have been through your systems before and they’re qualified to deliver it?

    [00:06:00] That’s one of the things I want to talk about too. And I, I’ll do a whole separate video on this, but just a sidebar, you know, there’s this kind of master resale license business model where people that are totally not qualified at all can actually take other people’s content and resell it as if it’s theirs.

    [00:06:15] That’s not what I’m talking about. I never recommend allowing your content to be distributed or licensed by somebody who is not qualified. So these are qualified individuals, you’ve trained them personally, they’ve been through your programs, they, they know exactly the process and you’re giving them permission to utilize this.

    [00:06:32] So let’s go back to that marketing coach example. Let’s say you are that marketing coach and you thought you taught other marketers how to create content marketing plans. Now, would you like to enable them to use your processes? Maybe even some of your recordings or your trainings in their business, whether it’s to their own teams or even distributing it to their own clients.

    [00:06:53] So that’s kind of licensing buyer. Option level one. It’s usually a quicker sale and it’s something that can really expand the reach of your work without a lot of heavy sales lifting. It’s really beneficial for you. And of course it’s really beneficial for your clients as well. Level two. Is licensing to your competition.

    [00:07:12] Okay. This is an absolute game changer. I love talking about this, how to turn your competition into your clients. So this is for those of you guys who you’re kind of done coaching or consulting or teaching on what you have been doing. You’re ready for this next level of your business. You don’t so much want to continue to do this one to group or even went to individual through your own company buyer level two are actually going and reaching out to businesses that have been your competition and giving them permission to utilize your trainings with their clients in their business.

    [00:07:48] So imagine this and oh my gosh, I have so many podcast episodes and resources on this and more videos on this If this is what you want, we can just totally geek out on this whole buy in level option But let me just leave this with you imagine Not having to compete With your competition, creating this really cool, even mastermind community collective of businesses that are doing the same things, and they’re all utilizing either all or even parts of your training and content to actually insert into to Their business so immediately they’re no longer your competition because you’re not selling that content yourself You’ve leveled up their business.

    [00:08:29] You’re making more money and you’ve completely moved yourself into a blue ocean So level number one licensing to your clients level number two licensing to what has been your competition? There’s a lot more deep business future strategy we should talk about in that, but for the sake of what we’re talking about here in this video today, it gives you a great baseline of things to be thinking about.

    [00:08:50] Okay, so now let’s go a little bit bigger. Now let’s talk about level number three. Level number three are organizations like agencies or smaller businesses. Or even nonprofit organizations. These businesses, these companies are always looking for great content. So that’s that kind of level three buyer.

    [00:09:12] And as you’re moving up these levels, I want you to know that in many cases for most of our clients, the cost of their licensed product, basically they make more money goes up. So the higher the organization and the higher the value and the more people Okay. The more people that your content is going to reach, the more money you’re going to make licensing that particular piece of content.

    [00:09:32] So at level three is think about agencies or think about other small to mid sized businesses. Think about even chambers of commerce or groups and collectives. So if there are, you know, big business associations, these are great level three buyers. And if this is the place where you’re at, you can even still continue to sell your own content and license your things to agencies.

    [00:10:01] So that’s at level 3. So level 3 is at, again, that mid size business or small to mid size business, non profit agency. And I want you to pause just for a second and imagine at least one or a couple pieces of your content and trainings and how that could benefit a mid sized business. And frankly, how it could benefit you and how many more people you could reach with your work and how many more companies you could help.

    [00:10:27] And then level four are universities, corporations, and government. And we have clients that actually license their content in all of these different levels, all the way up to universities. We have multiple clients that are licensing their courses and content into universities. And corporations and government.

    [00:10:48] And so this higher level, me be honest with you, these deals usually take longer to close, but they’re bigger deals. So just think the bigger the deal, the higher the level that you license to, the longer these deals take to close. There’s more people to talk to more red tape that you kind of need to get through.

    [00:11:05] Um, so, you know, again, As you’re watching this and you’re thinking about this strategy, you can be thinking about how fast do I want to profit or do I want to, you know, wait for these big deals to close, but that level four, these are great buyers. So universities, government and corporations are also always on the look out for your content, whether your content is an internal training for their staff to really level up their, their staff’s ability in a certain, Area or whether they’re gonna take your content and distribute it to end users so your content can be internal and it can be distributed.

    [00:11:43] And so that next level a buyer is a really great opportunity for you if you have a significant program that can guarantee results to their end users, whether it’s internally to their staff, and of course externally to their buyers. So those are four different, very general levels. And the purpose again of me sharing this with you is to help you just open up your mind to the world of all the things you can do with your content.

    [00:12:11] So that training you created that you aren’t selling anymore, maybe frankly, you’re just burned out teaching that topic. Maybe you’re ready to move on to the next level. Maybe you have been working a nine to five job and this is your area of expertise. And you have processes and systems that you have created that are out of your own intellectual property.

    [00:12:31] They aren’t owned by a company, they’re yours. And you want to start increasing your profit outside of your work. You are absolutely in a place where you can look to other companies and all these different, may not be your clients. You know, you can’t really license content to your clients if you’re working a nine to five, but other agencies and even other businesses based on your work, of course, as long as it doesn’t compete with your employment agreement.

    [00:12:55] So. Those are some things that I want you to be thinking about, and I just want to kind of share a little story with you just to wrap this up about one of the first things that I did with licensing and my thought process around this. So hopefully this helps you. So when I first got into licensing, it was late 2020.

    [00:13:13] 2008, 2009, and one of the things I realized about myself was that I really wanted to be helping other businesses, and I had all of this content that I was sitting on. In this content that I was sitting on, I had actually created it for a B2C company and my own B2C company. But prior to that, I had even been a business strategist and coach even before I created this content.

    [00:13:37] So I just knew that I wanted to work with other businesses. It’s just where I belong. And so the very first thing that I did is instead of continuing to sell my online courses directly to clients, I connected with every other coach in my industry that was trying to do the exact same thing as I was, and I gave them an opportunity to take all of my classes.

    [00:13:59] And this is the language, this is the goal that I want to give you today. This is a language I used with them. I said, Take my courses and make them your own and sell them to your clients. That’s what I said. And when we’re looking at like the cost that it takes or the time that it takes, I have a little cheese sheet note here that I always reference back.

    [00:14:22] On average, data shows that it takes 28 to 36 hours to create one hour of an employee training. That’s 28 to 36 hours to create the IP, create the actual curriculum, actually produce the training and have it ready to go 28 to 36 hours to create one hour of training. So going back to what I was offering these other consultants, I had eight courses that were created and each one was about on average an hour long.

    [00:14:55] I was literally saving them hundreds of hours by taking my own courses and making them their own and giving them permission to license my own courses. And that was to my competition. And it was an important part of my longterm business strategy for myself. So I always love sharing like real world practical stories about my clients and about how I’ve done licensing to help you really understand how you can apply this to your business.

    [00:15:18] And you can be thinking about how you want to move forward with licensing. So again, today. We covered who you can license to. We covered the four different levels of starting out with your exact clients. You can license your material to, and then you can even reach out to your competition. Then you can go to small businesses, agencies, even organizations.

    [00:15:37] And then the next level up would be corporations, government, and universities, and all of these are possible for you as long as you have amazing content that gives people transformational results. All right. That is a wrap for episode number 325 for all the resources and even the transcription and the show notes and everything that I talked about.

    [00:15:57] Cruise over to SweetLifeCo.com and you can get everything you need there. And if you’re ready for personalized strategic support, you can apply to work with us, attend one of our online workshops, or even attend one of our in person retreats. I would love to work with you and help you Again, all of it can be found over at SweetLifeCo.com I’ll talk to you soon.

     
     

     

     

    What Types of Content Can You License?with April Beach (Episode 324)

    What Types of Content Can You License?

     

    Are you sitting on valuable content and wondering how you can monetize it through licensing? This episode is tailor-made for coaches, consultants, and other subject matter experts who possess content that’s just waiting to be shared with a wider audience. We’re going to clarify what content is licensable, how companies are hungry for it, and why knowing this is critical for taking your business operations to new levels of growth and efficiency. If your content is collecting dust, listen up – this is not the show for you if you’re not yet clear on what content licensing is. I suggest first catching up on our previous episode about the basics of content licensing before diving into this one.
     
    In this chat, we unpack three lucrative types of licensable content—each with varying income potential, represented by one, two, or three dollar signs. From leveraging distribution channels with compact pieces like articles and videos, to enhancing other programs with your trainings or workshops, and even offering complete processes that other companies can use independently. I even share a personal story about how I repurposed my own courses, and how that could be a game changer for you, too. We break down these strategies into real-world applications to help you visualize the incredible potential of licensing the valuable content you already have.
     
    End Results:
    • Recognize short, impactful content that can be used to fill a company’s distribution channels.
    • Identify how your smaller training modules can augment existing programs to create added value.
    • Understand the goldmine that is complete programs and courses, ready for you to license.
    • Get clarity on whether your content fits better as internal training for teams or as client-facing solutions.
    • Realize the potential profitability of licensing and how it contributes to a scalable business model.
     
     
    Resources:
    • For all your licensing resources, free tools, and business strategies, visit sweetlifeco.com.
    • To tap into a complimentary licensing 101 video, check out licensingtools.com.
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    324

    [00:00:46] April: Hi, you guys. In this video, on this podcast episode, we are unpacking the answers to the question, what type of content can you license? And so if you are a subject matter expert, a coach or a consultant, and you have content That you’re sitting on. It’s collecting dust. And you’re wondering what is actually licensable, what a company is want, then this is the show.

    [00:01:11] April: This is the video to be tuning into. If you’re watching us on YouTube, please click subscribe and share this. And if you’re watching it, listening to us here on Apple or Spotify or all the other podcast distribution channels, thank you so much. This is episode number 324. All the resources, all of the free licensing tools, all of our business tools can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo.com.

    [00:01:37] April: Let’s dive in and answer the question. What can you actually license? What type of content can you license? So. If you’re new to the world of licensing, go back and listen to our video on what is content licensing so you can get all the nitty gritty. So this is assuming you know what content licensing is, and you’re thinking about, you know, I have these courses, or I have these trainings, or I have this material, you know, what, what can I actually release?

    [00:02:01] April: It’s a common question I get, and we’re doing an entire series here on the show about all the frequently asked questions that I receive about content licensing. So, there are three types of content that companies will line up to license from you. And if you’re new to this, I want to share with you that this is a common business practice.

    [00:02:22] April: Companies understand that it takes a lot of time to create content and it’s faster to buy yours or license yours than it is to create more content from scratch. There are especially larger companies, larger organizations, it is a very common practice for them to be looking for amazing content to bring in.

    [00:02:41] April: And so the first type of content I want you to be aware of, we’re going to go through one, two, three. One is the lowest amount of money you’re going to make. Two is the middle amount of money you’re going to make. Three is the highest dollar amount you can claim for this licensing deal. So be really upfront about that.

    [00:02:57] April: So as I’m unpacking this, I’m just going to tell you one, imagine dollar sign number one, Level two, imagine dollar sign level two, three imagine dollar, three dollar signs, right? So that’s what I want you to be aware of. So the first one is content that fills distribution channels. What is a distribution channel?

    [00:03:13] April: A distribution channel is something that’s usually public. So it’s like this podcast is a distribution channel. YouTube channel is a distribution channel. Instagram, um, newsletters. It could be, you know, email marketing is still a distribution channel. It is any place where a company distributes content.

    [00:03:31] April: Usually publicly. It can also be internal content for larger corporations and organizations as well. But level one is if you have articles, videos, um, step by step processes, these are shorter. Compact pieces of content, trainings, processes, systems, or methods that you have created that you’re sitting on, you’re not really using anymore.

    [00:04:01] April: Maybe you are using it. You can actually license that to other companies to share within their distribution channels. Let me give you a story about this, like a little case study about this so that you can be spinning your own wheels. I like with each one of these episodes to share with you a story about licensing so you can imagine how this could work for you.

    [00:04:20] April: So we have a ton of online courses. We did in our company. So at one point in time I had 56 online courses. I don’t sell these anymore. I don’t use them anymore. But some of the content in the little videos from those courses are really informative. They’re kind of business coaching 101 things that I did like Over a decade ago.

    [00:04:41] April: It’s like, what is a lead magnet? How to build a funnel? Um, you know, some really basic business type things that content. I’m not selling it anymore. I’m just sitting on it. That content. I can actually license to other companies to distribute publicly through their distribution channels. It’s written. It’s done.

    [00:05:00] April: The video is done. Everything’s there. They can just add it to their marketing manager and start distributing it, distributing it, and grow their following and increase the value they’re providing. It doesn’t fit into our marketing plan anymore because our clients are past that. We’ve already helped them.

    [00:05:18] April: Pass those, you know, basic business launch type of activities, but I’m sitting on content that can fill other companies distribution channels. So if you have content that can fill distribution channels, that is way number one. You know, I wouldn’t make a million bucks doing that. I could make a couple thousand.

    [00:05:36] April: Sure. Hey, listen, I, I’m not one to turn down a couple thousand dollars. And so think about that. What content do you have that can fill other distribution channels, either public distribution channels or internal distribution channels that can help another company just deliver better content? To their listeners or their followers or their users.

    [00:05:55] April: That’s level number one. Level number two is content that augments current programs. So this is when you have a smaller training. It can still can be like one stand alone course. But it is one piece of a training that can be added to other trainings and programs to you. Make it better or help people get better results.

    [00:06:20] April: It can complement another complete program So if you have a training a video it can be a small workshop then that is something that augments other programs and You are gonna make money by licensing that to other businesses whether they’re businesses that are your competition or not last Video I did last podcast episode 3 23 is all about how to choose what competition you’re going to license to.

    [00:06:47] April: If you miss that, go back, listen to that video. We unpacked that whole thing, but this level number two is when we take your training and program and we allow for other businesses to actually include it in what they’re already selling or doing. I have a lot of clients that are doing this. I have multiple clients with one training piece or one training program and the entire strategy is to license it into other programs.

    [00:07:13] April: How amazing is that for them when they can take what they’ve created? They don’t have to sell it anymore and they just licensed it to another consultant or another coach to augment their programs and they make a lot of money by doing that. You might be familiar with this if you’ve given away like a free workshop or a free training and added it as like a bonus in the past to other programs.

    [00:07:35] April: Technically speaking, without you knowing it, you’re licensing it, by the way, without the licensing agreement. It doesn’t mean you always, like those type of situations, they’re more of a marketing and a lead gen opportunity for you. So, uh, we value actually doing those things for free because in return you’re going to grow brand awareness, you’re going to grow your list.

    [00:07:54] April: So it’s the same activity but a different strategy. Here we’re talking about a strict licensing strategy where you actually license your program to other companies to add to their full program. And you make money doing that. Certainly you should make money doing that. And then way number three is what I call complete.

    [00:08:16] April: So we talked about number one, content that feeds distribution channels. Number two, content that augments other programs. Number three are completes. And also our clients sit in either the augmenting channels or the completes level complete is where we take an entire course, an entire start to finish process that really can stand alone.

    [00:08:35] April: And we license that to other companies to use. That is the most profitable. That is what’s really gonna drive the wheelbarrows full of money to your bank. And that is where it doesn’t even have to be built out. Again, I did multiple other videos on, you know, don’t waste time building things out first with licensing.

    [00:08:56] April: Please don’t do that. But that is where we can even take One workshop that maybe you’ve taught live before, but it’s an entire workshop. Maybe it’s a, an entire weekend virtual event that you teach live. We can turn it into a licensing offer and allow for other companies to distribute it. I know where your mind’s going because I do this.

    [00:09:18] April: Your mind is probably going, well, can I still, do I do like licensing with live stuff? Still, I will do an entire, another episode for you on that and teaching you how to do hybrid offers with licensing and live consulting. Uh, just got, just got a question about that from somebody on LinkedIn. So, um, I will make sure that we address that in an upcoming show.

    [00:09:38] April: Again, another reason to subscribe and, uh, I want you just to be thinking about this. Going back to level number three, back from that squirrel moment. If you have a complete program that can stand by itself and be distributed by another company. Then that is the number one profit maker for licensing. It doesn’t even have to be huge.

    [00:10:02] April: That standalone program can still be a three, three video or three module training. It can be a one day workshop process, hear me out, where you allow for other professionals to teach your workshop. You don’t have to be there. It’s not always a course. It’s curriculum. It’s your process. It’s your way. We license your genius, your method, your framework.

    [00:10:31] April: That’s why if you’re new to our company with new coaches, the very thing we very first thing we help entrepreneurs do is build out methods and frameworks. So if you don’t have that built yet, by the way, we have the pathway to show you how to do that. But I’m talking to those you guys. We already have that.

    [00:10:47] April: And yeah, You have your method and your framework, whether it is a live workshop or it’s a course or it’s a training or it’s a process or, you know, it’s a system and you allow for another company to actually license all of that. Now, where do they use it? Again, another video that I will do for you, but just to answer that question right now, I’m not going to leave you hanging here.

    [00:11:09] April: They will either utilize that training as internal training for their teams, For their staff, they’ll either utilize your content to put into their internal operations or, or skills building and, or they can use it client facing is part of something they sell or something they sell standalone. So your content doesn’t always have to be totally client facing.

    [00:11:37] April: It doesn’t have to have to be public. As a matter of fact, I don’t know if I guess maybe 60, 40, I would say is, is our. Clients trainings are internal for staffs and team, maybe 50 50 and then external publicly facing. So that just doesn’t matter. So don’t get hung up on those details. Right now. I just want you to be focusing on choosing the content itself.

    [00:12:02] April: So when we’re asking what can or we’re asking the question, what can you license? The answer to that question is content that feeds distribution channels, content that augments other programs or completes. And you probably have a variety of content that fits in each one of those levels, like most of our listeners.

    [00:12:25] April: You guys are solutions creators. You’re very good at what you do and you’re constantly trying to fix and solve problems. And I want to help you scale your business and make a lot of money off the problems that you’ve already fixed that maybe you aren’t even selling the solutions to those problems anymore.

    [00:12:42] April: So if that’s what you want, you’re in the right place. We are your go to strategist for licensing your courses, trainings, and content. My name is April Beach, and I’m so glad that you’re here. I’m the founder at the SweetLife company, and you can find all of our resources by visiting SweetLifeCo. com, and you can even tap into a free licensing 101 video.

    [00:13:03] April: By visiting licensing dash tools. com as well. Again, please subscribe and I will see you next week with more strategy that you can take to the bank to scale your expert coaching or consulting business through content licensing .

     
     

     

     

    Turn Your Competition Into Your Clients With Licensing with April Beach (Episode 323)

    Turn Your Competition Into Your Clients With Licensing

     

    Are you sitting on valuable content and wondering how you can monetize it through licensing? This episode is tailor-made for coaches, consultants, and other subject matter experts who possess content that’s just waiting to be shared with a wider audience. We’re going to clarify what content is licensable, how companies are hungry for it, and why knowing this is critical for taking your business operations to new levels of growth and efficiency. If your content is collecting dust, listen up – this is not the show for you if you’re not yet clear on what content licensing is. I suggest first catching up on our previous episode about the basics of content licensing before diving into this one.
     
    In this chat, we unpack three lucrative types of licensable content—each with varying income potential, represented by one, two, or three dollar signs. From leveraging distribution channels with compact pieces like articles and videos, to enhancing other programs with your trainings or workshops, and even offering complete processes that other companies can use independently. I even share a personal story about how I repurposed my own courses, and how that could be a game changer for you, too. We break down these strategies into real-world applications to help you visualize the incredible potential of licensing the valuable content you already have.
     
    End Results:
    • Recognize short, impactful content that can be used to fill a company’s distribution channels.
    • Identify how your smaller training modules can augment existing programs to create added value.
    • Understand the goldmine that is complete programs and courses, ready for you to license.
    • Get clarity on whether your content fits better as internal training for teams or as client-facing solutions.
    • Realize the potential profitability of licensing and how it contributes to a scalable business model.
     
     
    Resources:
    • For all your licensing resources, free tools, and business strategies, visit sweetlifeco.com.
    • To tap into a complimentary licensing 101 video, check out licensingtools.com.
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    323

     

    Hey guys, welcome back to the show. We are talking about should you license your trainings and courses to April?

    [00:00:52] Other coaches and your competition. As a matter of fact, in this episode, in this video, we’re unpacking the strategy about how to actually turn your competition into your clients. It’s a game changer. And I’m so glad that you are here. If you’re watching us on YouTube, Please subscribe and like this video.

    [00:01:10] And if you are listening to this episode, I’m so glad that you’re here. It is episode number 323. Let me validate this with my notes. Yep. We’re at 323, you guys, and I just appreciate you listening here on the Suite Life Entrepreneurial Podcast for the last seven years, we’ve been cranking out proven business and trainings, proven business strategies and trainings that you guys can take to the bank in this series.

    [00:01:36] That we’ve been doing is all about content licensing. First of all, if you aren’t familiar with what content licensing is, go back and listen to episode number 320. These are short power packed episodes that are highly valuable delivered to you in a short period of time where you’re going to walk away with your mind absolutely blown about how you can scale your consulting business, coaching, speaking, writing business through content licensing.

    [00:01:59] So today, First of all, I’m going to share a tool. If you want to learn more about content licensing for free, you can cruise over to licensing tools. com and you can watch a free video about all about content licensing, even case studies about how I’ve licensed my content and how our clients license their content so you can get your wheels spinning.

    [00:02:21] So. Definitely go tap into that as well. So I want to talk about how to turn in your competition into your clients. This seems like really catchy when I do a, an Instagram or a LinkedIn post about this. I just get so many clicks because like, Ooh, that sounds so great. It does sound great, right? But let’s talk about the strategy of this and who this is for.

    [00:02:44] So this is for those of you guys who are established consultants, coaches, Subject matter experts, speakers or authors, and you have the trainings, you have programs, you have content, systems, methods, or frameworks that are your intellectual property. You own them and these, this content has gotten your client’s results in the past.

    [00:03:08] So you’re good at what you do. Last week’s episode, we talked about who is actually qualified to license. So if you’re wondering that, go back and listen to the previous episode here. You have this content and you’re thinking about delivering it in a licensing format, meaning you’re going to allow other companies to distribute your content or include your content in their trainings or their programs.

    [00:03:34] And the strategy here, really the question that I want to help you address is should you actually license? To your competition. So to answer that, I want to take you through a scenario here and then I’m going to share with you a story about how I did this in the past to help you even think more about it.

    [00:03:54] So the first question you need to ask yourself is, do I want to sell this myself still? And it doesn’t even have to be no. We’ll talk about that in a minute. But the first thing is with this, we’ll call it a course for the sake of this strategy here. With this course, do I want to keep selling this through my own business as you know, that one of our programs, one of our products.

    [00:04:22] If you do, that’s great. We’ll talk about that pathway in a second. If you don’t, let’s say it’s a training that you’re not even using anymore. You guys are probably sitting on so many trainings, courses, and programs here. They’re not marketing. It’s not part of your future growth of your business. They’re collecting dust on shelves, even if they aren’t even built out yet.

    [00:04:42] Like how many notebooks full of training programs, uh, have you created? So if you don’t want to sell it anymore, your business is moving in a new direction. Then this is like slam dunk. Imagine what allowing other consultants or coaches in your space would look like to actually to actually deliver your program and include your program in what they deliver to their clients.

    [00:05:10] Imagine what that would do for you. If you are no longer selling it, it doesn’t matter anymore. It’s not the future of your business. It’s not what you want to be known for anymore. One of the fastest ways to grow your network, to build amazing, mutually beneficial relationships, frankly, to build an entire network.

    [00:05:31] Which I’ll share with you about how I did this years ago of coaches and consultants in the exact same niche in the exact same space where you’re the head of that group. That’s what we’re talking about here. Imagine what that could do for your business and how you could actually scale your business by allowing your competition to license your trainings, courses, processes, systems, or methods.

    [00:05:59] If that sounds good to you, sounds good to me. I did it. Sounds good to a lot of our clients. They’re doing it. So let me tell you a story about that and then we’ll go to the other side of it for those of you guys that still want to sell it and we’ll workshop how to do that. So how I did this, let’s flashback years ago, almost 20 years ago, I feel like I’m aging myself here, especially in the, in the coaching and consulting space.

    [00:06:24] I’m like, I ran darn Nash forever. I am. One of the creators of the parent coaching industry. Okay. You guys would never know that. I know we could do a whole nother show on how we keep building and reinventing ourselves. So back in the day I helped create the baby planning, maternity concierge industry, wrote the scope of practice for it and all this stuff.

    [00:06:48] However, prior to that, I was a business strategist and coach. So I was a business coach for years, all the way back into the nineties. And then I had this, then I had what usually happens to us. Then I had three babies and I realized there needed to be a coach for new parents and that everybody was just giving me their opinion and not giving me just facts and made me mad.

    [00:07:07] So I created an entire industry called the baby planning industry. And in the process, I opened up The first fully comprehensive maternity consulting firm in the world. And it was great, you know, I was making money. I was coaching new parents, but I’ll be real honest with you guys. You know, I developed courses and trainings and programs.

    [00:07:30] I. I’m not a parent coach. It’s like the way I parent. If you guys follow me on Instagram, it’s usually totally rogue compared to the way most people parent. And I actually hated coaching other parents. I’m a business strategist. I’m a business coach. So I had this short stint and instantly I realized, Oh my gosh, I’ve done this.

    [00:07:49] This is, this is so great, but I have all these trainings and programs and courses and I don’t want to do this anymore. And of course, other parent coaches because then the industry was growing. I mean, we have Baby planters and parent coaches like all over the world now, they were coming to me for business coaching and that’s what I wanted to do because frankly, that’s what I’m good at and I wanted to consult them from a business strategy to help them build their business like I had created my first company.

    [00:08:16] Anyway, long story short, I realized that they would have been my competition, but instead what was right for me was I wanted to turn them into my clients. And so I licensed them everything, you guys. I licensed them all of my courses, all of my processes, all of my worksheets. It was an entire business in a box.

    [00:08:39] They had a parent coaching business in a box. And imagine what that did for my sales. Okay, so instead of me delivering courses and services to parents, which I really didn’t want to do, I was, you know, been there, done that. That was not who I’m made to be. Yes, I was very proud of, of the foundation of that industry and literally creating an entire coaching industry from scratch.

    [00:09:04] Very proud of that. But that had nothing to do with our parents. That was business strategy. That was my jam. And I wanted to get out of there as quickly as possible. And at the time, because the industry was so new, I really wasn’t making a ton of money coaching parents, but my company was very well known.

    [00:09:20] Right? So the money was in the going B to B, not B to C. And I knew that. And so I turned. Those people who think heavens are coming to me for help, but I turned what would have been my competition into my clients by literally licensing them all of the processes in the content that I had so that they could grow their business faster, serve their clients better and make more money and in the process.

    [00:09:46] What did I get to do? Made more money, increased my free time, went back to business strategy and consulting. As a matter of fact, what I did is I actually made so much money doing this that I was able, and I’m just going to share this because I want you guys to be thinking about the potential of what you can do.

    [00:10:05] I was able to form a non profit. I’m also an environmental non profit founder. Which again, you probably would never know unless you’re listening to this show, but I share that with you because it made me so much money that I was able to work a little bit in business strategy, license all my stuff and go f k myself.

    [00:10:22] Form a nonprofit and work with, you know, companies like the environmental working group and surf writer foundation and all these like cool environmental ocean saving groups that, you know, I totally geeked out on. I got to work with people like Mark Ruffalo, Mark Ruffalo, the actor wrote an article on me and the work that we were doing in our nonprofit.

    [00:10:43] And our nonprofit was founded by Patagonia, right? Like, or was funded by Patagonia. I share this with you because this is the power of what licensing can do. And all I did was create great content and I turned my competition into my clients and I gave them everything that I had and it was the best thing I ever did, not only for me, but for them too.

    [00:11:09] And frankly, I was really interested in growing the Parent coaching industry and I knew my services processes systems and content could also help do that on a global scale And so that’s what I’m talking about I’m talking about taking things you’ve already done if you don’t want to do them anymore It can be just one course or you can license out your whole business like I did And grow your reach exponential, exponentially, make more money and free up your time.

    [00:11:42] So that’s bucket number one. That’s if you don’t want to do it anymore. That’s a slam dunk. If that is you, I would love to help you do what I did, what I help many of our clients do. Hit me up over at SweetLife Co. com. I will help you do exactly what I did. So now let’s talk about the other side of it.

    [00:11:59] Let’s say you either still want to sell it or you’re not really sure. You know, you’re not really sure if you want to give it away yet. You don’t want to make that final decision. Totally fine. Here’s what I want you to think about. If you are going to still sell it yourself. Don’t license it to your direct competition, instead, license it to other companies that have the same end user as you.

    [00:12:23] So if you are a public speaking coach, you’re not going to license your training to another public speaking coach, but you could license it to, let’s say, a publishing house who needs their authors to know how to be confident public speakers. You could license it to a PR firm that needs their, their people, their representatives to show up confident.

    [00:12:45] So if you want to license your content confidently on TV, think about who else, what other businesses serve the same clients that can benefit that your content can actually augment their current content and elevate their current content, license it to them, not your direct competition. And if you do want to license it, so I’m going to give you just a part three.

    [00:13:05] And by the way, many of our clients do this, they kind of sit in this space for a couple of years while they’re ready to actually, you know, kind of retire some of their own content and fully, fully allow other companies to distribute it. And then number three is if you do want to keep it yourself and you want to license it directly to your competition, don’t give them the exact same thing.

    [00:13:25] I want you to keep the gold standard for yourself because I want you to be that end all be all. You’re going to charge more for it because I mean, let’s, let’s be honest, like even with licensing, nobody can replace you. You know, we’re trying to duplicate you as best as we can. We’re taking your IP, your genius, your processes, allowing other companies to distribute it, but nobody’s you.

    [00:13:49] They’re the best. You came up with it. It’s you’re a genius. So if you want to license it to competition, but keep it yourself, make sure you’re charging more, make sure you keep the best of the best of the content, and then maybe you take some pieces of it. And allow other companies that are your competition to actually take pieces of it, not the whole shebang.

    [00:14:12] So let’s recap what we talked about here. We’re talking about how to turn your competition into your clients through licensing. Number one, and I shared with you the story about how I did this way back in 2008 where I took my entire business, all my trainings and programs and allowed other coaches to utilize it.

    [00:14:34] You don’t have to give them all that you can give them just one whole course. I don’t care It doesn’t have to be the whole thing. I mean, I really hated parent coaching you guys. It just was not me Okay, so like I knew I wanted to get rid of the whole thing, right? I couldn’t wait to get back to business strategy and consulting So yeah, you have to really know if you’re gonna give away and license your whole business, right?

    [00:14:57] So whether it’s just one course or a couple of processes or a couple of trainings, you know, if you’re not going to use it anymore, awesome. That’s way number one that I’m so excited for those of you who are ready for that yet, but if you’re not ready for that, it’s totally cool. We can get you started here at way number two, where you’d license out your trainings, your processes, not to your direct competition, but to other businesses that serve the same clients.

    [00:15:22] That’s option number two. And then option number three, if you do want to keep it yourself, we’re not going to give them all of it. We can give them pieces of it. Parts of it to include in their offers your direct competition in their offers. Am I the only one like excited about this? When I talk about this, I feel like sometimes I’m sitting here in my office recording, my boys are in their rooms and my dogs are out back and I’m sitting here like so excited all by myself.

    [00:15:50] Because I know what this can do for you guys. My goal is to open up the world of content licensing for you so that you can get to do what I got to do, that you can actually choose your own adventure of your life because you’re making money of content you’ve already created. That’s what I want you to be able to do.

    [00:16:13] And that’s what we coach our clients to do. If you would like strategy consulting, if you would like to access our entire licensing project plan, every single thing from, even if you don’t have an idea of what you want to license yet, even if you’re not sure, by the way, That’s a big part of what we help our clients figure out is your strategy.

    [00:16:33] Don’t wait to ask for help for your strategy. My job is to help you navigate all the options and pick the best strategy. That’s what we do with our clients. Don’t wait for the strategy. I’ll be doing another episode on the problems of waiting for a strategy, and you can certainly subscribe and tap into those other episodes.

    [00:16:52] But please don’t, because that’s a mistake, and you can move forward and make a mistake that you can’t take back. All right. It’s been a pleasure connecting with you here today. Again, if you’re watching this on youtube, let me just be honest We’re really trying to grow our youtube channel I haven’t really tried hard before but we are now so if you could please subscribe to this I would really appreciate it and even share this episode Uh with your friends and if you’re listening on apple or spotify, thank you so much for being a listener of this show We really appreciate it All of our licensing resources can be found by visiting SweetLife Co.

    [00:17:27] com, including kickstart trainings and free videos that I would love for you to dive into. All right. It’s been fun hanging out. I will talk to you guys on the next episode. Bye for now.

     
     

     

     

    Can I Sell My Trainings to Other Companies? with April Beach (Episode 322)

    Can I Sell My Trainings to Other Companies?

     

    Course Creators: License Your Way to Growth. In this episode, we’re diving into the major question that’s on many of your minds: Can I license my course, training, or content? If you’re a coach, consultant, author or speaker with valuable trainings and content looking to license to other companies, you’ve come to the right place. We’re peeling back the curtain on the prerequisites for licensing to help you gauge if your content is ready for the next step. This isn’t for newbies still finding their footing – we’re looking at established business owners who are already good at what they do. If you’re wondering how to leverage your expertise and extend your influence, then this is for you.
     
    We cover the key ingredients that make your content license-ready. You might be surprised to learn that your program doesn’t need to be fully built before licensing— in fact, it’s better if it’s not. Save yourself time and adopt a strategic mindset to turn your proven methods into licensing gold. I share insights on positioning your business for the future and discuss how important it is to think about how licensing will shape your brand in the long term. Plus, you’ll hear an inspiring case study about a client who licensed her yet-to-be-created course for a whopping seven-figure sum!
     
    End Results:
    • You’ll be positioned to start considering if licensing is a suitable growth strategy for your business.
    • Understand the necessity to provide predictable, transformational, measurable results through your content.
    • Gain insight into the strategic foresight required for long-term thought leadership and brand positioning.
    • Discover the potential to turn your expertise into a licensed program, even if it’s not fully developed.
    • Learn from real-life success stories to inspire your own journey in content licensing.
    • Resources Mentioned:
    • Free licensing business growth tools: visit sweetlifeco.com
    • Licensing 101 Video: licensing-tools.com
    • Million Dollar Licensing Offer Masterclass: For those who need guidance in curating their curriculum for licensing.
     
     
    Resources Section:
    – Access free licensing business growth tools, strategies, and worksheets at: https://www.sweetlifeco.com
    – For a Licensing 101 video and immediate resources, head to: https://licensing-tools.com
    – Million Dollar Licensing Offer Masterclass for curating your curriculum: Learn more through our resources at sweetlifeco.com. 
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    322

    [00:00:46] Hey there. Welcome back to the show. Today we are answering the question. Can I license my course? Yes. Training for content. And so if that’s what you’re looking for, you are in the right place. I’m April Beach host here at the Sweetlife Entrepreneur Podcast and CEO of the SweetLife Company. And I’ve been teaching experts, coaches, and consultants to license our content for over a decade.

    [00:01:09] And I want to unpack who this episode is actually for. So if you are a subject matter expert, we’re Coach consultant, you may be an author or a speaker and you have trainings and content that you’re interested in licensing to other companies. I want to unpack some prerequisites for licensing here to help you identify whether or not your content is ready.

    [00:01:32] So if that’s what you’re looking for, this is episode number 322. You can find all of the resources and tap into our free licensing, business growth, business tools, videos, strategies, worksheets by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. All right. So this is for those of you guys who are established business owners. So.

    [00:01:54] Let’s take a little hint from that. The idea here is that you need to be good at what you do. So prerequisite number one, you need to be able to deliver results. If you are a brand new coach, a brand new consultant, welcome to the world of coaching and consulting. It is growing rapidly. It has been growing rapidly, especially over the last decade.

    [00:02:16] And we want to make sure that before you give another company permission to actually utilize it, that you have a proven record of getting people results. So prerequisite number one is, do you have a system, process, curriculum, an outline, a methodology, a framework? Do you have a way of taking people from one place to another place?

    [00:02:45] Or businesses from one place to another place. We’ve talked about this on shows over the years. We actually teach this when we teach million dollar offer engineering. But the key phrase I want you to ask yourself is, does my program, content curriculum, whatever it is, deliver predictable, transformational, measurable results?

    [00:03:10] Are you capable of doing that? Now, one of the things I do want to say is number two is you actually don’t even have to have a thriving, established coaching and consulting business. And I’m going to share with you a case study of one of our clients who was very good at what she did, but she didn’t even have her consulting business launched.

    [00:03:29] She wasn’t even in her own independent business space. She was just very good at what she did based on her professional background. So I don’t want you to think, Oh my gosh, I don’t have a business. I don’t have all these followers, by the way, followers do not equal the value of what you deliver. Those are vanity metrics.

    [00:03:47] We don’t even look at those. The reality is, is can you deliver companies or individuals reason results and, and have you done that in the past? That is the most important thing. Now, number two, and this is probably going to surprise you and I’m going to save you time. I’m hoping to save you time. Your program does not have to be built all the way out.

    [00:04:09] As a matter of fact, and I will be doing more podcast episodes about this, so make sure you’re subscribed and we can hang out together. I can keep pouring into you. As a matter of fact, taking the time to build your program out could greatly hurt you, which I will be unpacking why that is in other episodes.

    [00:04:26] It doesn’t have to be built into a place. As a matter of fact, when we talk to new clients that are considering working with us to help them build out their licensing packages and in pricing and sell them, oftentimes I hear, well, I just keep need to work on it. I need to build it first. That is absolutely not the case.

    [00:04:46] So if you do not have a course built or a training built yet, I But you still have a proven method for getting people results. You can totally move into licensing and I actually don’t want you to wait. You know, there are so many different strategies when we talk about scaling, coaching and consulting businesses.

    [00:05:05] There’s so many different strategies about selling something before you build it. I have to say that I am usually not an advocate of that. In that coaching and consulting space, I at least want us to be frameworked out to have a built in an LMS to understand the user experience and in the client experience and the transformational benchmarks.

    [00:05:27] If we were just talking about building and growing your coaching and consulting business on the B to C side. Normally, I’m not a huge advocate about totally winging it, pulling something out of the air. Actually, I’m never an advocate of just pulling something out of the air. And selling it. But a lot of coaches say to do that on that side of the business, and I’m sure they have their reasoning and strategies.

    [00:05:49] Normally, I’m not that person, guys. Okay? I’m just going to be honest. But, now we go over and we talk about content licensing and whether or not you are able to release your content. Now we’re talking about the fact of selling a proven method, curriculum, strategy or process that can be built out later, according to who you license it to.

    [00:06:13] So number one, you have to be really good at what you do. Number two, you don’t have to have it built yet. As a matter of fact, please don’t take the time to build it, because time is money. Is money, especially when we’re talking about content licensing. If you’re thinking about doing this, you’re thinking about getting into it and you’re like, Oh, well, I don’t really have the time and I don’t, you know, I’m not really ready to start in it.

    [00:06:35] You are absolutely losing money. Thousands and thousands, if not hundreds of thousands of dollars. Okay. So just be mindful of that. And you know, the other thing, and this is number three, I’m going to share with you here on this particular show, I told you these are going to be high value short time, so you can binge them and move on to the next one.

    [00:06:54] The other one is something that I really want you, if you can take away anything from today’s show, please take away this in order to license your content. We need to know what you want your next five to 10 years of your business and life to look like. And oftentimes that seems like so big, especially if you are new into an industry like licensing, like most people are, because it’s still this best kept secret.

    [00:07:23] It’s one of those things that with licensing, We can’t take it back, okay? So let me expand on that a little bit. If you were to launch a course, or a training program, or a retreat, or a mastermind, and you do it, and you go through the process, and maybe you liked it a couple times, and you got burned out on it, and you just, you can stop.

    [00:07:45] You can stop selling it. When you license, And you give permission to another company to distribute your content. It’s for the term of a license agreement. And so once you put it out there, you can’t take it back. And so let me tell you why this is important for the context of, of what we’re saying here today.

    [00:08:02] And, and I don’t want to scare you away from this, but I want to be fully honest with you. Because a lot of coaches, consultants, and experts come to me for help licensing something that they did not get coaching on before, and they made a lot of mistakes and they can’t take them back. And that’s one of the reasons why I decided to do this podcast series, because I want to save you from these mistakes.

    [00:08:27] Okay? And so here’s what I want you to take away from this show. I want you to ask yourself, what do I want to be known for in regards to this training or content for the next five to 10 years? If you’re in a place like frankly, many of our clients are, let me give you a little bit of behind the scenes here where you’ve been in business and you’re looking for your next level business model, you’re looking to free up your time and increase your profit and truly scale, then licensing is a great opportunity for you.

    [00:09:02] But here’s the question. What you license, or I should say, what will you license? Because what you license. We don’t get to take back and I want you to be thinking about how well known you want to be for that content Are you okay with the thought of another business? Distributing your training and content if this is the mountain you’re gonna die on and you want to become the thought leader And you want to be the end all be all company to directly deliver that particular training B2C then who you license it to Matters We’re not going to license it to your competition.

    [00:09:44] And so those are just some of the things that I want you to be thinking about. When clients come in to work with us for licensing, the very, very first thing, phase one of our licensing plan is positioning. And that’s what I’m sharing with you here today on this show. I want you to understand the importance of how you want to position yourself in the next three steps.

    [00:10:04] Five, 10, 15, 20 years. How do you want your thought leadership to be positioned? How do we want your brand to be positioned? We can do it any way you want. I’m not saying you’re going to lose it all. As a matter of fact, we build thought leaders through licensing. Let me say that again. We build thought leaders through licensing.

    [00:10:25] I want you to sit with that, but what we give away, what you’re thinking about extending out to others will be affected based on your personal professional goals in your company goals. And so those are the three things I wanted to unpack on this show. Who can license their content, right? So number one, you have to be good at what you do.

    [00:10:49] You have to have a methodology, content, framework, training, course, or process. Whether it’s built or not, that gets people, remember these three words, predictable, transformational, measurable results. If you don’t have that yet, even if it’s not built out, but if you don’t have your content, your method, your process, your curriculum built out, cruise over.

    [00:11:16] We are happy to help you. We have our million dollar licensing offer masterclass where we actually teach you how to curate your curriculum to build your licensing offers. It’s called offer engineer. That’s where you should be. And that’s where you are. Awesome. We are here to help you. But if you already have that, you’ve had that for years, you’re an expert in your space, then great.

    [00:11:38] Well, you know, skip to step number two, don’t worry about guessing where it needs to be built out. You just take what you have, whatever the structure of that looks like. And then we get to take it into step number three, which understanding how you want to position yourself as a thought leader in the future, that’s going to help you package up your material to license it.

    [00:11:57] And so those are the three steps I want you to be processing, and I can’t overestimate how important your understanding of your strategy is in, in this whole process. If you want to be known for your work, thinking about that, and we can make you as known as known can be, or we can make you a ghost and still make hundreds of thousands of dollars through licensing your content.

    [00:12:22] But it’s up to you. And the point I’m making to you is once you decide that, we can’t. Really take it back. And so those are the things I want you to be thinking about. And that’s why I am recording this show in this video for you. If you are finding us on YouTube, our new YouTube channel, I’m so stoked that you’re here.

    [00:12:39] Please subscribe to this. We would love to continue to pour into you. Now, let me tell you. Go ahead and share with you a case study like I promised I would about one of our clients who didn’t have a consulting business and didn’t even have a course built. As a matter of fact, her case study, um, she just closed.

    [00:12:59] Two of our first licensing deals in this past week of recording this show, but I did do a whole 30 minute interview with her where she shares her process. She went through that also can be found cruise over to our YouTube channel as well, where you can really hear behind the scenes and the details. But I just want to share this story with you so that you are aware.

    [00:13:18] So this particular client was a professor. Okay. So she did have an established area of expertise. She’s been a teacher. She has her doctorate. You know, she has been in the corporate world for a very long time. So she’s worked with companies. She’s developed plans and processes in curriculum within companies.

    [00:13:39] So she, she was great at it. And she just licensed her course, That’s based on her intellectual property, but it’s not yet built anywhere to multiple universities. And her first check is 142, 000. Her licensing deal for one university is over a million dollars for one course that she hasn’t even built yet that’s based on her expertise.

    [00:14:07] And if you want to tap into her case study, and she’s not the only one. I mean, it seems ridiculous. As a matter of fact, I was saying this in one of our live streams where I was like, I can’t even share this case study. People are going to think this is absolute bullshit. Like this is crazy to take a course that isn’t even built, but from established IP and license it for over a million dollars.

    [00:14:28] She’s a single mom. She’s a professional. She’s awesome. And frankly, she’s just like you. And so those are the things that can happen with licensing. You don’t have to have it built yet. You just have to have content that is proven, even if it’s from your own brain and your own teaching and your own workshops and your own expertise, maybe it’s from your book.

    [00:14:49] Many of our clients, we turn their books into a license program. We turn their signature talks into a license program. Maybe it’s from one of those places, but you don’t have to have a built out yet. And that’s what I want you to walk away with. That is the mind blowing that I want you to gather when we’re talking about content licensing.

    [00:15:10] So if you want to know more about content licensing, cruise over to our website at SweetLifeCo. com where you will find tools and resources to get started with content licensing totally free. You can also cruise over to licensing co. com. Tools dot com. And it’s going to take you immediately to a licensing 101 video.

    [00:15:33] You can put me on fast forward where I’m going to go through case studies to get your wheels spinning even more about different ways that you can take your content, whether or not you’re even selling it could be content you’re selling or contents collecting dust, and we can license it to other companies and expand your reach.

    [00:15:51] And I’m not going to be the police here on who’s ready to license our content and who isn’t. I want to be, I’ll be honest with you. We’ve seen, this is a, this is a little raw April beach here. If you’ve been following this podcast, you know that I’ve just kind of say what’s on my mind in the history of the coaching and consulting space, especially as it’s grown online.

    [00:16:09] We have seen a lot of coaches that frankly are not good at what they do. Uh, we’ve even seen some opportunities where people are releasing something called the master resale license, where they’re teaching people how to do their thing. And then giving them like a business in a box. And these people are in most cases, not very qualified to do that.

    [00:16:26] You know, you’ve probably seen some of these things coming around. That’s not what we do. That’s not what we as a company do with content licensing. We work with established experts to license their content out to other companies, nonprofits, corporations, other coaches and consultants, universities, and not all here in the United States, across the world.

    [00:16:47] And that’s what we can do for you too. So please subscribe to this YouTube channel and follow us on Instagram and DM me on LinkedIn. I am always available to answer your questions because I geek out on this stuff because I know it can do for you and your business. Thank you so much for tuning in here to the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast.

    [00:17:07] This is episode number 322, and we’re going to be continuing our series where I’m answering the most common questions I receive about how to license your content to scale your business. All right. Bye bye for now.

     
     
     

     

     

    Why is Content Licensing The Fastest Way To Scale? with April Beach (Episode 321)

    Why is Content Licensing The Fastest Way To Scale?

     

    Free asset link   How to License your Content to Scale your Business & Increase Profit 

     

    Why is content licensing one of the fastest ways to scale? If you’ve been establishing your expertise in your domain and possess a trove of valuable content that other businesses could benefit from, this episode of the SweetLife® Podcast is curated with your needs in mind. What we’re talking about today isn’t just an opportunity to broaden your business horizons—it’s a transformative approach that can substantially enhance your profit margins and free up your time. I share insights that are particularly important for subject matter experts, coaches, consultants, speakers, authors, and leaders who are looking to upscale the dissemination of their knowledge without increasing their workload.

    In this podcast, we unpack specific strategies that fundamentally change the traditional growth model. From sharing firsthand how I licensed a single course and exponentially multiplied its reach, to discussing the potential of licensing your content to other companies who can then market your intellectual property. We cover the successes of content licensing, the practical steps in the process, and how I have helped clients in the past decade, utilize these strategies to reduce their effort while massively scaling up their businesses. My experience and the case studies we dive into serve as a testament to the substantial impact that wisely implemented content licensing can bring to your enterprise.

    Key Takeaways from Today’s Episode:

    • Get to grips with the actual mechanics of content licensing and how it can act as a catalyst for rapid business scaling.
    • Hear inspiring stories and case studies that demonstrate the successful implementation of content licensing from my clients and me.
    • Discern specific strategies for using content licensing to multiply your reach without proportionally increasing your effort, time, or costs.
    • Discover who is best suited for content licensing — it’s aimed at established professionals armed with content ready for wider distribution.
    • Learn how one course or training can be licensed in various ways, from individual trainers to large organizations, for broad-reaching impact. 
    • Content licensing isn’t just a buzzword; it’s a robust business model that can augment the reach and profitability of your content. We’re talking about a strategic movement that could revolutionize the way you think about and engage with the growth of your business.

    Free asset link   How to License your Content to Scale your Business & Increase Profit  https://www.sweetlifeco.com/email-capture-501e66ad-8462-482e-96b3-f755e65c0f9d

     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    321

    [00:00:28]  Hey there. In this episode, number 321, we are answering the question. Why is content licensing one of the fastest ways to scale? Welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I’m excited to dive in with you. First of all, who is this show for? It’s for established subject matter experts, coaches, consultants, speakers, and authors. You guys are really good at what you do.

    [00:01:07] You have trainings and programs and processes and models and content that can be useful for other businesses. And we’re diving into why is content licensing such a magical, fast, scalable. Business opportunity. If you aren’t familiar with what content licensing is, go back and listen to episode 320 where I unpack the actual definition of content licensing for you.

    [00:01:32] So in this show, we’re going to unpack here. Why is content licensing a fast scalable option and who it’s for? I’m also going to share with you stories. I promise you guys in this entire series we’re doing on content licensing that I want you to hear stories from my clients and And for me about how we have licensed their content, because there is no cookie cutter way.

    [00:01:55] And the purpose of sharing you stories with you short stories and case studies is that I want you to be able to think in your own mind, Oh my gosh, this could work for me. Or what about a variation of this? And that’s how it could work for me as well. And so. Everything that I want to pour into you here is all strategy and it’s proven regarding my experience over the last decade, consulting subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants about how to scale your business through content licensing.

    [00:02:25] So now let’s go ahead and dive in. First of all, what is scaly, right? So I have other podcast episodes on the dish on the difference between growth and scale, and I feel like it’s important to actually do a basic definition of that here. So. Growing is where we increase our investments. We usually increase our costs, but also we’re increasing our profit.

    [00:02:46] So we’re investing more, whether it’s more time or more money or more teams or more ad spend in order to actually grow the profit. Scaling is where we are not increasing our costs. We are not increasing our time. Scaling is where that is staying the same. And we’re going to talk about the magic of content licensing, because that actually goes down while we’re increasing our profits.

    [00:03:09] So in order to truly scale, I know that word is thrown around a lot in the coaching and consulting space, but in order to truly scale, this actually means thinking about what is this strategy where I can increase my profit, actually decrease my workload while increasing my free time and the It doesn’t require me to spend a whole lot more time and money to do that.

    [00:03:32] So, If that’s what you’re looking for, stay with me here. So let’s talk a little bit about the history of the coaching and consulting space I’ve been coaching coaches for 27 years with an area of expertise and specialty to online coaches and consultants since 2006 so really low time. I don’t even know how long that is.

    [00:03:51] It’s 2024 right now. So With that being said, initially, like the really big buzz around scaling was going from one on one to one on group, and that is a very important way to scale. We work with our clients all the time to actually model and grow their consulting programs in that way, right? But I just, I want to define what we know about scaling as far as the majority of the knowledge of the coaching and consulting space so far.

    [00:04:18] So we know that going one on one to one on group is a really great and powerful way to scale. We also know that doing things like pre recording trainings and putting them on demand. So evergreen online courses is another really great way to scale. So basically you’re, you’re teaching the same content, but too many people at a time.

    [00:04:38] That is a very powerful way to grow your business. So let’s kind of leave that sitting here on this beautiful platter because that is scaling, coaching and consulting businesses. Now I want to elevate a different dining room table, if you will, and I want to open up the opportunity for something that will blow your mind when terms of scaling from that first platter.

    [00:05:07] If you have an established course. Training, content, process, methodology that you have been teaching to people, whether it’s one on one, you don’t even have to have scaled it on that side of the business. Imagine now allowing for other companies to teach it for you. Imagine allowing other companies to actually distribute that content and training for you.

    [00:05:40] Imagine what that would do because even in a traditional scaling model, you’re still the one doing it, or if you did advance to the point that you have somebody on your team doing it, that’s awesome, but it’s still coming from the effort of your company. Okay, so it’s still coming from the effort that is put into the service, the consulting, the product, whether it’s on demand or it’s live being delivered from you or your team or your company.

    [00:06:10] And let’s just be really honest with all the marketing in the world, you’re only going to affect so many people. What are you going to have, like 8 billion students in your online course, right? That’s just. That’s a silly thing to say, right? It’s totally impossible. So there is only so much you can do, even with all the ad spend and all the marketing and all the reach and all the partners and all the Instagram followers and all the YouTube subscribers.

    [00:06:37] There’s only so much you can do because it’s still coming from the effort of your company. Whereas with content licensing, now imagine, so you’re selling it here. Let me go back to the other side first. You still have to sell it to each one of the individuals. Who’s going to be in there, whether they’re one on one or one on group.

    [00:06:54] It’s still your sales process. Now imagine selling it one time to another company and they turn around and either sell it or distribute it to all of their people. You only have to sell it or license it once and they get to flood your intellectual property All of their people. They’re the ones that do the effort to sell it to enroll people into it.

    [00:07:24] That is the power of content licensing. Imagine taking that same course that you have been teaching in whatever format that was or that same training or that same live workshop that you’ve been going into organizations and delivering this workshop. Maybe that same process that you’ve been taking other teams through and rather than you doing it, imagine another company enrolling people into it, selling it, getting the buy in and delivering your processes and trainings and programs on your behalf.

    [00:08:00] We can go sell one to one and fill up a training program with 100 people in it. Imagine what selling one to one company would do when you are going to reap the benefits of 100, 500, 1000, or 10, 000 people receiving that training. That is the ultimate exponential scalability. That’s what we’re talking about here with content licensing and it’s so big sometimes like the potential of the reach is so huge that you might feel like, Oh my gosh, I just, you know, I’m not ready for this and I’m going to be sharing other podcast episodes with you on who’s ready, who’s qualified to do this, but just here in this space with me today.

    [00:08:46] Just give yourself a minute to absorb that instead of enrolling students, clients, people into your training one on one, even if it’s scaled, even if you’re teaching in a group format, imagine selling it to one business business, one company, whether it’s a huge organization or a coach, just like you who enrolls their students into it.

    [00:09:08] And that is the power of content licensing, and that’s why I want to share with you. It is truly one of the fastest ways to scale because we have all these other strategies that work well. Again, I’ve been teaching clients how to do it for years and years, but this, this is the one way where we know that we can duplicate you faster while reducing your time and in the end of it, extending the reach of your work because that’s what people want.

    [00:09:35] That’s what everybody wants. And so, I promised you that I would share stories and case studies about my own experiences with licensing and our clients experiences with licensing. So, here’s your story of the day. Alright, so, in the last episode, I shared a story about how I licensed one training program.

    [00:09:55] And I licensed that one training program to one brick and mortar and then a group of brick and mortar businesses. Now, I’m going to tell you what happened next, which is so cool. I took that same course. Listen to this and I licensed it to 10 other coaches just like me all around the United States and then it gets even better.

    [00:10:20] And then I charged for sponsorships of that course to product manufacturers. I kept the money for that. And then the course was promoted with huge media outlets, like at the time, um, Whole Foods Market, not a media outlet, but Whole Foods Market sponsored the class. Um, the Bunk, the Bunk. com magazine sponsored the class.

    [00:10:43] The Environmental Working Group sponsored the class. I had huge sponsors where my company was able to keep the sponsorship money. And I was able to profit by licensing the opportunity to be able to teach my course across the country by other coaches. They paid me for that. Imagine what that can do for your business.

    [00:11:03] You guys, this is from one course. One course that was well engineered, that was a sought after training, I was able to license it to other consultants, let me say that again, and sell sponsorships into that class. I did nothing. I did nothing but sell the sponsorships, release the content, release the content license agreement, and away they went.

    [00:11:27] And I, at the time when I did this, I had three baby boys. I was working from home like I still do, and my boys were at the time probably six, four and three years old. You can imagine what my house was like, how crazy it was. I was literally sitting in my office on the other side of the wall. They were like building Legos and.

    [00:11:50] Probably throwing each other down the stairs. It didn’t require me to be some strategic licensing expert. It was so much easier than you think. And I just want to open up the world of licensing to you. Imagine that because before I had done that. Again, I had been teaching my trainings and courses one on one to clients and yes, I did have online courses at the time.

    [00:12:13] Yes, we had online courses back in 2007 and 2008. Imagine what this could do for your business. Imagine what that life would look like for you. And that’s what I want to share with you on today’s podcast, taking one course, one training and imagine what you can do with it. And that’s the power of content licensing.

    [00:12:34] And that’s exactly what we teach our clients to do so that you can do the same thing that I did and many of our clients did. So if you’re interested in learning more about scaling through licensing and you want to work with us, you can cruise over to SweetLifeCo. com. Certainly subscribe to our YouTube channel.

    [00:12:53] I’m always releasing content and strategies that are proven that you can take to the bank. And if you want to tap in, we have an actual free licensing 101 video where I actually break out the four different case studies about how I got started in licensing. This is one of four other ways that are going to blow your mind, not because I’m great, because it’s going to blow your own mind about your own ability and your own potential to do this yourself.

    [00:13:20] And I’m so excited for you to experience this and just to be able to open up the world of licensing to you and certainly to be able to hold your hand and guide you through it. So if you want to tap into that video, cruise over to licensing dash tools. com. And there’s a free licensing one on one video where I unpack case studies that will blow your own mind for yourself.

    [00:13:41] That’s what we want for you. This is episode 321 here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast. I’m April Beach. If we’ve never met before, shoot me a message on LinkedIn. I’d love to connect with you. You can also follow us on Instagram. We are always here to answer your questions. Thanks so much for listening to the show and I will talk to you in the new episode.

     
     
     
     

     

     

    What is Content Licensing? with April Beach (Episode 320)

    What is Content Licensing?
    Episode Bonus: Video on HOW TO LICENSE YOUR CONTENT TO SCALE YOUR BUSINESS & INCREASE PROFIT.  To watch visit https://licensing-tools.com/
     
     
    We’re starting a new series focused on the transformative power of content licensing – a strategy to scale your business, increase profits, and gain more free time. If you’re an established business owner adept in your field and curious about content licensing, this episode is specifically curated for you. However, if you’re new to the business world, I suggest revisiting our past episodes to build your foundational knowledge first.
     
    In this episode, we dive into the nitty-gritty of content licensing. What is it, exactly? How can it be a pivotal part of your business growth? I’m here to unpack these questions, offering clear insights and strategies. Content licensing isn’t just a concept; it’s a viable option for expanding your business reach. We’re going to discuss how leveraging the courses, trainings, and content you’ve already developed can open doors to new opportunities. Through real-life examples and case studies, you’ll see how content licensing has been a game-changer for many, including myself and my clients.
     
    Key Takeaways from Today’s Episode:
    1. Deep Dive into Content Licensing: Get a comprehensive understanding of what content licensing involves and how it can be a turning point for your business’s growth.
    2. Real Business Cases: Learn from stories and case studies that illustrate the successful application of content licensing in various businesses.
    3. Strategies for Scaling Up: Discover specific strategies for using content licensing to not only enhance profits but also to assert your expertise and thought leadership in your niche.
    4. For Whom It’s Meant: This episode is tailored for those looking to significantly upgrade their business operations. If you’re not yet at this stage, our previous content will be more suited to your current needs.
    5. Exclusive Insights and Tips: Benefit from the direct experiences and advice I share, grounded in proven success and practical application.
    In this episode, we’re talking about leveraging what you’ve already created to add value to other businesses and, in turn, to your own. It’s about understanding the strategic importance of content licensing and how it can radically change the way you do business. So, let’s get started on this exciting journey to unlocking the full potential of your content!
     
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    320

    [00:00:50] Hey, you guys. Today we are starting a whole new series. series that we’re going to be diving into regarding the power of content licensing. That is how to license your courses, contents, trainings to scale your business, increase your profits, and actually also increase your free time. I’m so glad that you’re here.

    [00:01:06] If you are not an established business owner, this whole new series moving forward is based Probably a little bit too far ahead, a little bit too far advanced for you. Please pause and go back and binge all of our seven years of suite life entrepreneur podcast episodes. You can actually sort all of our episodes by topic on our website found at suite life code.

    [00:01:25] com to get what you need. Today we are diving into what is content licensing. So this is specifically for those of you who you’re very good at what you do and you want to scale your business and you’re wondering how or if content licensing is an option for you moving forward. So I’m going to unpack exactly what content licensing is for you so that you know if you want to keep moving forward with us.

    [00:01:49] In our strategy, in our show, in our content, and possibly in our consulting, if we can help you move in this direction at the end of this, you are going to be able to spin your wheels and say, wow, yes, I want to learn more. This is a really cool opportunity for me because content licensing is one of those things that is shh.

    [00:02:08] Nobody knows a lot about, and so I’m going to unpack actually what it is, and I’m going to share with you stories and case studies from myself and my clients over the course of podcast episodes in videos with you. So you can not only hear the strategy and understand the strategy, but see how the model of content licensing can work for your business.

    [00:02:30] These are all very short, compact videos and episodes that you can dive into and binge. And so let’s go ahead and dive right in. First of all, little disclaimer, I am not an attorney. And so you should definitely seek legal advice from an attorney for all of your legal contracting needs. The consulting and advice that I’m giving you here is for general educational purposes for you to use.

    [00:02:54] And I’m going to be sharing with you stories that you can apply to your business. Now with that being said, the things I’m sharing with you are absolutely strategic and they are proven and they work from a business strategy standpoint. So let’s go ahead and dive in. First of all, What actually is content licensing?

    [00:03:12] Content licensing is giving another company the ability to use or distribute your content. So it’s not selling it to them. You’re not giving them ownership of it. It’s like renting your content to another organization. And what does that actually look like for you? So if you are sitting on courses, trainings, content, content that you’ve created, Systems, methods, processes, frameworks, then you are in a prime position to allow other businesses to utilize it.

    [00:03:43] So picture this. How long did it take you to develop those processes and trainings and programs? How many years did you put into the development of your course? And how many thousands of hours did you put into establishing yourself potentially as an expert in your space? Other businesses, they don’t have the time or capacity.

    [00:04:05] And frankly, they’re smart enough to know that they don’t want to start from scratch. They don’t want to create something that you already have the solution to. So other companies are constantly looking for different opportunities to bring your trainings in to either. their employees, their staff, their users, and even to include in their own trainings and programs externally to their own clients is actually selling it as a separate product or selling it as a product suite.

    [00:04:35] So you’re probably familiar with music licensing and imagery licensing. You probably use pictures or you’ve licensed stock photography before, you know, here, It in the intro to our suite life entrepreneur podcast, there’s some music that we had to license to be able to use. That is pretty common. Most people are familiar with that, but what we do at the suite life company is totally different.

    [00:05:00] We help our clients actually license your intellectual property, the content in the processes and the trainings that you’ve created. And so that’s what content licensing is. And so this is a power packed episode just to open up the world of licensing to you. So when our clients hear about licensing, it usually comes across their plate in a few different ways.

    [00:05:23] Either a company approaches them and says, wow, you know, that was a really great talk or really great training or an individual, um, CEO of another company says, Oh my gosh, I want your training and our program for our clients. Those are usually the ways that people actually come into the world of licensing because it isn’t so widely known that most subject matter experts don’t go out there and go, Hmm, I think I’m going to just start licensing my stuff that I would say about 80 percent of our clients have actually entered the world of licensing because they’re so good at what they do and they have such great trainings that they have an audience that is asking for their content.

    [00:06:03] If you’ve ever been in a place. Where let’s say you have a partner, it’s another coach or another consultant, maybe somebody that runs masterminds or as somebody of a CEO of another company that says, wow, how much would it cost me to bring your training in, to use it for our clients? So most people in the coaching and consulting space consider that, Oh, well, it’s just a bonus to their training or, you know, I’m just gonna, I’m just going to add it in there and, and maybe generate leads from it.

    [00:06:32] But the technical term for that is licensing. That means you are giving them permission to actually rent and replay your content, to distribute your content within another program. And. Most businesses don’t have the right agreements in place for that because it’s like a spit in a handshake. And sure, I’ll give you a training to, to use as to use in your program.

    [00:06:51] And sometimes that’s totally fine. Especially if it’s just a one time thing, no big deal. But what I’m talking about here with content licensing is where we take your whole program or your whole course or a significant part of your course and actually allow other companies to add it and augment their current programs with it or to sell it as one of their own trainings And that’s when licensing really becomes a game changer.

    [00:07:18] Yes, you can absolutely do what a lot of my friends call embedded partnerships, where you just add a little piece of content into their training program, or you can take it to the next level and you can develop a licensing business model that you’re not just doing that with one business or one buddy and their program.

    [00:07:35] You are actually inserting your program into multiple training programs across the world. And that is the power of content licensing. And so my goal here in this podcast is just to open up the potential for you. First of all, so do you know the difference between licensing and selling? We are not selling.

    [00:07:57] You’re only giving somebody permission to rent and distribute your content per the terms of the agreement that you set forward. And then secondly, it is usually for a term that you can continue to offer renewals. And frankly, the goal of this is to expand the reach of your work. There’s no way, and we’re going to be talking about this in, in future episodes.

    [00:08:22] I’m asked, I’m answering all of your licensing questions here on the Suite Life Entrepreneur Podcast and on LinkedIn and YouTube. There’s no way you can actually expand the reach of your work to the point. With your marketing it yourself with your own teams. I don’t care how much money you have to put into ads, how many partners you have.

    [00:08:43] Expanding the reach of your work through content licensing gives you exponential results. And if you are like, frankly, most of our clients, one of the most important things to you is actually expanding the reach of your work and helping more people and helping more businesses and being significant in making the deep, true impact for other companies.

    [00:09:03] And they’re individual users. That’s what we’re talking about with content licensing. And it’s absolutely my joy to open up the world of content licensing for you. I have a free video that you guys, if you’re watching this and you want to dive in more and hear case studies and really start your wheel spinning, cruise over to licensing tools.

    [00:09:24] com. com that’s licensing tools. com and you can binge our licensing 101 getting started video totally free. It is going to blow your mind. So let me share with you a story about one of the ways I got started with content licensing. I had this amazing course. And it was a course that I had developed to work one on one with my clients and I shared it with them virtually.

    [00:09:51] This is back in 2007, you guys, long time ago, and I was selling it as an on demand online course as well. And so I had that set up and I was using it with my own business and it within my own tools. And I had a friend who had a brick and mortar retail store and she said to me, wow, April, I would love to have your course for my staff members to teach.

    [00:10:15] In person to increase foot traffic into our brick and mortar store. So she identified that I had a course. It was just one course, you guys, and it was valuable in that having my course or permission to teach my course in her brick and mortar store here in Denver, Colorado was a big deal. A great way for them to start marketing more, increasing foot traffic.

    [00:10:38] And so one of my first licensing endeavors was giving that brick and mortar store permission to teach my class. It seems very simple, right? But think about the beauty of this. It was a class I’d already created. Number one, number two, this particular business was not in competition with me. So then teaching my class was really beneficial for them and it wasn’t hurting my business whatsoever.

    [00:11:02] We had the same audience, but different businesses and different business purposes. And I was able to make money off somebody else teaching my course without ever having to show up and do it myself. On top of that, I also got the credit. Everybody knew it was a course by me. So when these people went to the course, they recognized me and my company as a thought leader in this space.

    [00:11:29] It was a win win for everybody. So let me recap this. I had a course that I was still using in my business to consulting business, both with clients one on one and selling it on demand for clients. As an online course. Number two, another company asked if they could use it. Absolutely. Yes. Number three, it was in no competition with me whatsoever.

    [00:11:51] And it was a benefit to this brick and mortar store as well as a benefit to their end users, as well as a benefit to me. So I ended up making money by licensing my course. to this brick and mortar store. And let me tell you what happened after this. After this, I went on to license my course, this particular, this one course to brick and mortar boutique retailers all over the country.

    [00:12:19] As a matter of fact, I had one chain that had 15 stores that licensed my course in all of their stores. So that is one of many licensing stories I want to share with you so that you can start thinking about, Hey, would this work for my business? Is this something that would be really a great opportunity for me to scale my reach and increase my profits while, like I said, increasing my free time and increasing your thought leadership through licensing?

    [00:12:49] That is one of the ways that content licensing can benefit you. And over the course of the next couple of weeks and months here on this show and all of the resources that our company is actually focusing on for you is all around content licensing. We are your go to strategists and consultants to understand how to package in price in model up your licensing offers to sell them to other small businesses just like you.

    [00:13:18] All the way up to universities, the government, corporations, and nonprofits. Those are all of the places that our clients license their content and their curriculum into. So thank you so much for listening to this show. I promised you power packed episodes. I want you to leave listening to this super excited about the potential that licensing can play for your business future and having resources that you can start rolling with.

    [00:13:42] Of course, please subscribe to this show on YouTube and And on all of your podcasts, listening devices, you can visit us. If you already know you need help immediately, you can go to suite life co. com and you can apply to work with us or join one of our licensing courses. We are always here for you and I can’t wait to help you see the future with this.

    [00:14:02] It is an absolute game changer. All right. This is episode number 320. You can visit that in the show notes as well. Take care guys. Talk to you soon.

     
     
     
     

     

     

    10 Ways To Make 50K In The Next 6 Weeks with April Beach (Episode 319)

    10 Ways To Make 50K In The Next 6 Weeks
    Episode Bonus:
    Licensing Launchpad™ – Use code “PODCAST” to access free   https://www.sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide
    Download Ultimate Guide To Online Offers and Business Models – https://www.sweetlifeco.com/licensinglaunchpad
     
    Summary:
     
    This episode is a treasure trove for established coaches, consultants, subject matter experts, and service-based entrepreneurs who’ve been serving clients and are ready to take things up a notch. We’re delving into 10 innovative strategies to boost your revenue by $50,000 in the next six weeks. It’s all about actionable advice, proven systems, and strategies that April Beach has refined over 27 years as a business coach. However, if you’re just starting out, this might not be the episode for you just yet. Remember, this is about matching your dedication with the right strategies to build a profitable consulting and coaching business with integrity.
     
    In this episode we’re diving deep into specifics. Expect to learn about personalized mentorship and the unique advantages it offers, like connecting deeply with your clients and sharing your hard-earned wisdom. VIP days, another gem, provide an intensive, focused experience that can significantly uplift your business. And let’s not forget about course licensing “quick sales” – an ingenious method to extend your reach and earnings without the heavy lifting of delivery. We’re also unpacking 7 more powerful ways you can bring in extra money like planning retreats, launching new programs, and effective cost-cutting, and more. All are designed to elevate your business swiftly and effectively.
     
    Takeaways: 
    1. Enhanced Revenue Strategies: Learn techniques to significantly increase your income in a short time frame, specifically designed for established professionals in coaching and consulting.
    2. Business Growth Insights: Gain insights into unique and practical strategies, such as personalized mentorship, VIP days, and licensing your content, to expand your business reach and enhance client engagement – plus 7 more options to choose from. 
    3. Operational Efficiency: Discover ways to optimize your business operations, including revisiting past programs and smart cost management, to maximize profit fast. 
     
     
    Bonus: 
    Licensing Launchpad™ – Use code “PODCAST” to access free   https://www.sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide
    Download Ultimate Guide To Online Offers and Business Models – https://www.sweetlifeco.com/licensinglaunchpad
     
    Additional Resources: 
    Connect with April on LinkedIn https://www.linkedin.com/in/aprilbeach/
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    319 

    And welcome to episode number 319. Today, we are digging into 10 different ways.

    [00:00:53] Okay. To help you make 50, 000 in your coaching business in the next six weeks. So let’s talk about who is this episode for and exactly what you can expect. And let’s make sure that you are in the right place. First of all, you’re listening to the suite life entrepreneur podcast. As the intro said, thank you so much for being here.

    [00:01:11] My name’s April beach. I’ve been a business coach for 27 years and every single one of the trainings that we deliver to you here on this show are proven. This isn’t a fly by night show. As a matter of fact, the purpose of this show is to deliver proven systems, strategy, coaching and trainings that other business coaches and strategists will charge you thousands of dollars for.

    [00:01:33] This has been our mission for the last seven years to make sure that these proven trusted trainings get in the hands of all the entrepreneurs that are out there that are really dedicated to building a profitable consulting and coaching business with integrity. So if that’s what you want, yeah. You are in the right place.

    [00:01:48] Again, this is episode number 319. And if you’re a new listener to the show, let me share with you the structure of how these shows actually work in the very beginning here. I’m going to tell you exactly who this episode is for, and I’m going to share exactly who it’s not for, because I don’t want this to be a shiny object and I don’t want it to be a waste of your time.

    [00:02:06] So at the beginning of every single one of our episodes, this is what you’re going to expect, who it’s for, who it’s not for. If this show, isn’t for you. Awesome, right? I believe time is more valuable than money. You can cruise over to our website at SweetLifeCo. com and you can actually search our shows by topics and actually level a business to find the shows that are right for you.

    [00:02:26] So, in today’s show, How to increase 50, 000, make 50, 000 in the next six weeks. This is for established coaches and consultants. If you are a new coach to the space, if you are here and you’re trying to launch a business and make 50 grand in six weeks, this show is not going to help you do that. So if you’re brand new to the coaching and consulting space, please don’t listen to this episode and think that you’re going to be able to get results from it.

    [00:02:52] This is for established coaches, consultants, subject matter, experts, service based entrepreneurs that have already been delivering amazing results and services that are already making money and have already been serving clients. So I just want to be really upfront. On who this episode is for. And all of our show notes can be found by visiting suite life co.

    [00:03:13] com. Simply clicking on the podcast. And this is episode number 319. And there are two bonuses I’m going to give to you upfront so that you have these, you can go navigate to these, to grab these, and then we’re going to break down these 10 different ways. The two bonuses are totally free. And the first one is our licensing launchpad.

    [00:03:32] This is actually a training that we sell normally with this episode. I’m giving you complete access to our licensing launchpad training totally for free cruise over to our website and you can use the coupon code. Podcast to get into that free. And then the other one, the other bonus, if you’re not really ready for licensing yet, and you’re just growing a consulting or coaching business, I also want you to get access to our ultimate guide to online offers and business models.

    [00:03:59] It’s a 19 page guide that breaks down all these different products and offers that you can create and sell. And actually who it’s for, who it matches, what lifestyle and basically helps you save 10 years building the wrong kind of offer and the wrong kind of business. You can also grab that by going to the show notes, cruise over to SweetLifeCo.

    [00:04:18] com, simply click on the podcast and both of those bonuses will be found in the show notes for you. So today 10 different ways that you can make 50, 000 and increase it in your business. We’re also going to dive into. Why are we even needing to have this conversation? So before I dive in and give you the 10, we’re going to certainly seriously, seriously have a conversation about why do we need to make 50 grand?

    [00:04:43] What are some things in our businesses that might not be going right where we’re struggling right now and saying, Oh my gosh, I’ll shoot. I need to bring in 50 grand. So we’re going to talk about this, certainly the solutions and the strategy, but also avoiding this. So you’re not in a place where you’re struggling to increase profit in a short period of time.

    [00:04:58] We want you to build profitable. Predictable businesses past seven figures here. And so let’s go ahead and dive into this show. Again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco. com. I am so glad you’re here. Let’s dive in. All right. Diving into what we’re talking about here today. First of all, let’s have a conversation about, you know, what could be going wrong in your business before us to need to have a conversation about how to increase business.

    [00:05:22] 50, 000 dollars or, or maybe what could be going right? And you just want to make 50 grand. So one of the things I want to talk about and why this episode is important is because right now we’re recording this here in the spring of 2024 right now, it’s really important time to be selling your coaching and consulting services.

    [00:05:39] Businesses just like yours are looking to grow. People are still looking to grow. They still have that beginning of the year, a ramp up, and they wanted to improve whatever that is, their life, their health, their wealth, their business. And so now is a really important time to be bringing money into your business.

    [00:05:57] As a matter of fact, if you have been tapping in with me and we’ve been hanging out together for years and decades, you know that how we actually plan the profit of our business here at the Suite Life company is we bring a lot of our sales in, in the springtime because me and my team, we travel. And we vacation almost all summer long.

    [00:06:18] So what that means is when we are in a time of the year where we need to have sales come in, it’s planned that way in advance. So if you find yourself here that you need to increase sales now, cause you travel like I do awesome. Or you may find yourself in this place where you’re listening to me and you’re thinking, oh my gosh, I really need to bring in sales right now.

    [00:06:38] So whether you’re listening to this in the spring or at Christmas time, whenever it is, it’s going to be an important episode for you to listen to. But the number one tip is understanding when is the right time to sell based on your industry. So if you’re in the coaching and consulting space, the right time to sell is now.

    [00:06:53] And so that’s why this episode is very timely for you. And one of the things I want to say before we get into giving you the actual 10 different ways that you can increase your sales by 50 K is that the rule here. Is it? I don’t want you to overthink it. One of the things with sales and building up to sell and increase your profit is way too much happening in your head from wondering how the wording and the messaging should go out to all these different things that we really do want to have a strategy for.

    [00:07:24] But in the case of what we’re talking about on today’s show, You just need to take action. Okay. So the rule here is don’t overthink it and definitely take action. Rule number three is taking action and making those sales calls, following up with old leads, connecting with people that you haven’t talked to in a while.

    [00:07:45] You do have to do the work. So yes, I’m going to give you the strategies to increase your sales by 50 K, but if you don’t go out there and actually do the work. It’s not going to work for you. And so that’s one of the things I wanted to be really upfront about before we dive in here. I do not believe there is magic bullets to business.

    [00:08:02] I believe that when the strategy is right, it flows right. And you make money, right? But sometimes we do have to, you know, dive in and get you a high profit in a short period of time. And so. That’s what we’re talking about here on the show. So let’s go ahead and dive in. I’m going to cover each one of these 50 different ways where you can increase sales in the next six weeks.

    [00:08:22] And as you’re going through, certainly you can go back and listen to the show notes, but be thinking about which one or two of these would work for you in some of these. Yes, you can just do one of these ways. And when we execute it correctly, Can increase your sales by much more than 50k, but you may feel like there’s two or three of them.

    [00:08:45] As a matter of fact, you may listen to this and feel like, wow, I can do nine of the 10. Don’t be that person. At least just pick one. If the most of them pick two, because we do want to execute these one or two things very, very well. Promise. Scouts honor, whatever that is. Okay, there you go. Alright, so, let’s dive in.

    [00:09:03] Number one, you’re a coach, consultant, subject matter expert. The number one way, well, I can’t even say these are in order of operation. Number one of the ten is to sell, Personalized mentorship. Now let’s talk about why this is, you know, uh, a gold arrow for you. We have with scaling, scaling, coaching and consulting businesses, everything scales, everything’s a group program.

    [00:09:30] Everything is even things that are customized or cookie cutter to a certain extent, and there is a system and a process and a method which you always need to have, but it, the system is systematized. With mentorship, let’s talk about the difference between actually what mentorship is. And I have other podcast episodes that totally geek out on this if you’re interested in those, but there’s a difference between a coach, a consultant, and a, and a mentor.

    [00:09:55] And this is. True mentorship, where you can bring in coaching and consulting and strategy. But the people that want this, they want to have a relationship with you. The people that will pay for mentorship wants to connect with you, wants to mentor with you. And that is what they’re, that’s what they want to experience.

    [00:10:15] They want to learn from your wins and your mistakes. So selling one on one mentorship, you only can sell a couple of them. All right. So it’s really important that you price it correctly according to your credibility, your level of area of expertise, you know, how long you’ve been doing it, your value of what you deliver, but what they’re really paying for is, is a personal relationship with you.

    [00:10:35] And so private mentorship. In a lot of cases for our clients starts at no less than 10, 000. Many of our clients have private mentorship offers over 50, 000. So you can, if you’re structuring it correctly and you are willing to offer private mentorship to just a couple of people, we can. easily get you to that 50 K in the next six weeks because of the nature of why this offer is so powerful.

    [00:11:05] Again, it’s not a group program. It’s completely customized to them and you’re not only teaching them what you know, you’re not only consulting or coaching them, you’re sharing the ins and outs and your personal experiences and your personal thoughts and you’re dealing with mindset issues and emotional issues and you are.

    [00:11:23] In it with them, rolling up your sleeves with them. There’s frankly nothing like private mentorship. And that’s why I wanted to lead with that. So if you’re, you’re listening to this still because you’re established in your coaching and consulting space, if you’ve never sold private mentorship before, this would be one I really want you to lean in on and consider doing, you know, we’re not in this episode going to talk about the length of time and how often you meet.

    [00:11:47] That is something that we cover in part two. Our other episodes, obviously we build that out with our clients. If you’re interested in working with us for the sake of this episode, I don’t care. Pick it yourself, meet with the person and listen to them, create it perfectly for them. We’re talking about bringing in extra money for you in order to do it.

    [00:12:05] We need to create and deliver offers that people really want to pay for. So number one is private mentorship. Huge advocate of this. Um, I only I do private mentorship for clients. It’s quite expensive because here’s the thing. And here’s a little warning about that. With my clients that I mentor, I’m like thinking about him when I’m in Costco and when I’m on the side of my kids across field and talking to my husband about them at dinner, you know, Clients that you mentor, they, they consume you.

    [00:12:32] They become part of your life. So the, the only thing I’ll say, and then I’ll be quiet about this is just make sure you really like the people and that you love them and their business, actually, that you’re willing to do mentorship with. All right. So number one. One on one mentorship. Number two are VIP days.

    [00:12:47] We talk about VIP days all the time. My friend Amy Yamada has been on the show. We’ve talked about VIP days before, just actually a couple episodes ago, we talked about how to structure VIP days. I love VIP days. You probably love VIP days. These can be online days or they can be in person days. VIP days are days where usually the morning time is structured for Understanding and listening to what somebody needs in the afternoon is structured to actually give them the strategy and the outcomes they’re looking for.

    [00:13:15] People love high value, short time. And so for VIP days, I recommend you don’t sell any VIP day for under 10, 000 and they can fly in, you serve them lunch, you meet at a hotel or a beautiful destination place, or you can do an online virtual, uh, VIP day. If you are going to do the online version, And I want you to remember, I said, minimum 10 K for VIP day.

    [00:13:40] I would love for you charging, you know, 000 for VIP days. Then if it’s online, let’s make sure that you curate something really amazing so that you have lunch delivered to their house or their office. Um, you know, you send them a coffee mug, you know, with, with coffee in a freaking coffee grinder that they can grind to, to get through the day.

    [00:14:01] whatever that is, um, fermented mushrooms. I’m a big fan of fermented mushrooms. I think they’re like a game changer, not the psychedelic mushrooms, fermented mushrooms. Although there are arguments, great arguments for the psychedelics too. I just don’t send my, my clients psychedelics, but anyway, whatever that is for you, just figure it out and make it so good that they really feel like that very important person.

    [00:14:23] And they have a hundred percent of your attention VIP days. Number two, I want a list for increasing your sales in the next six weeks. The third one is licensing. We talk about licensing a lot on this show. I’m a licensing strategist. Basically, if you don’t know what licensing is, what it is, it’s taking your courses and your programs and your trainings and allowing other companies to distribute them, whether it’s within their own courses or trainings or allowing them to actually sell to their audience.

    [00:14:52] So basically we’re taking the same product that you’ve built and we’re allowing other people to sell it or distribute it. Licensing is. For sure, the way to skyrocket your business, especially those of you guys who have established trainings. And so let me share with you how with licensing, because some licensing deals actually take a long time to close.

    [00:15:09] So the bigger the deal, the longer it’s going to take to close. So here, for the sake of this show, I’m not talking about the licensing deals that some of my clients have that are closing for three. 300, 000 a half a million or even over a million dollars. I have some clients with pending agreements on the table for one course for over a million dollars.

    [00:15:29] That’s not what I’m talking about here. I’m talking about what’s called a licensing quick sell. That is a training program that you already have. We know it’s fantastic and you can sell it to another coach or consultants. We need to make sure your agreements are right. This isn’t like just giving them a bonus training to add to their training because we’re increasing your profit.

    [00:15:50] Not just giving somebody away. Something nice. This is actually where we take your established training program and we actually license it to another consultant or coach or another business that’s similar to yours, or at least a totally different business that serves the same audience licensing.

    [00:16:05] Quicksales are a really. Great way to increase your profit fast. The reason why I actually love this one is unlike mentorship and unlike VIP days, licensing quick sales, you just need to sell it and then you get to walk away. You don’t have to do anything. You don’t have to deliver it. You get to actually release your training and the company is responsible for delivering it.

    [00:16:25] So third way is a licensing quick sell. One of the bonuses that I mentioned in the beginning of this is free access to our licensing launchpad. It’s like this little teeny mini launchpad. 43 minute training with like five different videos on who you can sell your stuff to and how to get started. It’s a great training.

    [00:16:42] You can cruise over to our website at SweetLifeCo. com forward slash licensing launchpad and use the coupon code podcast to get into that for free. So if you want to know more about that, go grab that over there. Number four is opening old programs. So And we’re going to talk, this kind of goes through like the, the, this one, number four and five kind of fit into the same thing.

    [00:17:05] So opening an old program. So if you have an audience that used to be fans of programs you used to sell that you aren’t even using them anymore, maybe they aren’t even part of your marketing strategy. You can open up old programs like the Disney vault. Okay. How many of you guys have kids that are my age now they’re like in their teens and early twenties.

    [00:17:27] And do you remember when. They had the, we had the Disney DVDs and you only could go buy these DVDs is brilliant for Disney. Like you only could go buy these DVDs and access them when the Disney vault opened, right? So like when the Disney vault opened up like the old school Cinderella and whatever, we would all go buy it because like we didn’t have Disney plus and we didn’t have things on demand.

    [00:17:51] So it’s taking that same concept. It’s opening the vault of old trainings. I don’t care how big they are. And you can open up one training from your old vault and just say, Hey, listen, it’s open right now. You know, I want you to go ahead and grab into it. If you missed it in the past, here’s access to it.

    [00:18:09] Now that has been really, I mean, obviously it’s proven Disney did it. They make millions of bucks, but it’s been proven to help businesses where your audience might have changed. So if you’re serving a different audience or maybe your audience is You know, in a bunch of different places or a bunch of different levels, opening your vault of old trainings can serve a certain sector of your audience that maybe you’re just not currently marketing to, or maybe isn’t something that might be part of the future of your business.

    [00:18:38] But they’re still hanging out and they still love you and they want access to your stuff. So opening up your vault of old trainings is is one really really great way and that’s like a one time open Close. All right, and then number five is we’re going to take that same vault concept But this is going to be different now I want you to think about opening up your vault of not just one training But opening up your vault of all of your old trainings now Let’s, let’s, let me say the word old in a different way.

    [00:19:08] They can’t be out of date. They can’t be crappy, right? They have to be really great, but maybe you just don’t sell them anymore. It’s not part of your marketing strategy. Maybe you’re sitting on a bunch of trains that we never really got into a launch plan. And so it was a great idea and you wanted to build it, but it just turned out that it wasn’t the right timing or whatever.

    [00:19:29] Those are the trainings I’m talking about. So I want you to think of if you have a collection of trainings, opening up your vault of trainings, and then turning it into a membership. Okay? So people can get into your vault of trainings, and they can access all All of your gold and all of the assets that you’ve previously sold that are amazing.

    [00:19:54] And they can be part of a membership program. Now the deal with the 50 K in the six weeks is that this is going to be something that you can generate the sale of 50 K to be collected over like a 12 month period of time. Usually these vaults of older trainings don’t sell for like as much as your mentorship is going to sell for.

    [00:20:12] But we can invoice out and we can project sales for 50 K for a period of time for over, you know, six months or a year. So yes, we can generate 50 K in sales, but it’s a difference between like projected income and collectible income. You’re going to be collecting that over a period of time. Okay. Want to make sure we’re honest about that.

    [00:20:31] But again, this was great for those of you guys that have an established fan base. Maybe you’re not actually selling to them actively in the future, but you can take instead of just one training and opening it up, you can take up a vault of trainings. And if you really want to sweeten the deal, And really get people, cause we want people to register for it over the next six weeks.

    [00:20:52] Okay. The rule of that is those registrations total up 50 K in that period of what, if it’s a 12 month membership or a, or a six month membership, however you want to do it, I would do 12 months. So we need an, we need to do the math to say how many people at, let’s say a monthly membership of a hundred bucks.

    [00:21:10] Do I need to get to register for this over the next six weeks so that I have projected. You know, future income. So make sure you’re doing your math correctly in with that. You are going to have to sweeten the pot, right? We might think about running some ads to it, to get some paid traffic as well. And just using those conversions.

    [00:21:28] But what can you do as far as extra bonuses, live support that you could add on to them for that vault of trainings that. You’re just sitting on waiting to make money on. So let me recap where we are so far. So we talked about one on one mentorship VIP days Licensing we talked about opening one old program that used to be like if you have like an old gold standard program Everybody loved you became known for that.

    [00:21:54] You can open up that for a very short period of time You can release it on demand or live. The number five is opening up your vault of all of your resources All of your assets. If you’re like me, literally you have decades of assets that you’ve created for people that frankly, you can’t even fit it all into your marketing.

    [00:22:11] You’re just not enough time in the year to even sell all that you’ve created. That’s what I’m talking about. That’s really valuable. And then let’s kind of switch gears a second here. Number six was totally different. Number six is literally planning a retreat. And taking deposits for that retreat. So if you’ve been thinking about planning a retreat and you want to increase sales in a short period of time, now’s a great time to do that.

    [00:22:36] People are booking retreats for the middle and even the end of the year. I, by the way, literally put my deposit down for another surfing retreat in Costa Rica. You guys are totally going to laugh at me. But you won’t laugh at me if you’ve been listening to this show, you know, this is totally me. I booked two retreats for myself already for 2025.

    [00:22:55] Number one, I’m going back. It’s not even a retreat. It’s just a trip, but still I had to pay my deposit. I’ll be surfing in Costa Rica again, next February, 2025, and I’ll be surfing in Barbados in October of 2025. Those are two things I already paid for you guys. I already paid my deposit for a year and a half away.

    [00:23:15] So there are crazy people like me. They even, if you can’t have the retreat this year, if your retreat is so good, it’s so amazing, it’s exactly what they’re looking for. They will pay you a deposit like me because we’re planners and we like knowing, I like knowing I get to surf. Okay. So those are some of the things.

    [00:23:33] If you want to increase sales and you want to have retreats, yes, you have to choose the dates and get all the details, but you can book a retreat. You can go ahead and start selling to that and you can take deposits right now for a retreat that. You don’t even have to host for, like, it’s, I don’t even know how far away October of 2025 is.

    [00:23:51] It’s over a year and a half away, you guys, I paid for a retreat. Okay. Uh, number seven is launching a new program with deposits to hold the date. Okay. So obviously you can make 50k. I’m not going to sit here. You’re listening to show and be like, well, do a launch. That’s not what this is about. Right? And if you’re like me, you hate live launches anyway.

    [00:24:11] So it doesn’t fit what you want to do. What I’m talking about here is. Telling everybody that you’re building a new program or you’re launching something could be even later in the fall and taking deposits for that right now. So let me give you an example. We have another 30 day licensing accelerator coming up in September.

    [00:24:32] I already know we have it. We have the dates and there’s a bunch of people that couldn’t get into our accelerator that we’re hosting this month in March. And so we have already sent out emails saying, Hey, listen, if you want to be part of it. For next fall. And you want to lock in the dates for the one you missed right now.

    [00:24:48] You can pay for it now and you can be part of it in the fall. So launching a program, but taking the money now to either lock in a current rate or lock in a future rate, or maybe it’s just a deposit. So that’s number seven. And I wanted to make sure I was explaining that in the context of what we do for our business, because I know that helps people understand.

    [00:25:08] Number eight affiliates. We talk about affiliates a lot. I love partners and affiliates and. We have many podcasts on how to build your business and how to increase sales with affiliates. And I really believe that affiliates and collaborations are the way of the future. And it’s one of the best ways to bring in sales.

    [00:25:30] So if you haven’t either created affiliate yet or whatever that looks like for you, please go and create affiliate partnerships. So reach out to other people. Other businesses that serve your same clients and ask them to, you know, sell your program for you, give a percentage of sales to these people. One of the best ways and the fastest way is my friend, Kathy Hahn used to say this, that, you know, we grow your business is, you know, by borrowing somebody else’s audience.

    [00:26:00] And so that is partners and affiliates. So don’t ever look affiliate launches. Don’t ever look affiliate partnerships. And, but I also don’t want you to overthink this. I, you promised me that you would be here listening to this show. If a member of where I was like, you can’t ever think it, you just got to do it.

    [00:26:15] So I’m not talking about some big, huge affiliate structured program right now. We just need to bring in 50 K for you in the next six weeks. So literally. Send people emails or pick up the phone and be like, Hey, can we set up a time to have coffee? Literally do it. Old school grassroots reaching out to people.

    [00:26:32] It doesn’t have to be this big, huge affiliate launch with all this stuff. I don’t even care in this case if you have an affiliate software. If you have 10 affiliates and we set up how people register for your program correctly, We can track where, where people come from. You know, there’s other ways to track that.

    [00:26:51] So please don’t overthink the affiliate thing. Reach out to people that you know. Reach out to people that you might not know and you wanna know, and give them a percentage of sales for selling into your program. So number eight is affiliates. Number nine. I love this one. Number nine is outside of the box.

    [00:27:11] I should do a whole episode in this and we don’t talk about this enough. It’s building collaborative offers with friends. So you could, so that same affiliate person we’re talking about, what if the two of you guys get together and do like a short term, super special, Oh, what? And there’s another word we could think about for it.

    [00:27:32] Like super special, limited time, you know, behind the scenes access, exclusive blah, blah, blah thing that you do. And it’s not just your audience. You pick one amazing partner and the two of you together build a collaborative offer that you launch in the next six weeks. It’s only for this short period of time.

    [00:27:54] Like if you don’t buy it now, we’re never doing this again. And you build a collaborative offer with somebody else, you pool both of your audiences, you pool the collective genius of collaboration, and that is just a really, really great way that you can increase sales in a short period of time. And so let me kind of catch you up on what we’ve talked about so far.

    [00:28:16] We talked about number one is mentorship. Number two is VIP days. Number three is licensing quick sales. Four is opening an old program. Five is opening a vault of old programs. Six is planning a retreat and taking deposits. Seven is launching a new program, but you don’t have to actually launch it yet.

    [00:28:37] You’re just having deposits to hold the date of, you know, when it’s coming in the future. Seven, I don’t even know if I have my numbers, right? Uh, no. Eight is affiliates in actually having this affiliate sell your programs for you. I’m looking at my notes while I’m talking to you. Nine is building a collaborative offer with a friend.

    [00:28:57] And then the last one, I know it’s like super not sexy, but we have to be honest here. The last one is just cutting your costs. How many things have you invested in that you are not using that are shiny objects that you spend a ton of money on? How many different programs have you purchased? How many different subscriptions do you have?

    [00:29:18] You can probably cut a significant amount of costs on crap that you had just bought that you thought was. Important for you to buy at the time. Maybe it was maybe maybe it was a great purchase. Maybe you needed that. Extra whatever 10 K and software, you know, maybe you needed to join a different program.

    [00:29:41] Now, granted, do not ever default on a program. That’s a terrible thing to do. Don’t be that person. If you promise to pay for something, obviously we need to pay for what we promise to pay for whether or not you’re using it. We’re all adults here. That’s a choice that we make when we go into somebody else’s mentorship or business program, right?

    [00:29:57] So I’m not advocating for you to, you know, yeah. Be a bad person and not pay for things, but what have you paid for that? You’re still paying for that. Maybe you don’t need, do you have teams that are doing activities, but maybe you aren’t delegating well, maybe you need to put them on a little bit of a hiatus because maybe they aren’t doing that much work and it’s something that.

    [00:30:20] Um, you know, we want to, uh, save that and help increase sales so that you can pay them again. Whatever that looks like to you, but really when was the last time you looked at your operational costs? Um, I tried to do this. I have a money day on my calendar and honestly my money day is on my calendar every single month.

    [00:30:38] It’s the last Wednesday of every single month and it literally says money day and there’s a little bag of money emoji next to it. What the money day is is that’s my day. To say, okay, where are we with our finances? Did we reach our financial goals this month? What are we spending money on? Is that still a good use of our money?

    [00:30:56] And, you know, basically like, where are we at with our numbers? You can save thousands of dollars. I mean, frankly, even just going through the subscriptions on your, your Apple. Subscriptions that come through every single month and save literally hundreds of dollars might not be 50 grand, but how much are you paying for that?

    [00:31:17] You really shouldn’t be paying for. I think if we’re at this place where we’re having this conversation and we want you to increase and bring in 50, 000 in the next six weeks. We need to be really serious about what that looks like. And regardless of what you do, please look at the money you’re spending and where you’re bleeding out anyway.

    [00:31:37] That’s one of the first things that we want to do. And then go back and pick one or two. I’ll give you a pass that the saving money and cutting on subscriptions can be like a third one. Then pick two other ways that may work for you and your business. And the beautiful thing about this is it doesn’t have to be forever.

    [00:31:55] You know, this is only for a short period of time. And you may find that some, this strategy of, you know, selling a little bit in this period is selling a lot in this little short period of time is something that you actually love and it works really well for you and your audience. And you may totally love that.

    [00:32:12] You may find that, Hey, we’re going to, we’re going to do this type of a, a launch strategy here a couple of times a year, but right now I want to help you increase sales because you’re listening to this podcast because you seriously need to increase sales for some reason. And, uh, I want to help you do that.

    [00:32:27] And there’s my children calling me right now from their places of being, and because they always interrupt me in my podcast. So welcome to behind the scenes here of our life. If you guys don’t know me, if we’ve never met, um, you know, my husband and I own five companies. I travel seven months a year and I own two international consulting firms.

    [00:32:47] One of the things that’s very real here on the podcast is I have like dogs barking outside. And my kids are calling because they have an emergency breakthrough and their, their phone always rings to mine. It never goes silent. Um, so welcome to our world, but my commitment to you is that every single thing that you get here from us on this suite life entrepreneur podcast, and in our business coaching and services is totally designed to help you be more successful in what you have chosen to do at your contribution to the world, whether it’s to individuals or to businesses, that’s our commitment to you.

    [00:33:19] So I’m so glad that you’re here. Thank you for joining me. Please share this episode. I deny advertisers because I hate advertising listening to it on podcast episodes. So I refuse advertisers. So we totally rely on you sharing this show. Again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.

    [00:33:34] com. Simply click on the podcast. This is episode number 319. So you can search and find this episode, all the show notes, that bonus to get into the licensing training, the ultimate guide, everything we have there is designed to help you be successful. No strings attached. All right. Have a great day. Thanks for being here.

    [00:33:54] I’ll talk to you guys on the next episode.

     

     
     
     
     
     

     

     

    Navigating the Leap from B2C to B2B Effectively with April Beach (Episode 318)

    Navigating the Leap from B2C to B2B Effectively

    This episode is tailored specifically for you if you’re an established subject matter expert, coach, consultant, strategist, service provider, or if you’re deeply entrenched in the B2C model but feel the pull towards transitioning to B2B. April Beach, a seasoned business strategist with over 27 years of experience, guides you through this critical juncture in your career. This episode is crucial because it addresses a common yet challenging pivot point: shifting your business model while leveraging your expertise and maintaining a balanced life.
     
     
    April Beach delves into the intricacies of transitioning from a B2C to a B2B business model. You will learn about:
    • Recognizing when you’re ready for this shift and how to initiate the move.
    • Strategic questioning to align your future business goals with personal aspirations.
    • Techniques to repurpose your existing B2C offerings for a B2B audience, such as through licensing and embedded partnerships.
    • Exploring high-level strategic consulting for B2B, to understand and cater to the new audience’s needs.
     
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    This episode is a deep dive into how you can redefine your business model while keeping true to your expertise and creating a work-life harmony.
     
    1. Self-Reflection is Key: Understand the importance of your legacy and how you want to be known in your industry. This will influence how you transition and what parts of your business you carry forward.
    2. Designing Your Future Work-Life: Consider who your new clients will be in a B2B context and how this will change your work dynamics, from daily interactions to the nature of your engagements.
    3. Leveraging Existing Assets: Explore how your current B2C offerings can be transformed into B2B solutions, such as through licensing or partnerships, allowing for a smoother transition.
    4. Embracing Strategic Relationships: Engage in high-level consulting in your new B2B sphere to build relationships and gain clarity on what these clients need and value.
    5. Simplicity and Impact: Learn how transitioning to B2B can often simplify business processes and amplify your impact, potentially leading to more significant results with less direct effort.
     
    By the end of this episode, you’ll have a clearer vision of how to navigate the shift from B2C to B2B, making strategic decisions that align with your long-term goals and lifestyle aspirations. Tune in to uncover insights and strategies that will empower your journey into a new realm of business.
     
     
    Resources: 
    Connect with April on LinkedIn https://www.linkedin.com/in/aprilbeach/
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    318

    [00:00:46] Hi guys. This is episode number 318 and together. Today, we are going to talk about that point in your business where you feel like it’s time to transition from a B2C audience to a B2B audience. So this episode is for you. If you are an established subject matter expert, consultant, strategist, service provider, or a coach, and you’ve been doing what you’ve been doing for a really long time, you’re probably very, very good at it.

    [00:01:14] And you’re wondering. What is next? You might be feeling like you’re a little tired of continuing to consult or deliver the programs you’ve been delivering. And you’re just sitting here at this place in your business season and in your life where you’re thinking, guy, how do I actually transition? Out of this business model, what comes next, especially if you are a coach or a consultant and you are so immersed in that space, sometimes you aren’t even aware of what’s possible or even how to move into that next level.

    [00:01:45] And so in this episode, I’m going to unpack for you considerations to think about knowing when you’re ready for this and actually how to get started moving in that direction. If that is a direction that you feel like the timing is right, so if that is you, you are definitely in the right place. This is number 318, so episode number three 18, and I’m April Beach.

    [00:02:08] If we don’t know each other yet, I have been a business strategist and a consultant to people just like you for over 27 years, and here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. We deliver coaching and trainings and strategies for you to think about that are going to move the marker for your business.

    [00:02:24] And frankly, for your personal life as well, because you are probably like me and you know, that business and life should be designed in harmony, all of the show notes and everything that we’re talking about here can be found by visiting sweet life. co. Dot com, simply clicking on the podcast and it’s so great to meet you.

    [00:02:45] Thank you so much for tuning in. Let’s go ahead and dive into this week’s show. All right, so let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. Today I am talking to you. If you are an established coach or a consultant and you’ve been doing the work, you have been delivering the strategy, you have been leading the teams, you have been leading the students and the clients.

    [00:03:04] You are the product. It’s your genius. Even if you’ve put them into programs, systematize them, basically you are the one, you are the program, you are the product and your business is doing really well. You have delivered amazing results and you’ve helped other people or other companies get results in whatever your area of expertise is that that you consult or coach on.

    [00:03:28] Now, you then may reach a time in your business where you want the way you work to look different, but you might not know what that could be. Like what comes after the launches? What comes after the masterminds? What comes after the VIP days? What comes after I relaunched my new program and I have all my partners and my affiliates?

    [00:03:53] What else? Does your life look like in terms of your way of working? And so I’m really excited to record this episode because this is one of the primary areas that we help coaches and consultants transition from Is from that b2c over to a b2b business model and so I wanted to record this episode To help you think about what their transition could look like, and just to help open up the world of could come next for you to start understanding and to start considering your options.

    [00:04:23] So right before I recorded this episode, I actually had a phone call with a friend of mine and she’s been a very well established coach in her space for over a decade. She has her things she does. She has her programs that she launches and she’s just feeling She’s kind of done with that. She’s done always being the one delivering the coaching.

    [00:04:46] Now that doesn’t mean she doesn’t absolutely love it. It doesn’t mean it doesn’t fire her up every time she leaves a strategy session with a group of clients. She absolutely loves what she does. But here’s the difference. She’s ready for a different way of working. She’s ready to do more in her mind.

    [00:05:11] What she thinks is something next, something higher level, uh, more strategic. And she’s kind of done And I want to, I don’t want to say getting tired, but maybe you are getting tired with it. So this relates to you with her current way of working and she has made a lot of money. She’s a seven figure entrepreneur.

    [00:05:32] She’s made a lot of money and she’s just wondering what is next and. I have this conversation with our clients all the time. So I want to have this conversation with you. And that’s what we’re talking about here on the show. What is next? What does that next level of business look like for you? What could it look like for you?

    [00:05:52] And I, I’m going to unpack some suggestions here, or maybe not even suggestions because I can’t give you specific suggestions. We’re not actually in a personal conversation here, but I’m going to unpack some options based on what our clients do. And to help open up the doors for you just to be thinking about, but first, I want to start out with some very, very important strategic questions for you to ask yourself.

    [00:06:15] And this is the one thing I think that either stops you from moving forward, either not taking time to answer these questions, or it may direct you to move forward in the wrong way. So the reality is, is when you are to this point in your business and you are ready to build this next level business model, you want to be doing business different.

    [00:06:39] You want to be reaching more people. You want to be making more money, but you really don’t want to be working as much as you probably have in the past. So there are some important things. That we want to think about because this next level of business is very strategic and it needs to be right for you.

    [00:06:57] You’ve put in the time, you’ve put in the effort, you’ve put in the marketing, you’ve put in the content creation. So as we’re moving forward, I really want for you to make sure that this is going to be the right. Next level business design. And so here’s some strategic questions that I want you to think about.

    [00:07:16] And the answers to these questions are going to help you to identify what are those next level opportunities that you could walk into. Basically, what are you going to do next? What does this work life look like next? So the first thing I want you to ask yourself is how important is it to you That you are known for your area of expertise and the answer to that, there isn’t a right way.

    [00:07:43] There isn’t a wrong way. I was just coaching a group of clients in our licensing accelerator this morning about this same question, meaning that it is totally okay if you want to be known as the end all be all as a creator of these things that you have been doing in the past. That’s important. It’s important to identify that you want to be known for that in order to clearly build the next level of what you’re doing.

    [00:08:07] If you don’t need or want to be known for that, and you want to go in a different direction, that’s great for us to know as well. So, question number one is just for you to be thinking about, you know, what, how important is it to me that everything I’ve done in the past is well documented and it’s a legacy and I’m going to bring this with me into the next level.

    [00:08:28] We can still leave that there. All your footprint, all of what you’ve been known for, we can even continue to help that B2C side of your business continue to make money without you. But when we’re talking about this B2B transition or this next level business transition, basically how much of that is coming with you?

    [00:08:47] Does it just simply need to be repackaged in a different type of a way? Or do we leave that in an established business? And are we building maybe a next level brand or a next level business? It’s absolutely based on how you want your life to function five and 10 years from now. So question number one was, how important is it for you to be known for the work that you’ve done already?

    [00:09:09] Is it important for you to bring the awareness of your creation of that IP with you? Or are we building something totally separate? The answer to that will determine what you do with your established offers and how you move forward in your next level of business design. The next question I want you to think about is what do you want your cadence and your work to look like in five and seven and 10 years?

    [00:09:34] Basically, who do you want to be working with? Who do you want to be talking to? Do you want to be talking to these people on a daily basis, a weekly basis, a monthly basis? Do you want those conversations to happen in person? Do you want them to happen virtually? Where are you sitting when those conversations happen?

    [00:09:52] Are you on the beach at a resort in the Bahamas? Are you at home in your home office? Are you in a structured office space with a team? Ask yourself, what is going to light you up in the way that you work? This is all about the way that you want to work because the way that you want to work, we can build any business model around that, but it starts with identifying and giving yourself permission to think about.

    [00:10:22] How do you want to work? What is the way that you want to work? What do you want to be doing? Who do you want to be doing it with? Where do you want to be doing it? All of those things are very, very important for you processing this transition into a B to B side of your business. So again, what do you want to be known for?

    [00:10:42] What is the way that you want to work in the future? And that’s going to help you gain clarity in your business model. And don’t worry, I’m going to give you some tips and different things that our clients build out. As they move into this transition. But then the last thing I want you to be thinking about is, who now are your clients?

    [00:10:59] So let me just say that again. Who now are your clients? In the past, in a B to C side of the business model, your clients are the end users of your products. You have always sold to the one that is utilizing your tools and your trainings and your systems within their own business or their own life. So in the past, the audience, your audience was the actual end user.

    [00:11:25] Now as you move to B2B and consulting businesses in a different level, who is your audience? Is your audience the actual end user still? And if so, what does that business model look like? In fact, usually when we transition businesses out of B2C, you’re letting go of courses, trainings, workshops you’ve taught in the past, or at least we’re restructuring how they’re done without you involved.

    [00:11:56] And we’re moving you over to speak on more stages, write a book, consult at a different level. You are having a different audience for a different reason. You might be teaching your thought processes rather than your step by step SOP end result solutions. What part of what you want to be known for are you bringing in and actually teaching and delivering to that new B2B audience?

    [00:12:25] These are choices you get to make and as you go through and you give yourself permission and that’s the purpose of this episode and you can actually be thinking about, wow, you know, these thoughts that have already been, I already know this, by the way, if you are here and you’re thinking about transitioning to B2B, I already know that at least some of these thoughts have been floating around in your mind, probably with zero structure, just kind of popping into your mind and you have been already processing some of these.

    [00:12:51] And we already know that because you are smart, you are an established business. And so then therefore these are the smart next questions that you are automatically processing and thinking about. What are you going to sell? What are you going to do? Who are you going to do it for? Why is it going to be important to them?

    [00:13:07] So again, think about what does it actually look like and what are you wanting to deliver to that B2B audience? Because they’re no longer the actual, or they probably are no longer the actual end users of the, the training or the strategy or whatever it is you’re delivering, because then you’d still be in B2C, but instead we’re designing a next level business model for you.

    [00:13:33] And you’re going to be doing probably. Speaking on the same exact area of expertise, but how you’re going to do it, like how we’re delivering it is going to be different for different people for probably a different, higher level, higher in more strategic purpose. And so those are just some foundational strategies before I even give you some suggestions on how you can move forward in this and different things that you can create in a B2B business model.

    [00:14:06] I just want you to give yourself permission to process those. Many more conversations need to be had around those processing them here with me on the podcast. This is like. A little drop in the bucket. And here is why your strategy moving forward. We want to make sure it’s right. And I already alluded to that in the beginning of this.

    [00:14:24] We, if we’re building and we’re designing the next level of your business, we need to make sure we’re doing it strategically, right. Based on what you want, based on your future business goals and strategies. It’s very, very important. I don’t want you to have to be in a position where you’re rethinking this.

    [00:14:40] And where you might want to, you know, totally scratch it and start over again. Let’s do it right the first time because time is our most valuable asset that we have. And I hope to give you as much time freedom as possible with the strategies that we deliver here on the podcast. I know we do that for our clients at the Suite Life Company.

    [00:15:00] That’s what I want you to get out of this. So now let me give you some suggestions about different things that you can do. you can move into this B2B side of your business. So the first thing is, look at those offers that you’ve been selling B2C, those trainings, programs, even workshops that you’ve been doing on the B2C side.

    [00:15:26] Can you, or are you interested in still continuing to do them? Are you still going to keep that B2C side of your business? Frankly, most of our clients say yes. There is this tipping point. We have to tip the scales. So before we can move all the way into this next level of business model, there’s a transitionary period.

    [00:15:46] And so let’s say you’re like most of our clients. Yes. You’re going to be working through the B2C sides of your businesses, and you’re going to be continuing to profit on the B2C side of your businesses. And we can keep scaling that. That’s awesome. But then ask yourself, are there pieces of those trainings and programs that I can actually now, instead of delivering them myself directly, that I can actually allow other companies to deliver them.

    [00:16:12] That you can allow other companies to distribute them. So here is an example. If you have one sort of training or solution or workshop that you teach that you have sold, maybe you’ve done a launch around, whether it’s a PLF or running ads to it and webinars and whatever that is, can we actually allow for other companies to embed that into their current programs?

    [00:16:37] That is the easiest way, the smoothest and the most entry level way that we help our clients transition into that B2B business model by taking the current trainings and programs that you’re used to delivering yourself and allowing for other companies to deliver them within their programs. That is also a term that people throw around called like an embedded partnership.

    [00:16:59] Really the, the true term for that is called licensing. We talk about licensing a lot here on this podcast. It’s not just like a spit in a handshake. There are some parameters around that that need to be done correctly to protect your IP and to make sure that it’s a win win situation for everybody. But just talking about the model of it, do you want to take trainings that you are used to delivering yourself and now you can sell them and license them and release them to other companies to include in their programs?

    [00:17:30] Immediately, we can take you out of being the one to deliver them and we can benefit other businesses and their end users by allowing them to utilize and share your content. It’s a really powerful thing and it’s a very simple transition. So we’re taking the same product, but we’re just releasing it to a different audience.

    [00:17:55] We can take your same. Trainings and programs, but instead of you selling them to the end user, we sell them to the person who has access to all of the end users. Today in our profitable licensing accelerator, when I, when I was talking about this and I was helping our clients unpack what their CAD that we were going through their assets and all of the potential of all of the different trainings that they could put into these licensed embedded partnerships.

    [00:18:25] And we were going through these and, you know, one of the, one of my clients asked, they said, gosh, you know what, if I really was a comment, she said, I gosh, if, you know, if, if I realized that I could actually touch so many more people by selling it in this way to the person that already had access to my whole office audience, then by trying to find my audience myself, I would have done this years ago.

    [00:18:49] So it’s not only a great business model for when you are ready to phase out of that B to C in actually doing the work, it is a very smart, profitable business model because by doing this, you can actually reach more people with your work with actually less work for you. So that’s the first thing. That’s one of the primary areas that we work with.

    [00:19:12] Our clients on at the Suite Life company is creating those sort of partnerships and licensing their content. But there is another area that I want to share with you that maybe if you aren’t ready for that and you’re just kind of tipping the scales or playing with the B to B to B to C side of business and you’re not really sure how to go through this transition, then I want to let you know that you can actually go back to some high level strategic consulting for B2B.

    [00:19:40] So if you’re trying to figure it, you’re not really sure what you want to do yet. You’re not really sure how you want to spend your time. You can very simply start doing some consulting with what would be your new audience and you literally win. Build relationships with them, you pour into them, you take your expertise and what you’ve been doing for years and you start building trusted relationships with that new audience, whether it is going in and meeting with them one on one or meeting with them virtually or providing insight in the purpose of this is to Twofold number one is to build trusted relationships.

    [00:20:18] Like I said, with that new audience, but number two, it helps you to gain confidence and it helps you to get clarity on the different types of programs that you may want to start creating on a B to B business level. So when you’re looking to actually transition and stop selling directly to your end user, but serve other businesses who then serve your end user, they have different needs and you probably have amazing solutions to their different needs that are only a few degrees away from your actual assets and your products.

    [00:20:52] I want to encourage you that. Moving into those relationships and just having conversations with these companies is also a really great way to gain clarity on what you’re going to be happy doing in the next level. And frankly, what this new audience might need and want from you, you’ll find it as you move into this B2C space, that’s, it’s actually really, really simple.

    [00:21:16] Whereas in B2C we have complicated funnels, even the guy that emails me all the time in my inbox saying, get rid of the complicated funnels, buy my short funnel, whatever it is, right? It’s still a funnel. It’s still a marketing strategy. When you move into B2B in a way that you’re flowing in your zone of genius, you’re in flow state, you’re utilizing the assets and the resources that you have absolutely already created.

    [00:21:42] You have developed results for other people. And you’re moving forward in a way that is a different type of relationship to work with and partner with these other businesses in a way that helps their end users and makes both of your companies more money, then that is going to be the right direction for you as long as it aligns with your zone of genius, it opens up your time in your life the way that you want it.

    [00:22:05] And you’re literally building a different cadence of work, how you work, the re the assets you release is different. So you can start just by taking the current programs you you’re selling B2C and now allowing other businesses to sell them. Or you can can start by meeting with and networking, consulting those other businesses first, and then creating new level packages and programs that are appropriate for them.

    [00:22:29] When you do this. What all of our clients have found is that opens up a massive amount of time for them to fill in other passion projects. And let me just end with a story. This is A mind blowing story and I can’t say that i’ve ever been able to share this case study Because I have literally never had a client come to me and tell me these results before so i’ll end this podcast with this Last friday.

    [00:22:57] I had a conversation with a client named cheryl And we helped her move from teaching workshops into licensing and it was, she was very successful at it because she has amazing programs. And so when you have a great program, it’s easy to move from B to C and to be into B to B. But she literally said to me on the, on the phone call, she’s like, It, I can’t believe how easy this is to sell and I have so much time on my hands in such a short period of time.

    [00:23:28] So fast. I have so much time on my hands that I’m just not really sure what to do with it. I have never ever in 27 years of business coaching had a client call me to tell me I’m making so much money and I have so much time. I’m not exactly sure what to do. So I tell you that story because frankly, I mean, to be really honest, it blew my mind to have somebody call and tell me that.

    [00:23:51] It’s an incredible case study. It’s definitely not the norm. Not everybody gets into this business model and all of a sudden, three months later has so much money in time that they just are at a loss for what to do. Um, so I’m glad it worked. It has worked out that way. Certainly not the, not the average result.

    [00:24:10] It does take more time to transition into this B2B business model for the rest, the rather 99 percent of our clients. And I, but I just want to share with you that when it’s right, when you give yourself permission to figure out what you want that to look like, when designing this next level of your business is done intentionally.

    [00:24:32] And you have the ability to work through the strategy. It actually is that simple might not happen that fast, but it is that simple because this next level of business that we’re sitting here talking about in this podcast episode is your next level of life. It’s your next season of life. And you’re here listening to this episode because you need it to be simple.

    [00:24:54] Because you want it to be simple because you’re tired of the complicated this in the constant working in the constant coaching and the constant doing in the constant hands in the mess. And so I want you to ask yourself, what does that simple look like to me? What do I want to be doing with my time?

    [00:25:12] What do I want to be doing with my work cadence? What do I want my profit to look like in the next 357 to 10 years? Thanks. And that is what I wanted to talk to you about on this show. How do you actually transition out of that B2C into the B2B? And I want to make sure you know that these are the things that I want you to be thinking about as you move into those decisions.

    [00:25:38] Because these strategic decisions, first of all, you have earned the opportunity to be here to be having this conversation. You would not still be here 23, four or five minutes later into this podcast listening to me if you didn’t know you were ready for this. So congratulations. for being to a point in your business of doing great work where you get to be thinking about this for yourself.

    [00:26:00] I’m really, really excited for you. And I can tell you this next level of business will open up so much time for you as long as you do it right. And as long as you give yourself permission to think about what you want it to look like, because as I always say, the We can build any business model to achieve any time and lifestyle goal that you want, but it starts with you deciding what you want.

    [00:26:25] All right. Well, that is a wrap. I hope that you found this show, this particular episode beneficial. Certainly if you need help strategizing your B2C over to B2B transition, you’re wondering what to build, what programs to sell, how to move into B2B, we would love to support you in doing that. You can visit us at SweetLifeCo.

    [00:26:46] com. You can also find me on LinkedIn at SweetLifeCo. April beach. And I’m happy to answer any questions for you. All of the show notes, the transcription for this and all of the resources and assets we have available to you can be also found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. We appreciate you being here, listening to this show, and I will talk to you guys next week.

    [00:27:06] Thanks so much.

     
     
     
     
     

     

     

    How To Add A Train The Trainer Program To Your Course with April Beach (Episode 317)

    How To Add A Train The Trainer Program To Your Course

    Bonus: 
     
    Who This Show is For and Why It’s Important
    You’re in the perfect spot if you’re a subject matter expert, coach, consultant, speaker, author, or leader contemplating or already developing a Train the Trainer program. Whether you’re looking to license your content to other companies or elevate your existing certification program, this episode is a goldmine for you. April Beach, the founder and CEO of the SweetLife® Company, brings her expertise directly to your journey of expanding the reach and impact of your work. With a focus on strategic content structuring, this episode is not just about creating a program but ensuring it is profitable and impactful.
     
    What We Cover and What You Will Learn
    In this episode, April Beach delves deep into the intricacies of building an effective Train the Trainer program. You’ll learn how to structure your content strategically to facilitate success for other trainers. This includes providing the necessary materials, such as outlines, speaking topics, benchmarks, training agendas, and the core content like PDFs, slides, and workbooks. More importantly, you will understand how to infuse your unique thinking and genius into these materials, elevating the trainers to deliver the content as effectively as you would.
     
    April doesn’t stop at just content delivery; she also explores the importance of communication skills, the creation of a learning roadmap, user management, and internal marketing techniques. These insights will help trainers not only present the material effectively but also engage and inspire their audience, leading to a more impactful learning experience.
     
    Key Takeaways
    1. Content Foundation: Understand how to break down your program into manageable parts, focusing on both the core materials and the high-level strategic thinking behind each segment.
    2. Communication and Facilitation Skills: Equip your trainers with the necessary skills to handle sensitive topics and foster engaging, productive discussions.
    3. Visual Learning Roadmaps: Create visual aids to help trainers and learners track progress and understand the journey through the program.
    4. User Management Strategies: Learn to manage and track attendees effectively, ensuring a streamlined and accountable learning experience.
    5. Internal Marketing for Buy-In: Develop materials to help trainers advocate for your program, ensuring engagement and enthusiasm from participants, particularly in scenarios where they don’t have a choice in their participation.
    This episode is more than just a guide; it’s an empowerment tool for you to elevate your program, making a profound impact while freeing you up to pursue your passions. Tune in to transform your Train the Trainer program into a dynamic, effective, and profitable venture.
     
     
    Resources: 
    Join our elite business consulting programs for support building your Train the Trainer program, licensing courses, or creating a certification https://www.sweetlifeco.com/amplifyphase
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    317

    April Beach (00:01.258)
    Hey there, this is episode number 317. And in this show, we are breaking down how to actually structure the content for a Train the Trainer program. So if you’re a coach or a consultant, you are a subject matter expert or service provider, and you are building an actual Train the Trainer program, you’re wondering what actually goes into that, what are some of the things that I could think about? We are gonna break all of that down for you in this particular podcast episode.
     
    My name is April Beach, if you and I don’t know each other yet. And I am the founder and CEO of the SweetLife® Company and host here on the show for the last seven years. Thank you so much for listening to this show. We’re super glad that you’re here and we are known for delivering business trainings and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for. If you are in a place where you are building your certification program or a train the trainer program.
     
    or if you’re ready to start licensing your content, your trainings, your courses, and your curriculum to other companies, you are in the right place. Visit us at SuiteLifeCo.com and you can apply for our Amplify licensing accelerator, or you can immediately get into our entry-level but powerful licensing launch pad training by visiting lice
     
    April Beach (01:20.55)
    In that training, I even break down for you exactly what the top 10 industries are looking for when they are out there hunting down programs just like yours to bring into their organization. So in this show, we’re talking about how to actually build the components and just different ways that I recommend you think about strategically delivering your content in the train, the trainer capacity.
     
    If you have any questions about this show, when it drops live, I will be off grid surfing for 10 days in Costa Rica, but you can always email my team at hello at sweetlifeco.com. If you find yourself in an urgent situation with a licensing opportunity, or if you would like to learn more about our upcoming 30 day licensing accelerator, it’s kicking off in March. I am so excited about it. It’s a first ever thing.
     
    then visit us at sweetlifeco.com and we will save you a seat in there. So for this particular show, as promised, you are gonna walk away understanding some of the different assets that you can deliver in a Train the Trainer program and the pros and the cons of each. We’re gonna unpack this for you. I’m gonna do a 360 degree view of all of the different.
     
    Content that you may want to deliver in a train the trainer program and also some of the reasons and considerations for each one Now your program is going to be completely unique here on the podcast I’m not able to hear what you have to say and actually personally pour into you like I am able with our clients So this is going to be a little bit more of a strategic high-level overview, but
     
    I know it will be powerful. I get questions about this all the time. And so stick with us here and we’re gonna dive in and I’m gonna share with you all of the nuances of how to build a Train the Trainer program successfully. That’s gonna be profitable for you and valuable for the people you’re delivering it to. All right, here we go.
     
     
    April Beach (00:01.142)
    All right, so congratulations, first of all, because you have a program that is so great, now you’re leveling up to the next stop and you are bringing other professionals in to understand how to deliver your unique intellectual property, your unique content, your program. And so we need to create a way to help others facilitate your work. And we do that by creating what can be considered as a train the trainer program. Now, depending on what you’re specifically working on,
     
    What we’re talking about today is not gonna fit into a perfect box probably for you, but I want you to walk away with really good considerations of how you can package up that Train the Trainer program and what actually makes sense to include for you based on the relationship that you have with the trainers. Now, if you have a huge organization you’re working with and they have elected a few people to become trained on your materials,
     
    because perhaps we are licensing your training into that organization, or maybe you’re just bringing it in as a workshop, then you aren’t gonna actually be able to pick who those people are. So if you’re in a position where you don’t get to pick who the trainers are, that really helps us to understand what more are we gonna wanna give to this individual or this group of individuals in a way that’s gonna make you feel really, really good about these people being the projectors and the facilitators of expanding the reach of your work.
     
    Or if you’re in a place where you can choose who will be the facilitators of your material, then that is awesome as well. So let’s go ahead and start with foundationally, what do you need to deliver to these people to set them up for success? The first is the actual content itself, okay? This isn’t rocket science, but you need to deliver the actual materials of your content.
     
    whether it is a program or a course or a curriculum or a step-by-step process or a workshop that they need to facilitate the delivery of, you need to give them the materials that they need. So think about how you created this training yourself when you were delivering this B2C. When you first started delivering this on your own, which is how most of you guys started in this place, which is great,
     
    April Beach (02:19.566)
    because we hashed out all the issues and now we know we can really level it up, right? And it’s ready to go. How did you deliver that? You had slides. You probably had an outline of the training. And so first of all, identify what did I need when I was teaching this directly myself? And then the next step to the foundational materials is, what is somebody else going to need to be able to deliver this well? And here are examples of some of what we recommend our clients.
     
    building when we’re building a train their trainer program. So the first one is an actual outline in speaking topics for every single benchmark in the program. Of course, you’re gonna ask now, what is a benchmark? A benchmark is a word that I use to define a different section or part of the program. It may not be a module. A benchmark could be a section of time in a whole workshop.
     
    A benchmark is a focused area of work that is being taught on that is usually delivered as somebody else would consider it could be a module or it could be a training topic. So those are your benchmarks. So for every single benchmark, you need to outline the agenda for that benchmark. You also need to make sure the trainer fully understands the ideal outcome. Like what is the goal that we’re going for here within this benchmark? What is the
     
    end result of understanding that we want people to have, not within the whole program, within this benchmark. So step number one is not only outlining the content, saying here’s an outline of the content, I mean, that’s pretty basic, shoot, chat GPT can do that for you, but what isn’t basic, what is your uniqueness, what makes your program powerful is the way you think, it’s who you are, it’s where the content came from, which is your own genius.
     
    And so you need to think about infusing, how are you gonna level up that trainer to be able to understand your way of thinking to the best way possible? And so I want you to think about unpacking for them parts of things that they could be thinking about within each benchmark of your program. And as in what needs to be the end result goal of this particular benchmark. And so you’re gonna have a collection.
     
    April Beach (04:32.386)
    of actual thought processes that you want these trainers to be thinking about. Now I know that may seem like a ton of work and this might not be the right thing for you. It’s not necessarily the right thing for everybody. You don’t have to go to all of this work, but depending on the content of what you teach, depending on how in depth your material is, and depending on how important mindset and psychology is, which frankly it is to a lot of.
     
    even the basic business strategies out there, that’s certainly something for you to consider. Also, of course, the basics, workbooks, slides, training materials, outlines, agendas, and you can even have what we call teacher guide. In our programs, when we deliver our classes to other coaches to deliver, our coaches get a trainer guide. And a trainer guide is a breakout of every single slide and questions and things that they can bring up for every single slide.
     
    So the trainer and the actual person delivering it can actually facilitate it as if it was their own. And so we’re really leveling up that trainer to look like this just incredible, amazing badass, basically. So that’s the depth that we go. Those are just some things for you to consider. So part one is the actual content itself. Of course, you’re gonna wanna deliver the basic content, the PDFs, the slides, the workbooks, the worksheets, right? You need to give them all the materials in order to facilitate the program.
     
    Then that gold standard, where I really encourage all of our clients that we work with, we always ask, what can we do more? How can we serve more? How can we equip more? It doesn’t always mean more content. It just may be more strategic thinking. And those are those other key benchmarks and considerations within the content of the program. So that’s part one. We’ll call that the core content. But then there are other things that are important.
     
    to take into consideration that you may want to include in a train the trainer program. And in this episode today, we are not gonna be able to get into the model of how you deliver your train the trainer program, you know, meetings, face to face, Zoom groups, benchmarks, all of those things we work with our clients, and we help our clients strategize all those. We would love for you to apply to become a client, visit sweetlifeco.com, and we’ll have a conversation about if that’s a right step for you.
     
    April Beach (06:56.438)
    But I want to talk about the content itself and some things that you may not be thinking of. And here’s the reason why. Sometimes we have been doing what we’ve been doing for a really long time, and we kind of take for granted the things we already know, or things that may just be obvious to us in our own communication strengths and skills. It’s not always the case. And so in your Train the Trainer program, here are just some examples of other things that…
     
    you may want to consider adding in. The first one are communication tips. Like how to be a thoughtful teacher or how to be a good listener or some communication 101. You could even bring a communication expert in to work with the people that you’re certifying if communication isn’t your particular area of expertise. But how do you actually help them be a better teacher, a better listener, a better leader, a better facilitator? How?
     
    If based on your content, are they going to maybe experience some communication issues? So is your content something that could bring up some touchy topics within a workspace or deal with some topics that are not really well communicated within a work, you know, within a group of people? If that’s the case, don’t throw them to the wolves.
     
    equip them and think of what you can do to help these trainers really facilitate these tough conversations based on your work. So those are some other things to be thinking about. Some other tactical things that I want you to think about is what about a roadmap? Can you give your trainers a success mark benchmark roadmap? And this is something it’s a quick visual, it’s a graphic where you can say, hey listen,
     
    for people that you’re taking through, here is what they should be learning. It’s a learning roadmap for their end users to help the trainers themselves know that they’re on the right track facilitating the material. So visual things, everybody learns different. I’m a big visual person, so I really love those maps. My clients laugh because I’m always making them maps. And half of them.
     
    April Beach (09:06.722)
    think they’re great and the other half are really nitty gritty thinkers and they want me to write it out in a project plan. But whatever that is, right? So think about how the people that you’re working with think and learn and alter your materials to equip them based on who they are and based on your materials. And then a couple of two other tips for you. I want to make sure that you have here today. The first one is
     
    User management. This is like a tech side of it. Make sure that you are equipping them to understand how to manage the attendees. So is it a software that they need to have? Is it understanding how to track attendees? How to provide that accountability to the end user is a really big deal, especially when you aren’t gonna be there to actually handhold, which is the beauty. That’s why we love to train the trainer programs from your material, because we get to free you up so you can…
     
    Go surfing with me for 10 days in Costa Rica with a bunch of girls, right? Like that’s the lifestyle that we want, right? Or whatever that looks like for you. But we have to make sure we’re thinking about these things. The better you can do equipping, that the trainers that are delivering your materials.
     
    the more surf trips you can go on with me, right? So those are the things I want you to be thinking about. What are the questions that may come up in that? So accountability, keeping people on track, facilitating software, and then the last tip I wanna give you is content for internal marketing. Now hear me out, again, every single one of these tips is an entire podcast episode on its own, but hear me out. Your trainers are not you, and they don’t understand
     
    everything frankly that you want them to understand and own with the material in your program. And so in the process of being a facilitator of your program, they’re going to need to explain how important your program is to the end users, especially if the program is being instituted in an organization where the end users don’t have buy-in choice. So let me say that again, if your program is being brought in, I’ll say it in layman’s terms, if your program is being brought in,
     
    April Beach (11:20.342)
    by an organization where the employees that are taking it don’t get to choose whether or not they’re taking it, then we need everybody to love it. We want them bought in because we know when they’re bought in that they’re gonna get better results with your materials. How do we equip the trainer to communicate to the end user in why this program is so rad, why it’s amazing, why this material is so good, why it’s gonna make their life better or their work better or their processes better or save them time or, you know.
     
    whatever it is that your program does. And so you wanna equip the trainer with internal marketing materials. And that could look like swipe copy that they take, just like when we’re building affiliate programs to get affiliates to help you launch your training or your course on the B2C side. We do the same thing on the B2C side, on the B2B side, but we’re gonna equip the trainers with internal marketing for them to best communicate with the people who are taking it to get the buy-in that.
     
    everybody needs because in the end when we release a train the trainer program where everybody has buy-in and the end users freaking love it then you have renewals you have word of mouth referrals your work expands because we have now sold it into more and more and more and more and more organizations increased your profit bought you more time increased the reach of your work so that you can make a greater impact and it’s not all sitting on your shoulders all on your own
     
    Creating the Train the Trainer program is a huge game changer.
     
    April Beach (12:54.894)
    And my dogs are barking. So that is the end of this podcast episode. And I could ramble on this forever, actually. But the reality is, is that doing this type of level, moving into B2B from B2C is an absolute game changer for you and your business. As long as we do our due diligence, as long as we do our due diligence and package up and price and release your materials correctly. And this episode…
     
    is an initiation to help you build your Train the Trainer program. And if you can just do one thing, at least take one takeaway and look at what you’re building and apply that to it, we’re gonna level up your program automatically. And if you weren’t even sure if a Train the Trainer program is right for you, or what’s the difference between a Train the Trainer and a certification and licensing your course and releasing it to all these other companies, if you weren’t even sure what the options are available to you, but this podcast episode just…
     
    spiked your interest, you’re absolutely in the right place. And everything we do here as a company is helping experts build your million dollar offer ecosystems and level you up, increase your profit and expand the reach of your work through building programs like Train the Trainer and licensing programs. And basically taking the work that you’ve already done and helping you expand your reach and make more money off it. And so if you would like to work with us to do that, definitely consider tapping into our licensing accelerator.
     
    or just our beginning licensing training called Licensing Launchpad, both of them can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com. And all the show notes, everything we talked about here is going to be able to be found on our website as well, sweetlifeco.com. This is episode number 317. And if you haven’t yet…
     
    Subscribe to our YouTube channel as well because we have so many videos and trainings and the video of this podcast episode will actually be over on our YouTube channel. If you wanna hang out with me visually, leave a comment. I love hanging out with people there and building relationships with you over on our YouTube channel as well. Okay, all right, you guys have an incredible night and I will talk to you on the next show. Take this, apply it, and level up your business.
     
     
     
     
     
     

     

     

    How to Price Your Content or Courses for Licensing with April Beach (Episode 316)

    How to Price Your Content or Courses for Licensing

     

    Who This Show is for and Why It’s Important
    This episode is a must-listen for coaches, consultants, and content creators eager to explore the lucrative world of licensing. April Beach delves into the specialized area of licensing intellectual property, particularly focusing on content, trainings, systems, and courses. This topic is crucial as it unlocks new revenue streams and allows for the expansion of business reach and impact.
     
    What We Cover and What You Will Learn
     
    April Beach guides you through the practical steps of pricing your curriculum for licensing. You’ll learn the importance of understanding your operational costs, including software, team expenses, and the logistics of content distribution. The discussion goes further into calculating the Return on Investment (ROI) of your content, emphasizing both tangible training benefits and lifestyle improvements. April introduces two main pricing strategies: bulk pricing and ‘Amplify ROI’ pricing, explaining how these can be applied based on the specific needs and outcomes of potential licensees.
     
    Key Takeaways
    1. Understand Operational Costs: Know the expenses associated with licensing your content, like software and team support.
    2. Calculate the ROI: Assess both the tangible and lifestyle impacts of your content.
    3. Pricing Strategies: Learn two methods – bulk pricing and ‘Amplify ROI’ pricing.
    4. Customized Approach: Tailor the pricing based on the licensee’s specific situation and outcomes.
    5. Value Communication: Communicate the measurable value and transformation your content brings to the licensee.
     
    After listening to this episode, you’ll be equipped with insights and strategies to confidently price and license your intellectual property, enhancing both your business growth and the value you deliver to your clients.
     
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    316

     

    [00:00:46] Hi there and welcome back to the show. This is episode number 316 and we are diving into a topic today that I know that many of you have had on your mind. You actually hunt us down for the answer to this question. So the question that we’re answering today is how do you actually price your training or your program or your curriculum or your content to license it To other companies, what do you charge for that?

    [00:01:13] Where does it even start? And in this episode, I’m going to introduce you to the strategy of pricing. You are here because you’re probably a coach or a consultant or a subject matter expert, and you’re certainly in the right place. As you know, my name is April Beach and me and my team work with subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants to help you license your material and give you all the steps.

    [00:01:37] Even down to the pricing calculators of releasing your content, expanding your reach and increasing your profit through licensing. And so you’re here because you’re good at what you do. Let’s just frankly talk about that first. The fact that you are even in a place where your work. Has made a significant impact on a B2C side, whether it’s in programs that you’ve delivered directly or workshops or consulting you’ve already done.

    [00:02:04] And now you want to release it into the hands of other companies and possibly even other companies are coming to you asking you for your content. So congratulations on being absolutely top notch at what you do and having proven systems, methodologies that other people want, and frankly, not everybody is there.

    [00:02:26] So licensing is an advanced move. You can tap into all of our resources we have here for you. And if you haven’t yet, the best place for you to start and to get more information so that you can license your program successfully Is by visiting licensing launchpad. com. It’s a short little mini masterclass.

    [00:02:47] You can go over there and I’m going to unpack for you how to get started with licensing, even what the top 10 industries are looking for. It’s a great starter place for you. If you are ready to go in licensing. You can always shoot us a message by visiting suite life coat. com, and we will partner with you and help you to be successful at that.

    [00:03:06] So this episode, number 316, we are answering the question of how, how do you even prices? And I’m going to actually break out the steps and the questions that you need to answer before you are able to. Price your licensing offer and training, and then I’m actually going to break out the two different ways to actually price your program so you can consider which one is best for you.

    [00:03:28] So if that’s what you’re looking for, stick with me here. We’re going to dive into all the things here in this episode. Okay, a little bit of a foundation. Uh, if you have never heard about licensing before, please go back into our podcast resources, and I have many trainings. You can even visit our YouTube channel, where I have trainings about licensing, how to get started with licensing, what is licensing, and we have so many resources available to you.

    [00:03:53] But let’s talk about what is the definition of licensing. You’re probably actually familiar with licensing. Licensing songs, licensing art, licensing. Images for your marketing, uh, licensing brands. So for example, let’s talk about the, the biggest brand that everybody knows, Mickey Mouse, right? So your child may have a Mickey Mouse backpack that Jansport licensed permission to put Mickey Mouse on a Jansport backpack, but who owns Mickey Mouse?

    [00:04:21] Disney Corporation, right? That is an example of licensing. By the way, that is not the type of licensing coach I am. That is not why you’re here. I know that. We’re talking about something different. We’re talking about a secret scale strategy through licensing, and this secret is why people come and seek us out, and why businesses are All over the world work with us to learn, to license their materials.

    [00:04:45] And that is licensing your content, licensing, your trainings, licensing, your system, your thought process, your framework, your courses. That’s the kind of licensing you and I are talking about here. And I can’t wait to dive into this with you and at least start to skim the surface of this first. burning question that I already know that you want to know the answer to immediately.

    [00:05:10] So in order to answer the question of how do you actually price your curriculum for licensing, first, there are some things, some very important things that you need to know. And some of these are common sense, let’s just be honest, but my job is to make sure that I’m filling in all the holes for you so you don’t do this wrong in the most I can do here for you on this free podcast, obviously giving away free information and, uh, it’s, it’s very valuable what we’re talking about here today.

    [00:05:42] So the first thing is you need to be able to identify your operational costs for licensing this. This is back to a lot of business 101. But frankly, you would be shocked at how many coaches and consultants out there don’t know their numbers. So the first thing you need to do is you need to understand your operational overhead of how much it’s gonna cost you in hard costs.

    [00:06:10] We’re not talking about your sweat equity here. Yeah, we’re talking hard cost of how much money your company is going to have to spend to maintain the release of your content into licensing. And here are some different areas that can control your costs. So where, first of all, is the training content going to live?

    [00:06:35] Does that training content live in your LMS or is that when you release your content to another company or another entrepreneur, you know, whatever that is? Who houses the content? There are hard costs with software. They’re hard operational costs with that. You need to know your company costs. Another example of this is is teams.

    [00:06:56] So are you’re in part of the release of your content to another organization or corporation or even another entrepreneur, whoever you plan to release your content to, which is Totally a different strategy. We can’t even get into today. The question is, is how much time is it going to take you and your team to actually facilitate that release?

    [00:07:19] Well, And will you or your team be required to provide ongoing operational support? So those are two really two of quite a few different numbers, but those are two really hard numbers that you can’t change. And if you’re trying to price your program for licensing and you don’t know those numbers, the very first thing you should be doing is going back to the organization or the potential licensee that you’re talking to and Getting the answers to those questions.

    [00:07:51] Where does the content live? Who is managing the, the, the it and the customer service and the onboarding of this, you need to know the expectations of you and your team so that you can understand the hard numbers. We aren’t even talking about profit. We aren’t even talking about the value of the actual program yet.

    [00:08:10] Step number one, there are some hardcore numbers that you need to know and before you can price any sort of licensing program for release, you need to know them. Other factors that will come into your pricing are legal costs and making sure that you have a correct licensing contract. By the way, we give all of our clients our licensing contracts template and we help our clients to actually customize that and then they can take it over to an attorney for legal advice.

    [00:08:35] So those are some shortcuts that our company can provide to you. But they’re very important costs, and you don’t ever want to cut legal corners in the process of licensing your intellectual property. So just make sure that you know what your costs are and that you can anticipate those costs before you give an organization a price for your program.

    [00:08:57] Now, there are other factors, and I want to break these apart for you. So what is the ROI of what you deliver? First of all, there’s two Basic forms of ROI that your content can deliver and that your content can deliver both. First of all, your content can deliver an actual tangible training benefit of some kind.

    [00:09:21] So you’re up leveling a skill, you’re up leveling, uh, the way, the way. People do things, you’re teaching a method or a process or you’re giving a system. You’re actually leveling up information. You’re feeding people or you’re feeding a company, a wonderful, amazing systems and processes that level up their knowledge, their implementation, their information, their content, their training, their skills.

    [00:09:44] That’s one side. And then, and I’m going to do a whole nother podcast for you guys on this. Cause I get questions about this all the time. The other side is your program can. also benefit lifestyle. So your program may have a training benefit, generally speaking, or it may also have a lifestyle benefit.

    [00:10:01] This is really important to understand. One technically is not more valuable than the other. So if you, for example, have a program that teaches people how to increase sales, teaches sales teams in an organization, the exact thing to say, and it gives a sales process. That fits in an actual skill upgrade.

    [00:10:23] If your program is helping to increase wellness and mindfulness and lifestyle, that is a lifestyle benefit in both are as important, but you need to do the work and find out the ROI. Every single thing has a number. Okay, not talking about sales numbers. Every single solution has a correlated number that it can relate to that affects the bottom line of every single company or the bottom line of every single individual.

    [00:11:01] It and when I’m talking about bottom line, it’s not always dollars in increase in bottom line could be more time. It could be, uh, saving frustration. It could be helping parents communicate with teenagers. It could be preparing for a baby, or it could be equity, diversity and inclusion and understanding how to level up an organization with your training.

    [00:11:23] You know, there’s so many different parts of what you do, and it benefits in two different categories, either a training category or a lifestyle benefit category. Pretty generalized here just for the sake of this podcast. But step number one, know your operational expenses. Step number two, be able, you have to be able to articulate the ROI that your program actually delivers.

    [00:11:44] And you need to find the numbers, the percentages, the statistics out there that relate to the solution you provide. And then step number three is to actually price the program itself. And I told you that I would give you our two main pricing formulas here on this show. And here is my promise delivered.

    [00:12:01] There are two ways to price your program for licensing. Number one is bulk pricing, and number two is what we call Amplify ROI pricing. And that one particularly is named after our Amplify licensing accelerator and program. Now, let me explain to you the difference of these. Bulk pricing is pretty general, exactly what you’re thinking.

    [00:12:25] You are going to reduce the cost based on the number of seats in a program. So if you are selling at retail, let’s say your program’s 1, 000 retail per person. If an organization wants to buy 1, 000 seats to 1, 000 a program, how much are you willing to reduce that cost for that organization without undervaluing the transformation that you deliver?

    [00:12:48] So bulk pricing. Pretty straightforward. You know, I don’t ever want you guys winging anything with pricing because there are many other things that come into a factor with pricing. But for the sake of this podcast, most of you guys are probably thinking, Oh, well, do I just bolt price it? Those are, those are the questions I get when we connect with new businesses.

    [00:13:08] Uh, it’s usually, do I bolt price it? And the answer is yes, you can absolutely do that. They’re. Tons of other factors, including value and operational expenses and ROI. And are you collecting royalties? Uh, and all the other things that you could add into that, like your consulting time and workshops you may teach, or maybe you’re doing a keynote.

    [00:13:29] There are so many other things that factor in that, but pricing structure, number one is bulk pricing. We do have a bulk pricing calculator that we give to all of our clients. If that’s something that you would like to access. And then the other side of it, this one is a bit more complicated. It’s actually my favorite, and the reason why it’s my favorite is because when you present this pricing structure to a potential licensee for your program, there’s nothing that they can ever say to you to say, this price is wrong or this price is too much.

    [00:14:03] There’s nothing that they’re ever going to be able to do based on how we use this Amplify ROI pricing calculator. And here is what it is at a high level. You price your program based on the ROI. Whether, remember a minute ago we talked about whether it’s a training ROI or a lifestyle ROI, and it doesn’t necessarily always equal hard numbers, you price your program based on the ROI that you reasonably believe that your program can deliver.

    [00:14:39] And the coolest part about this, you guys, it’s, I’m going to geek out on numbers now, which this is the only area of business that I actually geek out on numbers. Let’s be real. Um, and, uh, you know, not a huge numbers fan here until it comes to something like licensing and pricing and, and profit. But the reason why this is so cool is because you can actually customize the ROI based on every single company’s specific use case.

    [00:15:11] So you can say this number of, you have this number of people in your organization that are affected by this problem. And based on your organization’s numbers, very specifically, we are going to charge you this because we reasonably believe we can create change for your organization based on your Own numbers in what’s so cool about this amplify pricing calculator in when you just generally speaking, when you are able to articulate what your program delivers and then be able to say, and here you go, this is your organization, or this is your small business, or this is your corporation, or this is your university.

    [00:16:00] And here, here’s what is being affected in your sphere and with based on your numbers, you literally take the potential licensees own numbers, whether it’s numbers based on people or numbers based on the statistics or numbers based on sales or numbers based on attrition, whatever that is that that organization is struggling with and the, your program obviously affects and solves and we can literally take the organization’s own numbers and show them back to them.

    [00:16:29] And it’s such a cool thing in being able to have the power to sit across the virtual, which is really what it is now table from an organization and saying, I see where you guys are struggling here. I want to be able to partner with you. I want to bring this solution that we know is proven. We know it’s transformational, which we have to know that little little prerequisite here.

    [00:16:51] If your program and your content isn’t transformational yet, we need to level that up. And sit across from them and say, here you go. Based on your numbers. This is what we have and we want to create this change for you. And we want to, we want to help you do this. That is the Amplify ROI pricing formula.

    [00:17:11] And so let’s kind of recap what we talked about here today. We talked about how to price your program for licensing. No joke. You guys, this is the number one thing that I get people reaching out to me on LinkedIn and Instagram and sending us messages saying, I’ve been approached by a company and they, you know, I need you to help me price this very, very fast.

    [00:17:32] Within our own client private ecosystem, we do help with those type of emergency wonderful opportunities. But here on the podcast, let’s be real. I can’t I can’t give you the exact answers to that. And I would be doing you a disservice if I did. I haven’t even heard your voice yet. So I’m giving you as much as I can to really equip you to move in the right direction to start thinking strategically about licensing so that You don’t shoot yourself in the foot so that you don’t undersell yourself.

    [00:18:00] Um, and let me tell you a quick case study of a client of ours because I want you to feel this way as well. She came to us and she was teaching a 6, 000 workshop to an organization. She had amazing systems and processes and materials and she’d been a consultant to corporations for a really, really long time.

    [00:18:19] And based on her content, we were able to repackage it. And represent her program out using a combination of the bulk calculator and the amplify pricing calculator. And she was able to turn around and license this program for 298, 000. And she said to me, she’s like, I never would have ever asked for that much.

    [00:18:44] And so that might be what you’re thinking. You know, when we talk to clients with licensing, sometimes there’s. A big mindset block in this where you’re thinking, how can I go from selling something that might have been, you know, even like a 10, 000 strategy or a 1, 000 course or shoot, even if it’s a 9 course for heaven’s sakes, how can I go from that?

    [00:19:10] To licensing it to an organization and asking them for 100, 000 or a million dollars for it. And the answer to that is understanding number one, the measurable value of your work. Number two, the tangible transformation for the end user, for the licensee and the end user. So let’s, wow, I should do a whole nother podcast episode for you guys on this, but there’s a difference between your licensee and your end user, right?

    [00:19:39] When we’re moving into a licensing business model, and you’re, you’re leveling up in this B2B landscape, your end user is, is not the one you’re selling to. It’s different. The licensee is different than the end user. But that’s step number two, is being able to communicate the tangible, predictable, measurable results for the licensee.

    [00:20:01] Not even just the end user for the licensee the company that’s actually licensing your content from you and then being able to sit in front Of them showing them their own numbers and confidently and reasonably pricing based on research based Pricing methodologies in once you have this if you in any way struggle with mindset.

    [00:20:23] I can’t charge this much. How on earth am I going to charge as much blah, blah, blah, blah, blah. Then understanding the process of going through in pricing, your IP pricing, your trainings and your programs and adjusting that price accordingly to each one of your licensees. It’s just going to wipe out. Any of the guesswork that you’ve ever had, and you’re going to be able to confidently stand on your work, on your genius, on your intellectual property, knowing without a shadow of a doubt that you are going to deliver the predicted results that the program says that it will deliver in a reasonable, ethical pricing manner.

    [00:20:57] And guess what? When you’re done with that pricing, you may look at those numbers and say, that’s a half a million dollars. But you’re going to feel so good because you know, just like my client knew when we went from 6, 000 to 298, 000, she knew that we’d done the work. She saw the formula on paper. She knew the ROI because she’d done the work to unpack the process of Pricing and there was never a question and guess what happened when she went, she was so nervous to go back to this organization and say, yes, you know, here you go.

    [00:21:29] Here’s a proposal. It’s 298, 000. The guy looked at her and he goes, you know, across from zoom, you looked at her and he goes, Oh yeah. Okay. Yeah. That sounds great. Okay. Well I’ll get back to you later on today. This looks great. I mean, she probably could have charged even a lot more than she did. And her mind was blown about the value that she provided.

    [00:21:49] And I mean, at the end of the day, that’s what we’re all here to do, right? I’m here creating this podcast episode for you to, to create value. And to pour into you and to help create a change in your thinking and your business so that you can move on to do the work that you’re really called to do. You’re here to learn how to price it so you can create value and pour in to the people that you’re supposed to serve and expand your reach.

    [00:22:17] But both of us, you and me, we truly deserve to be compensated from the years and the blood, sweat, and tears and the research and the experience that we’ve gathered in order to do what we both do. You deserve to be compensated for your work. I deserve to be compensated for my work. We’ve worked hard to earn that.

    [00:22:39] But in the same thing, we always lead with providing value. And when was my last thing I’ll say to you here in this episode, when you lead with always serving first, no one will ever question pouring into the value that you request. Never. They’re never going to question that because they truly believe that you have their best interest in mind because you actually do.

    [00:23:06] That’s the difference maker. And you can actually take this pricing lesson in this strategy and apply it to everything that you’re doing, whether you’re pricing a course or a mastermind or a retreat or anything else as well. That’s how we price these programs and that’s how you’re going to be successful.

    [00:23:24] I hope and know that you found value in this. I appreciate you being here again. My name is April Beach. We work with subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants to build million dollar offer ecosystems and help you license your IP. and expand your reach to build your business and your life to the next level.

    [00:23:45] So if that’s the strategy that you need and you are looking for, here are two different resources that I will provide for you to get started. The first one is just go over to our website at sweetlifeco. com. Again, that’s sweet life. Co. com. You can find an application to apply to work with us or be in any of our programs, our licensing accelerator, any of our workshops at any time, or you can dive right into our very first kickoff training.

    [00:24:13] It’s called licensing launch pad, and it’s an awesome little micro training that takes you through even deciding who you want to sell it to. And I even break down what industries are buying from you. And that program can be accessed by visiting licensinglaunchpad. com. Again that’s licensinglaunchpad.

    [00:24:34] com. And if you found value in this episode, please share it with your friends. We are just going on year number seven of producing this podcast and I refuse advertisers. Because I think they’re very annoying and they, and they break our thought process. So because of that, we really appreciate you just clicking the up arrow and sharing this show on LinkedIn or on Instagram and just helping us expand the reach of our work.

    [00:25:00] Thank you so much for listening and I will talk to you guys soon.

     
     

     

     

    Scale Your Coaching Business: B2B Transition Made Easy with April Beach (Episode 315)

    Scale Your Coaching Business: B2B Transition Made Easy

    &nbsp

    Who This Show Is For and Why It’s Important:
    This episode is crafted for you, the seasoned consultant or coach, who’s considering moving from B2C to B2B. It’s essential for those of you who have proven success with clients and have developed systematic approaches in your work. This is about taking your impact and profitability to the next level while easing your workload.
     
    In this episode, we specifically guide you through developing and implementing two core strategies for transitioning to B2B consulting. First, we focus on creating a certification program to train other professionals in your field, turning potential competitors into your clients. This approach leverages your expertise and establishes a collaborative network. Second, we explore the process of licensing your unique methodologies to these professionals. This strategy not only extends the reach of your work but also enhances your role as a thought leader in the industry, all while reducing your direct workload.
     
     
     
    Takeaways:
    • Developing a Certification Program: You’ll learn to transform competitors into clients by creating a training or certification program in your expertise.
    • Licensing Your Expertise: Discover how licensing your methodologies can broaden your business scope and reinforce your thought leadership.
    • Reducing Workload, Increasing Impact: Understand how these strategies can lessen your day-to-day tasks while boosting your impact and income.
    • Establishing Thought Leadership: Insights on how to position yourself as an industry thought leader.
    • Fostering a Professional Community: Emphasizes the value of building a network of professionals using your methods towards shared goals.
     
    Resources: 
     
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:
    315
     
    April Beach (00:00.854)
    All right, let's dive into the nitty gritty of this episode here. So we're talking about the opportunity for you to move from B2C consulting to B2B business coaching and strategic consulting. And first of all, I wanna unpack who is this for. So this episode in general is for those of you guys who are established consultants. You're an established coach.
    
    or you're an established subject matter expert and you have already been working with clients sometime. You have a track record of getting clients results and you've already created systems and methods and processes to get clients results. You've used these, you may have courses and trainings and retreats that you host or one-on-one consulting sessions, one-on-group consulting sessions. Basically, you have done that side of your business. You have built your business, you're good at what you do, you have your offers and your programs.
    
    That is who this episode is for. And frankly, that is who's ready for this conversation. Now, when we're talking about moving B2B, there are some things that I want you to be thinking about because it sounds really sexy and you're probably seeing other people do it and you think that it could be really lucrative, but I'm here to unpack the back end of it as well so that you're really sure whether or not this is a good decision for yourself. So here are some markers.
    
    that you may identify when you're ready to move over to B2B Coaching. So the first thing is, is are you still super happy and excited about working with your clients? So if you...
    
    They're kind of getting into this place where you've been serving clients a long time. You've been doing what you've been doing and you're ready for something new. You're ready to move up for a new challenge or maybe another level of impact, another level of significance that you're having and you're feeling like you want to impact more people. You're probably thinking, oh, well, I'm going to be doing less people in this way. You're actually not. I'll explain it to you. But you want to do something higher, bigger, more.
    
    April Beach (01:59.242)
    and maybe you just are ready for a totally different challenge, then B2B consulting is a great opportunity for you. If you've done that, you've been there, you've done that, you feel like your programs are on a roll and you want to level up your business, level up your thought leadership, level up your personal brand, level up your business brand and level up your profit, B2B is really the way to go. Here is the warning though. If you still want to be completely hands-on,
    
    in B2C, so you still want to be the primary person delivering all your programs. You just love your whole business to consumer side of your business. Even if you're working with other coaches, whatever that is, you love it, love it, love it, and you're not ready to get out of it, then maybe it's not quite the time for you. And then another consideration for you, when we're talking about moving over to B2B is, are you ready?
    
    and hear me out when I say this, it might give you like little heart palpitations, are you ready to allow other people to, other coaches like you perhaps, to access your materials, to access your systems, to access your IP, to access your, you know, all of your SOPs and your processes and your trainings. Does the thought of that make you super excited or are you like, oh no?
    
    I don't want anybody seeing all of my assets, all of my IP and my gold. I could never imagine another company having access to my stuff and me not being the one to actually distribute it. So those are just some things I want you to think about. There are no right or wrong answers there, but my job, my responsibility, my passion for what I do in our industry is pouring in all these strategic thinking objectives for you so that you can make smart choices for yourself.
    
    So those are just some of the things I want you to be thinking of. When we're talking about moving from a B to C business model and moving over to a B to B business model, we have to take in a lot of considerations. And here's some very specific questions I would love for you to address for yourself. So first of all is, what do you wanna be known for? What do you wanna be known for in your space? Do you wanna be known as this person, this front runner, or
    
    April Beach (04:20.514)
    Do not really care if your name is all over everything, but maybe it's more important for your methods and your teachings to get in the hands of more people. That is one thing I just want you to be thinking of. And then the next thing, like I talked about, is what are you excited about? What work do you wanna do? What are you really excited about creating new things or working with new people or helping to make an impact in your industry in a different way? If you're excited about that, that is really an important indicator that you're ready possibly to move into B2B coaching.
    
    And then the third thing is how important is it to you to expand the reach of your work? So let's kind of unpack what this looks like. When you are working B2C, even if you are doing huge launches of group programs, you're still only impacting the end users of that program, whether you have 10 or 20 or 20,000 people in your program.
    
    You're still only impacting 10 or 20 or 20,000 people with your program. When you go to a B2B model, let's say for example, you were going to give another consultant an opportunity to share your program's content, your work only lies in the effort to bring those other consultants and coaches up to speed.
    
    So let's say you have five different consultants and coaches that you're working with on a B2B capacity and you're allowing them to share and distribute your work. And now let's say that each one of those coaches had 20 or 200 or 20,000 people in their program. Now look at what you've done. It's basic math that you are creating an exponential reach with your work.
    
    And a couple of cool things happen when we do that. Number one, your workload actually tends to be reduced. Number two, you get to be elevated to that thought leader space. Number three, you get to work with more go-getters, gung-ho people that are really passionate about the same things you are and support them. And you don't have to be the one, usually in all the marketing and the nitty gritty and some of the really tiring work that tends to...
    
    April Beach (06:43.954)
    happen and burn out coaches and consultants and service experts. You don't have to be a part of that anymore. And so moving from B to C to B to B could be a really great option for you. And if those things make you excited, then you're in the right place with this podcast. You're also in the right place for working with us at The Suite Life Company. This is what we do. We help establish coaches.
    
    and subject matter experts and consultants develop your next level programs and sell them B2B through licensing and certification and other ways we can expand your roots. So now what I want to do for you as promised is I want to unpack the most basic but super powerful. So just because it's basic, don't think it's not good. As a matter of fact, we have a handful of clients that have completely
    
    revolutionized their entire business model with these steps I'm giving you here. And they have never been happier. As a matter of fact, I just talked to a client yesterday and we worked with her to change her business model from B to C to B to B. And she literally sent me a message yesterday. She said, April, I have never.
    
    been more happy in the work I'm doing. I've never felt like I was really able to make the impact I was called to make and here I am with these simple changes and thank you so much and it's just amazing. As a matter of fact, she actually graduated out of our program. She doesn't even need us anymore because she is out in soaring and flying on her own and making this impact. So just because what I'm gonna tell you is simple, please take it to heart.
    
    because this is what people pay me a lot of money to tell them, right? And so that's what our podcast insiders get. So the first business model to move you to B2B from B2C is what I call a one-two punch. So that would be creating a training program for your competition. This is what we call turning your clients, or turning your competition into your clients.
    
    April Beach (08:49.346)
    Let me say that again, because it's a good punch line and I messed it up. This is what I call turning your competition into your clients. So we can literally take your competition and bring them into an ecosystem and you can create a certificate or a certification program and actually certify other professionals in your established methodology, or you can certify them to use your tools or your process.
    
    So we are duplicating you. So step one is the building of that certification program, bringing other people that used to be your competition now into an amazing ecosystem of all these different businesses and might be working with similar audience. We may have seen that they're like, quote unquote, competitors in the past, but now all of a sudden you're creating a collective of like-minded people that are all working towards and achieving this goal. And they all understand one thing.
    
    One very important powerful thing, they all know your processes, your methods, your frameworks, your systems, and they're all able to tell people that they are certified or trained or accredited or whatever words you wanna use. We're not gonna get into all the language here in this. There are ramifications for the language you use, good and bad, but they are trained in your methodology.
    
    And so what this does for us is it helps us to open up this entire world in where you are working with these people, you're having these mastermind meetings, you're training people in your ways and your ninja skills, and you are giving them all of your steps and tools and processes. And you know who this is really great for? This is really great for your competition that isn't quite to where you were in business.
    
    Like they always looked up to you. So you're thinking, wow, you know, who would wanna do this? Let me tell you who. They're usually businesses that have not achieved the level of success that you have with your clients. And so they're looking for these shortcuts. They're looking for ways where they can provide their clients with better results. And then therefore, now my dogs are barking.
    
    April Beach (10:58.57)
    And then therefore, when they provide better results to their clients, then they make more money, and then it's also expanding the reach of your work. So when we're talking about a one-two punch, step number one is creating an opportunity for other businesses to become certified or trained on your methodology, and they can take that into their own program services, businesses, courses, retreats, masterminds, memberships, whatever that is.
    
    And in the process, we're elevating you as that thought leader still, you're making more money, but you're not the one having to deliver it. So that's step number one. And then the one, two, here you go. Here's the right hook, left hook of this business strategy is then on the after that, after you have validated that they're good at what they do, they can follow along the processes, then you give them an opportunity to license your materials and actually use your trainings.
    
    coaching steps Worksheets all of your materials within their own consulting programs. So first of all you train them in your ways Like Star Wars padawan I have to use that reference because I just finished watching all of the Star Wars Soca series with my teenage boys and if you are a parent and you have boys and you know exactly what I'm talking about so that you know in Star Wars they have like that
    
    the Jedi and they have like the padawan. Well, you can create that. You can create these little padawans with your methodology and all of your thoughts and teach them what you know. So instead of competing, you're creating a collective of amazing professionals that are all centered around using your genius work to elevate their clients. And then part two, after they're certified or accredited or they've received the stamp of approval or whatever you end up calling it.
    
    Then you give them permission to use your materials in their own business, and that is called a license. So there's a separate, there's the certification and the training period first, and then there is the licensing period where you give them permission to utilize your materials in their programs with their people. In this, by far, my friends, is the quickest, fastest way to transition you from B2C to B2B.
    
    April Beach (13:21.046)
    Here are a couple of things that we know. The people that admire you the most, the businesses that are really tracking and following along with what you're doing because they're trying to be like you or they're trying to level up, they're on your email list. They're following what you're doing. When you and when our clients in the past have put out a statement saying, we're about to do something totally different. We're about to take our program system training and allow for other
    
    coaches and consultants to learn it, to access it, to see on the inside. And I'm gonna teach you my ways. It is gangbusters. All of a sudden, literally in one email or one social post or one video, we have taken you from swimming in that red ocean, competing with all these other people to elevating you.
    
    catapulting you, you're on a yacht, you're on a parasail flying over the water, you are in a totally different realm where all of a sudden you are leading the way because you're thinking differently. The definition of a thought leader is not somebody who's just talking about all this stuff all the time, it's somebody that's truly thinking and working in a different way and presenting their ideas in their business and in questioning things and disrupting things. You're literally leading a different way of thinking.
    
    And when you transition from B2C to B2B in this way, we are instantly elevating you to that thought leader platform and people are gonna follow you because they see that you're doing something different and they see that you're including them and you're not trying to bury them and smush them, that you're literally collectively working to build a future of profit for everybody. And that is one of the most powerful things that I can share with you about moving from B2B to B2C over to B2B.
    
    So let's kind of recap what we talked about in this episode. It's a short power packed episode, but again, my job here is to introduce you to the world of B2B strategic consulting, licensing, next level offers and programs. And so in this, you're gonna get from us here on the podcast strategic thought processes for those of you guys that are ready for these next levels of business strategy. And of course,
    
    April Beach (15:35.87)
    We're here for you when you are ready for the coaching and you're ready to dive in, you're ready to get our processes to be successful in this. Of course, you know where to find us at sweetlifeco.com and we're ready and willing to work with you. We can't wait to work with you. But my job here is just to get you to think differently, especially in an oversaturated consulting and coaching space. So.
    
    With that being said, what we talked about today is if you have an established consulting business, coaching business, you're a subject matter expert, you're a service-based entrepreneur of some kind. And you've been doing what you've been doing, you have great processes, you have great methods, you have great steps of service, they've gotten people results in the past, and you're kind of over it. You're ready, you're kind of wondering what's next, or I'm getting burned out.
    
    I'm ready to make more money. I'm ready to help more people. I'm ready to expand the reach of my work. I'm ready to get out of marketing and online funnels and all of these things that tend to be incredibly exhausting for really hardworking coaching and consultants that are trying to continue to scale their business. If that's where you are, a consideration of moving to B2B is something that would be really, really good for you to take a moment and think about.
    
    And today on this episode, I have shared with you the one-two punch of a business model that you can use, that many of our clients use, to go from this B2C to B2B. And that business model is, first part of it, is creating the access to your systems for other coaches and consultants. Creating a community, creating collaboration. You know, we've talked about this for the last three years, is that community and collaboration of partnerships
    
    is the future of business growth. It's not competition, it's collaboration. That sounds like such a cheesy Instagram line, but here I'm showing you the business model of how that works. It's not a cheesy Instagram line. It's a business strategy. And I want you to have the best of the best of the business strategies to elevate the work and to be rewarded financially and in your lifestyle for the work that you've done.
    
    April Beach (17:47.966)
    So that first punch is creating an environment to bring in other people that could benefit from understanding your processes and your methods and giving them access to it. And then part two is then for maybe all the people or a small portion of the people, licensing them the ability to even utilize your materials and your trainings, your recordings, your teachings, you can even give them.
    
    And this is like the last bonus tip I'll give you. I'll share with you a little story. I have been doing this since 2008 in my own business. One of the reasons why I'm qualified to teach people how to do this, I've been doing this for a very long time. And at one point in time, at first, I just gave other businesses the recordings of my classes. And I said, Ayanna, you can distribute these in your business. But then I realized, just like we want you thinking about, we're always creating offers and programs that is the best.
    
    for our people, we wanna serve our people. And so in that same line of thinking, even though they used to be what you consider competition, they're my clients now. And I was thinking, what would really be the best for them? What would really make these consultants, these coaches look so good to their clients? And what would make them make more money? Because when they make more money, I make more money. And I realized that I wanted to literally give them.
    
    all of my curriculum and even give them the ability to re-record my classes with their face, their voice, even in some cases their company logo on them. And as soon as I realized how to package my IP in a way that would allow for other businesses to succeed and make more money and it was all about them and I wasn't trying to hold on to so much control.
    
    because I was ready to do something else and I was ready for the next level of my life and my business. So I was okay with that. That is when all the floodgates were opened and everybody just got so freaking blessed. It was absolutely incredible. And the profits had been rolling in ever since. And so those are some of the things I want you to be thinking about here as we talk about this transition. But now that you've listened to this whole episode and we've spent about 20 minutes together.
    
    April Beach (20:03.938)
    The most important thing is coming back to the beginning. Are you ready for this? Are you holding on to your work that you wanna be the only one teaching what you teach and how you teach it and the way you teach it? And if that's where you are, that's awesome. It's the identification that that's where you are. You could be there forever and that is absolutely so cool for you. But if you're to that place where you're like, yeah, you know, I think I can kind of loosen this up a little bit and I think I would be okay with others understanding my secrets.
    
    my intellectual property, my secret sauce, my unique method and framework that, you know, is just absolutely delivering guaranteed transformations. As soon as you realize that it's okay and you're ready to open up that grip a little bit and you're ready to think bigger, think at the next level, think about a more reach and how many more people you can impact and how much more money you can make and you're ready for that next level of your business, then this is a great.
    
    move for you to consider. And as we're here kind of a little bit towards the beginning of this new year, when you're listening to this, we're gonna be focusing a lot here in 2024 on the Suite Life podcast, unpacking a lot of strategies that we work with our very high level private clients and with clients in our Amplify ecosystem. I'm gonna be sharing some of these things with you because I wanna introduce this, I wanna introduce you to some of these things that you may not be aware of.
    
    that I know are gonna make a huge impact in your business. And this is one of those episodes that could literally, if you listen to this and you think on it and you start taking action on it, this is one of those episodes that could be a complete life changer for you in your business moving forward. And I hope that you give this particular episode the attention that it deserves and to give yourself permission to ask yourself those questions that we talked about in the beginning, you can always replay this. And of course,
    
    We are here for you. When you're ready to make these transitions and you want a strategic partner, to think about all the ins and outs, to help you decide what you give away and what you keep, and to give you the frameworks and the processes to actually build this next level of your business, I would love for you to reach out to us. You can find all of our resources by visiting sweetlifeco.com. We have programs, we have accelerators, we have retreats, we have one-on-one, and we have amazing workshops that will bring you and your business into this next area.
    
    April Beach (22:30.486)
    Thank you so much for tuning into this show. I can't wait to drop more trainings for you this year and all the experts we have lined up to work with you this year. And we just really appreciate you sharing the show with your friends.
     
     

     

     

    How to Create Impactful VIP Days: Step-by-Step Strategies for Coaches with April Beach and Amy Yamada (Episode 314)

    How to Create Impactful VIP Days: Step-by-Step Strategies for Coaches

     

    Episode Bonus: 
     
    Summary:  
     
     
    Thinking about selling VIP days and don’t know how to start? You’re in the right place! In this engaging episode, we sit down with Amy Yamada, a seasoned expert in the coaching realm, to explore the ins and outs of creating and offering VIP days. This episode is a goldmine for coaches and consultants eager to inject a fresh, personalized approach into their services. If you’re looking to set yourself apart in the coaching market with offerings that truly resonate with your clients, offering VIP Days might be your answer? 
     
    In this show, Amy walks us through the key elements of crafting VIP days that not only meet but exceed client expectations. You’ll learn how to pinpoint exactly what your clients need and tailor your VIP days to address these needs effectively. We also dive into strategies for confidently setting and communicating your prices, ensuring your clients understand the immense value of these specialized sessions. Plus, Amy shares her secrets on post-session follow-ups that keep the momentum going and strengthen client relationships. 
     
    By the end of this episode, you’ll have a starting roadmap for offering VIP days in your coaching or consulting business. You’ll also be equipped with actionable tips and a deeper understanding of how to create these powerful, transformative experiences. So, if you’re ready to take your coaching game to the next level, tune in and let’s get started. 
     
    At the end of this episode, you understand: 
    1. Tailoring VIP Days to Client Needs: Understand how to identify and address your clients’ unique challenges and goals, ensuring that each VIP day is a personalized and impactful experience.
    2. Effective Pricing Strategies: Learn how to set and communicate the value of your VIP days, enabling you to confidently charge rates that reflect the high-quality, bespoke service you provide.
    3. Post-Session Engagement: Discover the importance of follow-up support and how it can enhance the effectiveness of your VIP day, leading to stronger, ongoing client relationships.
    4. Marketing Your VIP Days: Gain insights into effectively promoting your VIP days, highlighting their unique benefits and differentiating your services in a competitive market.
    5. Practical Implementation: Walk away with actionable steps to integrate VIP days into your coaching or consulting business, enhancing both client satisfaction and business growth.
     
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    314

    April (00:02)
    All right, you guys, I’m back again with my friend, Amy Umada. And the last time she was here, we were talking about ChatGPT, which is also an area of Amy’s expertise. So you can go back and listen to episodes 277 and 278 if you are here and you want to know more about utilizing ChatGPT to streamline your operations and your marketing and all these genius things that Amy teaches. But today we’re talking about VIP days. And this is such a timely topic.
     
    completely in transparency for you guys, because you know, I’ll also always tell you the truth. I really hadn’t had shows lined up that I was really excited about for 2024 yet. And I thought of Amy and we do some collaboration together. And I was thinking, oh my gosh, this is just the perfect show to do. Let’s dive into VIP days. Because as you guys remember, we just did a show where we dropped the latest trends for subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants. And the number one trend is that people
     
    are no longer seeking to be part of these big, huge launches, these big, huge programs where they’re another number and they are paying for highly curated experiences. And this is a perfect introduction into talking about VIP days with Amy. Amy, thank you so much for coming on the show with us. How are you? I’m so glad to be back and speaking about a topic that I’m very passionate about. And it’s just something where whether you’re totally new to VIP days and this is your introduction to them or you’ve been doing them for a while and you wanna take them to the next level.
     
    I just think it’s a very fun topic because it’s been probably the most fun, easy, and impactful offer that I’ve had as part of one of my offers. And so I’m excited to share anything that can support those who want to offer them this year. I am totally excited to dive in. Okay. So let’s first of all define what a VIP day is.
     
    Let’s start at the…
     
    the basics of the basics. You’re a coach, you’re a consultant, you’re thinking, hey, you know, VIP day, not only sounds like something I would like to attend, but maybe something I would like to sell. How do I define a VIP day versus just a day attending a workshop with me, perhaps? Yeah, that’s a great question. So the way I like to define a VIP day is think of it as a private, like a one-on-one full day intensive.
     
    And you can call it what you want. I know in the coaching industry, we call it a VIP day. You could call it a personal retreat. You could call it a one day intensive. You can call it a solo experience. I mean, you can really call it whatever you want that makes sense for you and your ideal client. But it’s a way for you to work with someone, completely personalize the day to them and think about what is it that my ideal client wants to get out of our experience together and what is their ultimate desire transformation or outcome?
     
    And by coming together for a full day, whether it’s in person or virtually, you can accelerate their experience of getting to where they want to go. So I just have found that it’s been a great way to work with those who, as you said, not all people want to jump into a long-term coaching program or a group or a mastermind, even though I’ve loved those formats as well. But it’s been nice to have something that is short and accelerated and gives them my personalized attention. OK. So I want faster results.
     
    I want your personal attention. I’m gonna seek out a VIP day. And I know that there are customers out there that are certainly looking for that as well. You know, and really quick, just talking about the trends, have you noticed that as well, being in the industry for a while, that change away from these big, huge mass launches and programs where they would be, you know, 500,000 seats sold at a time. Have you seen that as well in your space?
     
    I mean, it’s been interesting because I was recently a part of another entrepreneurs big launch and they still did very well. I mean, I think that it was a launch that does target newer entrepreneurs that really, you know, when you’re newer and you’re just like craving the information, you’re like, I want to know the model. I know I want to know the secret. I don’t have a large budget. So I think there’s still a time and space for that. But especially for those who’ve been in their businesses or own businesses for two, three, five, ten plus years. I think you just get to a point where.
     
    It’s more about implementation and team systems and then investing in the very specific things that you need versus being a part of a larger group mastermind. And I say that and I’m still a part of a larger group mastermind, but even when I have been a part of a group mastermind, I always find like my business besties within it and we create our own pod, you know, and I make a note of getting to know the lead coach and the coaches. I’m like, I don’t wanna just be another number even as a client, let alone have clients that feel that way too.
     
    So I think that when you’re working with someone who’s been in business for multiple years, then they are craving that personalized attention and a very specific outcome. So yeah, I totally get what you’re saying about that. That’s so funny. That’s really good insight. And actually, now that you said that, I think that’s how you and I met. I think you and I onboarded the same day into that larger business mastermind. Funny, that was like years ago. It seems like, okay, I think that’s how we met. Who knows? All right.
     
    So let’s dive into really how does, you know, our listeners are subject matter experts and coaches and consultants and authors and speakers. And they’re thinking about doing this VIP day, but they’re second guessing whether or not they’re qualified to actually even deliver a VIP experience, which we’ll talk about later, but even just be in a position to charge what needs to be charged in order to truly deliver a VIP experience. So I know
     
    that a lot of people based on what you say face this resistance of, wow, can I actually do this? So where do you want them to start first even thinking about whether or not they should offer VIP services within their business? Yeah, I would say that the first step is to enroll yourself first. Meaning, and just know that I struggled with thinking about charging high ticket for a VIP day. What I teach now is I teach clients and workshop attendees on creating and selling a $10,000 VIP day.
     
    And I myself really struggled with the thought of that at one point in my journey because I’d never done it. Right. So it was that whole question of like, who might have think that anyone would invest anything to work with me for a day? And I had a mentor at the time that was encouraging me to sell them for ten thousand dollars. I’m like, there’s no I’m a very optimistic person and there’s no way. I was like, I can’t do it. And she said, OK, how about we’re like negotiating? She’s like, how about seventy five hundred? I’m like, no, I just I can’t even imagine saying the words out loud on a call with someone. And she said, all right.
     
    How about this? How about you sell the first two at $5,000 and then bump it up to $7,500 and sell like six more? Which was an ambitious goal within a month. And I said, I’ll see what I can do. And that month, I ended up selling five VIP days for $5,000 each, paid in full. So it was a nice $25,000 bump in my business, right? Like who doesn’t love a nice revenue bump? Right. And it was so great to just get out of my comfort zone and stop making it about me.
     
    and my limiting beliefs of who am I to think that anyone will ever invest $5,000 to work with me for a day. And instead, focus the spotlight on them, them being your ideal client and ask yourself, do I believe I can make a difference for them if I got to spend one dedicated day with them? It just has a reframe on it. So whenever I shift my thinking like
     
    Do I believe I could really make a difference for someone? Yes, I could make a difference for someone. If we got to sit down and roll up our sleeves and spend a whole day together, like think about how much you could do in a day and how you can accelerate their growth because they don’t have to do all the things you did to get to where you are now because you’re gonna fast track them. You’re gonna share with them what has worked and what hasn’t worked with yourself and others. So I would say enroll yourself first and ask yourself, like think about someone, think about one person that represents your ideal client and ask yourself.
     
    Do I believe I can make a difference for them if I got to spend one entire day with them, whether it was in-person or virtual? And I’m willing to bet the answer is yes. Okay, now you’re enrolled in someone enrolling in a VIP day with you. So it’s gonna be a lot easier for you to actually speak into this when you believe in the value of it. Wow, oh my gosh, I love that. And I can see why the graduated process that your coach was walking you through bought you into it as well. I know that that’s…
     
    how I started out as well, like a little bit more and a little bit more. And then all of a sudden I realized, wow, this is blowing these people’s socks off. They would have paid so much more than I actually charged for this. And look at the results. And I also I also remember that when I first started increasing my prices that it gave me so much more confidence as well, because I saw how blown away they are with their own results. And you’re right. It was just it was all about them. So that leads me to my next question. So.
     
    buying in and believing in your value, you know? And then we go, okay, but how do I actually transfer the value that I’m saying that you’re gonna get out of 10K into what I’m actually doing with them? How do I actually know, I have to structure this in some capacity, they can’t just show up and just hang out and I have some, you know, lunch waiting for them. There has to be some sort of a framework around what we’re gonna talk about.
     
    How do you recommend people determine the framework of that VIP day and what they’re actually doing, what problem they’re solving? That’s a great idea. Great question, I should say. One of the things that has helped my clients with answering this question is to grab a piece of paper, draw a line down the middle vertically. And so you make two columns. And on one side, you put pain points. On the other side, you put solutions at the top. And so then you can bullet point out, what are the top?
     
    pain points that your ideal client has? And then next to each pain point, what is a solution that you would recommend for each of those pain points? And by doing that, first of all, you can see how freaking brilliant you are because you have a solution for all of their problems. Right. And you might even notice that there might be some redundancies in the solutions, like, oh, if they have these three problems, this solution can actually address these three problems.
     
    But by doing this, you can also see, OK, here are some things that I can apply during a VIP day. And then just know that you’re going to customize the VIP day to the person. So one of the questions I often get from people is kind of what you’re saying is, what does this flow of the day look like? Well, first of all, it’s about what is the flow going to look like that’s going to best serve your ideal client. So whenever, like when in doubt with anything in my business, I always ask myself, what is the flow going to look like that’s
     
    How can I best support my ideal client? Or how can I make the biggest difference possible for them? So for some, they might prefer a shorter VIP day, like four hours. I remember having a mentor when I would invest in a VIP day with her. It was four hours was considered a full VIP day. And we would pack in it. Like, I mean, I would fly out to San Diego. I live in Seattle and I would go to her house and we’d grab some coffee and she’d have like a big flip charge. She’s like, all right, what are we talking about today? And we’d get to, it was fast and furious. And that’s what works for me in terms of a client.
     
    But as far as being a coach with my clients, I’m such a connector. I like to take our time. I don’t want to feel rushed, you know? So for me, I always go from, if it’s in person, it’s 10 to five. So it’s a full day, including a fabulous lunch. I like a little luxury, like a luxury in it. So, but that’s just the framework of like the itinerary, but what’s most important is what are they going to get out of it? So they’re coming to you because they want your personalized attention. They want access to you.
     
    and they want to accelerate their growth. It happens to be three A’s when I discovered this. It wasn’t planned, I’m not that clever, but access, attention, and acceleration. When they’re able to get that access to you as the expert and they get your personalized attention to really meet them where they are and get them to where they wanna go and accelerate their growth, the client is super happy. So I would say think about their pain points, the solutions to those pain points, and then customize the day specifically to the VIP day client that’s stepping in.
     
    So that really addresses those pain points and gets them going. I have so many questions I wanna ask you that are outside of the scope of what we’re talking about today. But about pre-boarding and on ramping and on boarding and off boarding that it’s all Amy’s area of expertise. You guys go to Amy, I’ll give you all the links. I know our clients are thinking or our listeners are thinking right now, well, how do I get ready for that? And how do I make sure it’s good and all these other systems? But.
     
    But I do want to ask this one question. When somebody curates this VIP day, how often do you find, and maybe this is just a personal question with you, how often do you find that there needs to be a little bit of an afterburn support after that VIP day? Or is that like, nope, we’re done, see you later bye, pay me another time? How does it usually work with you with your clients? Yeah, you know, it’s interesting you asked this because I’ve tested.
     
    different ways of supporting them after the fact. What I’ve found that has worked for me is to schedule, as a part of the package, one follow-up private coaching session to be used within 30 days after the VIP day. And here’s why. It can help with accountability. So if they’ve started implementing some things they’ve learned from the VIP day, it can help them hold themselves accountable to build that momentum. It can also be great for going deeper on anything we didn’t quite go as deep on that we planned on.
     
    Um, and then also on that call, you can, you can, towards the end of the call, if you believe that this client could become a longer term client, because you’re like, Oh my gosh, I love this person. We have such a great connection. I can see how I can help them implement. Maybe they become a private high ticket coaching client for you. Right. So, so I would say wait till the end because it is a coaching session, but towards the end, I might say something like, you know, based on everything that we’ve covered during the VIP day and during our session today,
     
    I believe I could help you further in terms of implementation. Do you want to talk about what would that look like? Or do you want to explore what that would look like? And oftentimes they’ve at least been curious about it. And so I’d say, okay, do you still have time today if we have space or we can talk in the next couple of days and then you can upsell them to a longer term offer. And it’s been great. And some of my clients who’ve had the fastest results have kicked things off with a VIP day because we just did that deep dive into what they’re up to and what they’re creating.
     
    The other thing I do want to share though, and I love that you were talking about the pre and the post, that one of the biggest pieces of advice that I can give if you really want to crush your VIP days is to include what I call an intention setting call before the VIP day. So for example, say that you enroll someone into a VIP day, but they’re flying out to you or you’re flying to a really cool destination and it’s a month away.
     
    We don’t want a whole month to go by. And then our first, our next conversation, I should say, to be in person on the VIP day. So I recommend scheduling, even if it’s 15 minutes, a short intention setting call or call, call it what you want to call it, but like a grounding call that you schedule within a week prior to your VIP day. And then when you jump on that call, keep it super laser focused. It’s not the VIP day. It’s not a coaching session. Uh, but if you are my client April, I’d say, okay, April, first of all, I’m super excited for our in-person VIP day coming up on Friday.
     
    from today’s vantage point, what specifically do you want to get out of our VIP day? And then I would take notes, take notes, because those notes are your guiding light, that’s your North star, your compass for the VIP day, bring it to your VIP day and say, okay, so we talked about the other day and that’s how you will get a testimonial every time. I love that. I have two clients flying in here to Boulder, one this month and one next month, and I’m going to do that.
     
    and I’ve never done it before. We usually do, it’s not even, they’re entering into a longer term mentorship with me. So it’s not just one VIP day, but I love the starting out in person. And I’m totally stealing that. Yeah, I’m totally stealing that. I’m like, we’re gonna set this intention call ahead of time to help me help you better. Okay, so we’ve talked about the framework. We talked about the understanding of believing. And I just want our listeners to realize
     
    you guys want this, I want this, Amy wants this, we all want this sort of level of service. So take that and now understand that your clients really want this too, as you’re going through this process. And I just, I feel really strongly about, especially moving forward in 2024, these curated mentorship type of business models, just because we know that so many people really are craving this. So just another little confidence boost if anybody’s.
     
    out there wondering if this is for you. Question is, do you want it? And if the answer is yes, then the answer is your people want it too. Okay, so now let’s kind of wrap it up. How do you actually close it? How do you actually say, this is what it is, this is what I’m offering and communicate the value of what it is that you are doing to close and convert those leads into buyers? I love this question. We can do a whole training series on this. I know, right? I’ll keep it
     
    tight.
     
    Well, first of all, I always like to create what I call a confidence card, meaning an outline of the VIP day offer that are initially it’s like all about the benefits to them. And this is, I use it as a behind the scenes tool just to have in front of me when I’m going to call with someone. Some of my clients will create a beautified branded version of it to send them. But as far as your closing question, I just always, I’m just so real with it. You know, like when it comes to sales conversations, enrollment conversations, all I’m thinking about is how do I believe I can best support the person?
     
    So if I was talking to someone and I was asking them questions, finding out where they are, where they want to go, what they’re struggling with, all the usual questions. And if I truly believed that I could make a difference for them with a VIP day, I would say, I would say that. I would say, you know, I believe the best way that I could support you would be by us doing a VIP day together. And here’s why, right? And then speaking to the why, like when, and then I would focus on them. When you shared with me that you’re wanting X, Y, and Z, and that you’re struggling with this, you know, then this is exactly my sweet spot. And then I would…
     
    visualize with them. I’d say, just imagine us coming together. If we’re able to do it in person, even better. Come to my home here in Seattle. We’ve got a great view. We’ll roll our sleeves. And we can do the first half of the day, we can do a deep dive. So basically, share with them the visual of the journey. Here’s what I could see us doing. So the first half of the day, we’ll do a deep dive. In my case, it’s usually messaging. We’ll do a deep dive on your messaging, how you’re already. What is it that you’re already doing that’s not working so we can release that?
     
    We’ll look at all the puzzle pieces of your business so that we can just get a really good grasp of what you’re up to. And then we’ll have a fabulous lunch. And then after lunch, we’re going to focus on building out a plan that is implementable right after the VIP day. Something along those lines where they can really see that I’ve listened to them on our call and that I am being so honest about why I’m recommending this as the offer and the format and the vehicle in which we’ll cover what we need to cover. So.
     
    I just keep it real. I mean, here’s how I think I can best support you. What do you think? Right. Yeah. Do you take any clients that you are uncertain whether or not your personalities drive? No. If we are not a fit, we’re not a fit. I mean, it’s also a day of your life. I recently came across a quote that said, what you do each day should be important because you’re giving up a day of your life for it, or something like that. It’s not word for word.
     
    I have that. I will, I’m going to text you a picture. I have a big, huge one of the, it’s hanging on my wall downstairs. It’s written out in text cause you’re exchanging a day of your life for it. So make it good. Cause you’re exchanging a day of your life for it. I want my boys to see that every morning before they leave the house. So it’s a, it’s a big thing. So anyway, after this, here you go guys. I’ll upload it to the show notes so you can see it too.
     
    Uh, this statement. Um, but Amy, I appreciate this so much. And I mean, your wisdom and your framework and your teaching on VIP days for a really long time has been leading coaches and consultants in the industry. And so certainly a trusted resource and really appreciate you coming in here and, and teaching our listeners all about frameworks. And I know that you do have one of your VIP intensives coming up. Could you want to tell people about that? Obviously.
     
    You guys need to be subscribing and listening to this in real time. Otherwise it’s probably not going to be happening live if you’re listening to the replay, but Amy, tell us about what’s coming up for people that want to learn how to craft a VIP day. Yeah. Well, first of all, I do also have a cheat sheet that I just want to give. Oh, good. Yay. We can offer that link to get the VIP day cheat sheet. So just walks you through the steps to create promote and sell high ticket VIP day. So if you’re a go getter and you’re like, I just want to take it around with it. Great.
     
    I do have a couple of workshops coming up on, so I know some might be watching this afterwards, but if you’re not, it’s coming up on January 23rd, January 25th, I’m doing the same workshop twice. So people have two different times. So we can make sure we have links on that below. And then there will also be a limited time on demand training of it. And then I’m not going anywhere. So please just come find me if you’re listening to this afterwards. I do throughout the year do some trainings on VIP days.
     
    If it is something you’re serious about doing sooner than later, what I have loved about VIP days, it’s been the most like the fastest, easiest, most fun way to make an impact. And I’ve also kept the system that I teach very simple as well. So it’s not, it’s not like a big thing that you need to do, like a lot, you know, like when you’re launching something big, um, you don’t need to have an ad, you know, like a new fancy funnel or an ad campaign or any of that. I love those strategies, but this is where you.
     
    create connect offer, you know, like you create your, your VLT, you connect with your ideal clients, make offers, and you do it in a way that really demonstrates that you understand what it is that they’re seeking. You understand your ideal clients. So that’s going to be a part of the training as well. So I’ve seen people go from my workshop to like, I’m thinking about one of my clients, Tara, who after the training, she went and sold two for 5,500. She said, she’s like, I’m not ready to sell them for 10,000, so, but she sold two 5,500. She’s like, oh my gosh, I just made $11,000.
     
    from what I learned at your workshop. I’m like, and you’re welcome. And that’s what we call ROI friends. I’m talking about. That’s the fun of the workshop. Definitely download the VIP cheat sheet if you’re wanting to implement VIP days. And then let’s stay connected. Like I love helping passionate entrepreneurs to do what you love with people you love and places that you love because this life is precious. And I mean, that’s what I love about you, April. You’re all about living a great life. So let’s do this. Yes, yes, yes. And what is your…
     
    primary website for somebody who isn’t listening timely and is not gonna be able to access those resources so people can find you. Yeah, for once I’m gonna give two websites. Great, let’s do it, let’s do it. Our listeners are very smart and organized. Very smart and can handle two URLs. Okay, so one is simply my name, so it keeps it very simple, amyumada.com. And then we are in the process of building, so it may not be perfect, I’m just telling you right now.
     
    We’re in the process of this is the first time I’m telling you guys. I’m so excited. We’re building out ideal client.ai. And here’s why my dream and my vision is for this to become the go-to resource for all things having to do with your ideal clients, because I found that it’s the first thing marketers will need to know is we’re always asked who do you serve and what problem do you solve? Right. And we skip over to like creating offers. Let’s care enough about our future clients. Let’s be abundantly in minded to attract more of our idea clients by actually
     
    deeply understanding what they want, what they struggle with, what their deepest fears and frustrations are. And so we’re building out like a killer website that’s gonna have amazing blogs on it and resources and ways to deeply understand who you are meant to serve on a level that is un…
     
    Like, nobody can compete with this. Like, I can’t even stand it. So. Oh my gosh. And of course now I’m like, we need to be talking about licensing and patents and trademarks and all that. Totally, totally, yeah. So, we’re not gonna have a conversation after this about all of that. So exciting. And this is something that we all need.
     
    I mean, even me, I’ve been coaching for 27 years. I’m like, oh my gosh, well, what? I think I know what they’re thinking. And the problem is, and now we’re gonna go on a quick tangent and we’ll let y’all go, but a little behind the scenes here, the problem is, is we get so close to our expertise and we forget what it’s like to not know what we already know. I know for me, because I’m not inherently a marketer, that I struggle with that all the time. So that’s why I loved all your.
     
    AI stuff you taught last year in this, we’re gonna be all over this. So I can’t wait to hear more about this. I know all of our clients need this as well. So awesome. All right, well, Amy, I appreciate you so much, just so, so much and all of your wisdom and being here and pouring in everything that you do into this industry. And we’ll make sure that this show gets out to everybody. Thank you so much for having me. It’s been so much fun. You’re welcome.
     
     

     

     

    Top 4 Areas To Nail And Scale in 2024 (Episode 313)

     Top 4 Areas To Nail And Scale in 2024

     

    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) 
     
     
     
    Summary:
    Established coaches and consultants looking to separate from the pack in 2024. You want to do your work differently and reduce friction. The theme of this year is “less in more”. We’ll be focusing on making smart decisions to reduce overwhelm and create more traction in your business. Though there are a lot of things you can do to build your company, in this show we’re focusing on 4 of the most important areas you’ll want to nail first. 
     
    For each of the four areas of your business, I’m breaking down key things to consider in evaluating how you’ll upgrade your process and profit including:
    1. 2024 industry trends in each of the 4 core areas
    2. How they affect your current business
    3. Innovative ways to upgrade, change, and pivot
     
    …All while reducing work time and doing less. 
     
     
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Know the 4 areas of business you need to focus on to scale in 2024
    2. Have evaluated each area to determine necessary changes
    3. Be able to take action 
     
    Episode Bonus:
    6 Components of a Scalable Coaching Program – Includes AI Offer Engineering and more! 
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    313

    [00:00:47] Hi, you guys. And welcome to the first show of 2024. I’m so glad to be joining you again for now. We’re rolling into the seventh year producing the Sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. Thank you guys so much for being listeners over time and sharing this show with your friends. If this is your first time being here in the show, I’m April Beach.

    [00:01:06] I help subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants build million dollar offer ecosystems and scale your business through content licensing and everything that we deliver for you here on this show are proven trainings and strategies that you can literally take to the bank. As a matter of fact, Our slogan, our tagline is delivering you proven trainings and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for.

    [00:01:30] And I have been consulting coaches and consultants for 27 years with an expertise in online business for 17. So you are really in the right place. Every single thing that we talk about and deliver to you, you can immediately. Apply in your business and will be very valuable to you in this particular episode in kicking off 2024.

    [00:01:49] I was really thinking about the most important things that I want you guys to be focusing on. And in order to do this, I have been focusing on paying attention to the trends in our space. You have seen them. I know you’re paying attention. You’ve seen leaders and gurus and coaches starting to kind of fall to the side.

    [00:02:12] Some of them are just completely overloaded, overwhelmed and exhausted because they built the wrong kind of business for sustainability. Some of them are tired of having to show up on social media all the time and others Just don’t have anything else to sell. They may not have knowledge outside of the one area that they gained notoriety for.

    [00:02:34] And so this is a very special time for you. If you are an established subject matter expert coach or a consultant, and we’re talking about what’s going to happen in 2024, Now has never been a better time for you to hone in on these key areas that we’re going to talk about in our business because now is your time.

    [00:02:52] You don’t have to have thousands of social media followers. You don’t have to be a keynote speaker in front of thousands of people. You don’t even have to have a bestselling book. You just have to be great at what you do, dedicated to your area of expertise and the clients that you serve, and we can scale your business past seven figures.

    [00:03:11] So if you are feeling like you’ve been in this place where you’re just hustling and hustling and you’re never going to get noticed, frankly, many of you guys have been doing what you’ve been doing for a really, really long time and you’re not out there telling everybody about how great you are because you’re in the trenches with your clients delivering amazing results.

    [00:03:29] 2024 is your year. And that’s what we’re talking about right now in this podcast, four key areas where you can scale your business with less work. Here’s the deal. The theme of this year is more results, less time, significant impact, less work. We are talking about more for less, and I want that for you.

    [00:03:52] And so that’s what we’re digging in here, uh, on this show. This is episode number 313. All of the show notes, everything that we talk about here and reference and links and resources and downloads and all the goodies can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. Just click on the podcast and this is episode number 313.

    [00:04:12] And a very quick and very important announcement to you. If it’s time for you to upgrade your offer, increase your prices, and take your offers to a scalable level. Create content, create your million dollar offer ecosystem. Then we are opening up offer engineer, which is our leading masterclass that has taught experts to build scalable offer ecosystems and content licensing programs for Over eight years.

    [00:04:41] This is program is really amazing where I get to work with you personally. So if it’s time for you to dive in and actually upgrade your offer, go to the offer engineer. com because we’re going to be doing that live online virtually in January, and I don’t want you to miss it again. That is the offer engineer.

    [00:05:00] com. Go grab your seat in that right now. And let’s go ahead and set this episode to dive in more. All right. So we’re talking about these four areas, these four amazing opportunities for you to upgrade in your business. Things that I really want you thinking about. And I want to unpack some trends and give you an opportunity to think about how you can change or update things.

    [00:05:22] I don’t want to give you a massive amount of work, but as we’re in the beginning of 2024, I see these as four very important areas that not everybody’s talking about. But I want you to be the tip of that sword. I want you to know what’s going on. And so that’s why I picked these four areas as a trend to lean into for 2024.

    [00:05:42] So the first area that you need to nail to scale in 2024 will be your offers, your programs, your services. We don’t actually hear a lot of people talking about actual offer engineering. They just kind of come up with a price and they say, okay, I’m going to do this or I’m going to do that. And this is just what it is.

    [00:06:02] And there’s so much emphasis on marketing. Have you seen that also there really is not enough emphasis on the product itself. And I think there’s some confusion. Um, in a service based industry space, realizing that maybe marketing is more important than the actual product itself. But here’s a little insight.

    [00:06:20] My husband and I own multiple companies and one of the companies he owned is owns is a physical product company. So I have seen what it takes to build a business around a physical product and the difference in the emphasis on the actual excellence of the product. Is what makes the difference the first difference, but in the online coaching and consulting space, we tend to lean into the marketing and the marketing, the marketing, and then the products are kind of shitty sometimes.

    [00:06:49] I mean, let’s be honest, right? So the reality is, is you’ve probably been in many of these programs that had this awesome shiny funnel and you’re diving in there and they give all the bells and whistles and they say all the right things for you to invest your money, and then you get in there and you really didn’t get what you thought that you were going to get.

    [00:07:07] Because the person that sold it to you was a great marketer that maybe not so great and actually creating an offer that’s going to give you substantial, substantial, tangible results that you’re looking for. Frankly, maybe there weren’t even an expert in that part. Maybe there were an expert marketer.

    [00:07:25] And so as we’re looking at your business, I want to just reset what we’re talking about here as business owners, your knowledge, what you teach or the service you provide, what you do, the programs that you deliver, they are your product and they come first and without leading products that deliver amazing, massive, predictable results, nothing else that we talk about is going to matter.

    [00:07:55] So let’s just lay the prerequisite and the ground rule here. Your offer has to be absolutely a leading offer in your space that provides amazing results. So number one key area is that offer engineer engineering and here’s some of the trends I want you to see That have been happening. Well, really it’s been about the last four years we’ve really seen these trends because I literally have been coaching experts to build their offers for so long you guys actually since Pre 2000.

    [00:08:25] I’ve been, I’ve been helping people like you do this. And so what we’re seeing is that these big programs, these huge programs were the ones that were amazing and everybody was attracted to them. But here’s a trend that I want you to be aware of for the last four years, the smaller programs, the boutique programs, the programs that serve less people, or the only serve one company at a time, or that are really super niche.

    [00:08:50] Those are the programs that are selling. Those are the programs that people are looking for and gravitating to. So I want you to see these trends and if that’s the kind of program you’ve had already, amazing. What can we do to upgrade that? How can we scale the actual program itself to scale your time, that you are reducing your time?

    [00:09:10] Especially if you’ve been delivering one on one coaching services and that you can provide efficient results for your clients while providing top notch industry leading results to them as well. And so what the trend that, or the term that this is, is called the blue ocean strategy. I talk about blue ocean all the time.

    [00:09:28] There’s a blue ocean strategy. book. If you haven’t read it, it’s really, really valuable. I will actually go ahead and put a link to that book in the show notes so that you guys can understand this concept, but we need to move you out of what’s considered a red ocean where all these other people are fighting for the same audience.

    [00:09:44] And we need by creating a disruptive, thoughtful, efficient, Offer. We can move you into a blue ocean where you have no competition. So the trends I want you to be aware of are these huge programs are really, in my opinion, going to the wayside. People do not love being in part of a cattle drive. It’s like, cheers, everybody.

    [00:10:03] You know, we want people to know our name. And so being in big programs without any personalized curation is we’re having industries are having trouble selling those types of programs. So look at your programs, think about your programs and think about. What you have and how niche is it? Do you provide specific measurable results?

    [00:10:25] And then the third thing I want you to be aware of is you probably need to increase your prices in 2024 with inflation, with how much it’s costing you to actually run your business and pay yourself, pay your team and the way that. I will be sharing with you here and that we coach our clients is I need you to increase your prices so we can increase your operational expenses so we can increase your ability to scale and get more help.

    [00:10:52] And so if you need to increase your prices, we always want to do this in an ethical way. We never just say, Hey, this was this cost and now it’s going to be that cost. So make sure that you’re increasing your prices and in an ethical way and take a look at your offers. So the question’s for you. Are they niche?

    [00:11:09] Are they niche? Are they specific? Are they disruptive? Am I doing something? in a way that nobody else in my space is doing this. Do I have a method or a framework that I’m teaching people to get better results than other people in my space? That’s what we need your offers to do. So area number one that you need to nail to scale in 2024 is not only one offer, but your ecosystems of, uh, of offers to make sure that they are predictable.

    [00:11:38] tangible, delivering amazing results, and they’re scalable for you and efficient to run. Again, you can go into the offer engineer. com because that’s everything that we’re working on here in January with our clients and our podcast listeners and all of our friends live. You can dive into that masterclass with me.

    [00:11:58] Make sure you don’t miss that if you need this. So area number two are relationships. So let me talk about the trend that I am seeing. It’s no longer as important to know everybody in your space. I don’t actually know if it really was. I don’t know everybody in my space. I’ve been here for a really long time.

    [00:12:21] What I want you to understand is connecting and building relationships with the right people in the right businesses are what is going to be the one driver to really bring in profit for your business this year. It’s not ad spend anymore like it was 10, eight years ago, seven years ago. Right? Their relationships, relationships, scale, relationships.

    [00:12:43] So, but I know that there are problems running into spending time and investing relationships. Talk about what type of relationships I want you to focus on this year. I want you to focus on relationships with other experts that serve your same audience, but they may do a different thing. So building relationships with colleagues and mutual circles of trust.

    [00:13:05] Think Robert De Niro. And meet the parents, right? So you want to build circles of trust with other experts. These circles don’t have to be huge. They can be three, five, six, seven people at the most that meet your clients. And my recommendation this year is to make time for these relationships. Do things with them.

    [00:13:26] Go on retreats just with this other group of people. Have an opportunity to create a mastermind that is not a paid mastermind. It’s all of you just showing up to a hotel, paying your own way and pouring into each other for three days. These are the things that are going to build your business and scale.

    [00:13:43] And I want you to think about who these people could be in your space. Nixon with relationships is you need to make time to build new ones. If you don’t have enough relationships in your space, you think could be valuable. And of course that you could lend value to one of the things that I do is I have what’s called a coffee calendar.

    [00:14:00] And you know, when you get these LinkedIn messages, Hey, would you like to, you know, connect and, and just get to know each other? First of all, I’m just going to be really honest. I will never give my time to somebody because time, my time is more valuable to me than money. Unless I have already connected with that person in the public feed somewhere.

    [00:14:20] So by the way, if you’re listening to this and you’re one of those cold people that sends DMs saying, Hey, do you want to jump on the call? If you ever send that to me, the answer is immediately going to be no. And you know, you’re wasting my time because you haven’t ever tried to connect with the content that I have put out on the public feed.

    [00:14:37] Um, but for those people that I really do want to connect with, I have this coffee calendar and it’s set up in my acuity calendar scheduler and it’s not about, it’s not a sales pitch. It’s literally just a connection time and I have connection times. Sometimes I have them only one day a month, you guys.

    [00:14:53] Let’s be real. My time is very limited or I have them at one time every single Wednesday afternoon. It’s the one time I know that I can block out. And as soon as those coffee calendar connections are full, I don’t book anymore. I don’t spend any time wondering, Hey, when can I fit this networking thing in, you know, my calendar to meet with this person?

    [00:15:13] I always have this available and open it, but I. Only share it with people that I believe that I can lend value to and people that could be valuable to me and my business as well. So if you have the ability to create a separate calendar, that’s not going to mess up any of your other work time. Do it.

    [00:15:30] Call it a coffee calendar, a networking calendar, just. meet and greet or whatever, and I have virtual coffee with people. It will make all the difference in the world and your business. And I want you to think about honing in on specific people in specific groups that will make the greatest impact for your time.

    [00:15:47] Remember, these relationships are going to be very powerful because these people are going to send you business. You’re going to send these people business and you’re going to create that circle of trust. I believe in 2024. that these relationships will be even more valuable to you than creating content in a marketing process.

    [00:16:07] So if you don’t yet have that sort of coffee calendar designated time to network with people and get to know other people, I highly recommend you do that. Okay. Area number four is marketing. Of course it’s marketing. Yes, we have to market your business, but let’s talk about the trends again that we are seeing here.

    [00:16:27] So if you have been on Facebook for decades and Instagram for decades, and then you tried threads, the trends that we are seeing, we’ve been seeing is that businesses that sell to other businesses are hanging out on LinkedIn. Number one, and the great thing about LinkedIn is you do not have to create. a massive amount of content.

    [00:16:49] You just have to build relationships and share valuable information and give feedback to others that share valuable information. And so in the marketing process, make sure that you’re not just creating content to create content that might not be for you. I’m not sitting here talking to you. I don’t know your business cause this is.

    [00:17:08] Unfortunately, a one sided conversation right here on the podcast. So LinkedIn may not be the place for you, but I’m just saying, I want you to be aware that creating videos and spending thousands of hours on, you know, um, Instagram or even Tik TOK has it like, look at the measurable, measurable results.

    [00:17:25] Has it given you the traction that you’ve needed? If it hasn’t, it’s okay to walk away from things instead of just doing things cause you’ve been doing them for the last five years and you think you need to. Again, less is more. Understand where the actual traction is happening for your business and just focus in on that.

    [00:17:45] The other thing that is really important, which is not a newsflash, but I really want you to make sure that you are normalizing AI. In your processes of creating content. So one thing to look at and just ask yourself and our little check and balance here, do you have SOPs for using AI within your business on a regular basis for creating your marketing content?

    [00:18:08] If you don’t, it’s very, very important. And a few other keys are understanding your primary message on a monthly basis. What do I mean by that? This is especially important for those of you guys who have a B to C side of your business and you may also be moving into a B to B. So if you’ve had courses, trainings, masterminds, VIP days, whatever that is, and you’re also looking into a Content licensing.

    [00:18:35] Maybe you want, maybe you’re here and you’re connecting with us. Cause you also want to know after we build those programs with you, how to actually license them to other companies, right? So your message is going to be different and you need to make sure you’re honing in. What am I saying to a B2C audience?

    [00:18:51] And what am I saying to a B2B audience and just make sure. If you’re foggy on your marketing, if you do not have a marketing team that’s working for you and creating content, number one thing to start with, and just doing this one thing will be a massive game changer is understanding what your primary message is to each one of those audiences on a monthly basis.

    [00:19:12] In January. What is the most important thing you want your audience to know about you in February? Are you selling something in March? What is that most important thing? Just make sure you’ve broken it down month by month, especially if you have two audiences and it’s very, very clear. So area number three to nail and scale, and those are some tips is marketing use AI.

    [00:19:34] But make sure, of course, it’s absolutely unique to you in your voice and never put AI into your, never put your IP into your, um, chat GPT. Okay, so anything that is proprietary, never put it into chat GPT. And then the third area, the fourth area I want you to focus in on for 2024 are your teams. It’s time for you to get the right person in place.

    [00:20:05] If you don’t have this already, that’s going to help you scale. If you can find one person, you can trust one primary person and be able to have them delegate so that you can focus on your areas of genius. 2024 is the year to do that. In, in order to do that, you need to understand what your top priorities are and you need to be able to put a budget behind this.

    [00:20:29] So let’s talk about some of these areas and, and based on how much you’re making. If you are making up to 15k a month, You do need team members. You may get specific niche team members to do specific things. So one person might do your video editing. One person might do your copy editing. You know, one person might post on social media.

    [00:20:52] One person might be your client concierge. That’s totally fine up to 15 K a month. It’s fine to have these teeny tiny little specific, amazing people that do little teeny bits of work for you. When we get to around 20 to 30 K, you’re going to need more operational help. So that is orchestrating all of those people that are doing all the little pieces.

    [00:21:16] And so around 20 K a month, if you don’t have a primary, it could be an online business manager. However, be really careful with that because the term online business manager and those certifications often mean that they are not operationally. Excellent. They just know a software. Be careful for that. I’m talking about somebody that can step into an operations management, see all the moving parts and actually orchestrate all those little team members underneath.

    [00:21:43] That’s going to be around 20. And honestly, when we get to 30 to 40 K a month, these operational bottlenecks are what scale or what stops businesses ever from getting beyond 40 K a month, because our brains is CEOs don’t really. Think like that in most cases operationally. So we need this key person to help see all the moving parts, bring it together to bring you past 40 K a month and statistics show that it 50 K a month is when you actually can afford, uh, to hire somebody else to be more in a COO position for you.

    [00:22:22] So based on where you are, if you’re up to 15 K, you need to be able to delegate if you’re 20 to 30 K. We need somebody to be able to oversee all those little little delegations. So now we have at least two people on your team. If you’re if you’re getting stuck in that bottleneck, then you need to increase your team members.

    [00:22:41] And remember what I said is we need to put a budget behind these team members. And if you’re at 50k, that’s usually around the time when you can really start affording somebody to come in full time into your business while still paying yourself. So these are the four key areas and the trends that we’re seeing that I worry if you don’t nail these areas, it’s really going to severely affect you.

    [00:23:06] In 2024. And so that’s why I picked these key areas. And again, they’re not things necessarily that everybody’s talking about, but I know they will just be a game changer for your business. So the first area again is upgrading your offers. You can charge more, scale them, be more efficient. Doesn’t mean serving more people.

    [00:23:27] It could mean a collection of offers that collectively equal over a million dollars in sales, but they’re all very curated and they all take clients through a predictable journey again. If that’s what you need, cruise over to the offer engineer dot com. This, this masterclass is not for building new offers for new coaches.

    [00:23:50] This masterclass is only for established coaches, consultants, and subject matter experts that are ready to. Upgrade your offers and scale more. I want to make sure that I’m differentiating that if you are a brand new coach or a consultant, you are not ready for that masterclass. Okay, and that’s it the offer engineer dot com Second way is scaling your relationships really diving into those relationships making them a priority Creating a collection of people that you can rely on that are your peers without paying 10 a year for a mastermind and just leaning into building these relationships Maybe investing in a little trip or a virtual mastermind with this group of people and really pouring into them This is going to be a game changer for you and your business if you make this a priority and set aside the time in 2024 The third thing is your marketing process really important.

    [00:24:40] We need to streamline your marketing process using ai And if you have a B2C side of your business and a B2B side of your business, make sure you know who you’re communicating with and where and on what platforms and what your signature talks are and what your services are to each one of the areas.

    [00:25:00] And Again, moving on beyond that is your teams. Make sure that you have the right people in the right place doing the right things. And then we broke down the numbers of what those financial thresholds are that are typical of what you can afford based on your business. And these are the key areas that I really want you focusing on because when you focus on these and when you nail these In 2024, it’s going to make a significant difference in your business and I want that difference I actually want to hear from you about which ones of these that you’re going to lean into first Please connect with me on linkedin at April beach and let me know that you listen to this show.

    [00:25:39] Let me know which of these four areas that you’re going to dive into first. And I want to end this episode by saying that I don’t want this to be overwhelming. Again, we’re talking about doing more, getting bigger results with doing less. So getting more, doing less, by focusing on the, how you curate these areas in your business, it’s going to make a significant impact.

    [00:26:03] And again, I can’t reiterate how important it is to share that the trends in the subject matter, consulting and coaching spaces have completely changed. And there is an open pathway for people like you that maybe you haven’t hit the financial mark that you really want to hit, or maybe you have found trouble keeping up with the Joneses.

    [00:26:30] This is your year. It’s your year to be very specific and true to yourself, your business, your area of expertise and build marketing strategies, offers and relationships that are actually going to get you there. And I want to hear about it as you go along. So thank you so much for listening to this show.

    [00:26:48] This has been episode number 313. You can find all of the show notes and everything we talked about by going to SweetLifeCo. com and clicking on the podcast. And of course, if you ever want to work with us, we have clients all over the world, and I would love to point to you personally. All right, you guys have an awesome first week of the year.

     
     

     

     

    What It Really Takes To Build A Million Dollar Consulting Business (Episode 312)

    What It Really Takes To Build A Million Dollar Consulting Business

     

     

     
    Summary: 
     
    This one’s for all you independent consultants, coaches, and experts who are looking to grow your business next year. We’re going to chat about what it really takes to build a million-dollar consulting business. 
     
    Yes; you need the right mindset. 
    Yes; you need to be good at what you do
     
    But did you know there’s an actual mathematical formula to determine if your company is capable of hitting a million dollars in gross revenue a year? There is, and in this episode April Beach, an international business strategist, unpacks the key values you need to be aware of that become the inputs for your milliondollar business formula. 
     
    This episode is like your personal guide to growing your business in a smart way. It’s super helpful if you’re working on your own and want to increase your sales without burning out. We’re going to talk about knowing your limits, which is really important, and using that knowledge to make better plans for your business. This way, you can make more money, keep your customers happy, and still have time for yourself! April’s approach has helped people all over the world. She’s got some great strategies that can be tailored to your own unique business.
     
     
     
     
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Assess your Offers: It’s important to really know the ins and outs of the services or advice you provide. This helps you see where you can grow.
    2. Understand Your Limits: Knowing how much you can handle is key. It helps you plan better and grow your business without getting too stressed.
    3. Clean Up Your Offers: Quickly see what offers are dragging you down and where to build improvements 
     
     
     
     
    Resources: 
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    312 

    [00:00:46] Hi everybody. I’m so excited to welcome you to episode number 312. Here on SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, we have made some changes to the show. If you haven’t noticed, we’re actually giving you more free business trainings and tools with every single episode. And so therefore we are dropping our episodes.

    [00:01:07] every two weeks. So if you haven’t noticed that now you can be aware that we’re actually giving you more time to use the materials that we have given you here on the show so that you can actually apply them to your business and continue to grow and continue to make money. We’re getting feedback literally that we’re just giving away so much within a seven day period for the last six years that sometimes you were scrambling to actually utilize it all.

    [00:01:34] And if you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you know, that we are known for giving away free business trainings and strategies backed by 30 years of business coaching expertise that other coaches will charge you hundreds and thousands of dollars for. So we definitely want to make sure that you’re able to utilize the tools we give you.

    [00:01:50] So heads up. The show’s dropping every two weeks. Now this episode is very jam packed. I’m actually teaching you a workshop in this episode that we teach to our private clients called method to millions. And because I need you to really have the worksheets to implement. At a higher level, we’re talking about it here on the show, but to really implement the nitty gritty of the method to millions workshop, I’m giving you completely free access to a recorded one hour training where I just recently brought our clients through this method to millions process.

    [00:02:24] And I’m giving you completely free access to all of the worksheets. This workshop is no strings attached. I just want to bless you and honor you for being a listener here in the show. So you can go to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash millions, and you’ll see there is a cost to it in there. I want you to use coupon code guest again at SweetLifeCo.

    [00:02:49] com forward slash millions. With an S at the end and use coupon code guest, and you can get full access to the whole one hour workshop and worksheets. But let’s go ahead and talk about what we’re going to talk about here in this episode. So you even know if you’re ready for this level of business strategy.

    [00:03:07] So in this show, I’m going to unpack the importance of engineering your business for capacity so that you don’t hit burnout. Many coaches and consultants and subject matter experts, you know, you, you work so hard and you’re creating new offers and you’re doing all the things, but have you ever stopped to take a minute to actually realize with a mathematical formula?

    [00:03:29] Is to whether or not your business is actually engineered to hit a million dollars, or if you were smashing up against a complete brick wall, that’s what we’re talking about here in this show. That is what the workshop helps you see as well. So we are diving into what is called capacity. We’re talking about offer engineering.

    [00:03:47] offer sweet engineering. And this episode is going to help you have a reflection on the last 12 months is to whether or not what you’re selling and what you’re building is in fact actually going to equal a million dollars in your business. And it might not even be a million. You might be just working on trying to hit.

    [00:04:06] 300, 000 or maybe you’re working to hit your first 100, 000. I’ll be honest with you. This show is an advanced business training for established coaches, consultants, and subject matter experts who have already passed the hundred K mark. But if you haven’t done that yet, please Pop in here because now, you know, what’s to come and I love pouring into you and, and helping you see some of the strategies that might happen at the next level.

    [00:04:30] So if you’re ready for this, all of the show notes, everything that we are talking about here can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. Click on the podcast button. This is episode number 312. And again, go right now before you forget and access the free method to millions training by going to SweetLifeCo.

    [00:04:50] com forward slash millions. Use the coupon code guest. All right. If you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive in. All right. So there are three reasons why your business is not going to hit a million dollars, no matter what you do or how hard you work or all of the best marketing strategies in the world.

    [00:05:11] There are three reasons why you might not be hitting a million dollars, no matter how hard you work, how hard you try. And frankly, how great you are. Those three reasons are your offer design. isn’t done correctly. You have reached capacity on how you have designed your offers and frankly, there isn’t enough time in the year.

    [00:05:30] So reason number one is incorrect offer model design. Each one of your offers needs to be engineered. to correctly ensure that it aligns with your ability to bring enough people in based on how much you charge and how many people you can serve that you’re actually going to hit a million dollars in that offer.

    [00:05:51] So that’s number one. Number two is that inside that offer, Especially depending on how many times you offer it a year, whether you do it one on one, you are going to reach capacity. And then the next one is not enough time. We’ll get into what not enough time last when we talk about marketing. So let’s kind of unpack the problem here.

    [00:06:10] And if you’re frustrated, could you see other strategists and other businesses just consultants having million dollar businesses, it really isn’t maybe just their marketing plan. It’s how their programs and their offers are engineered. So the deal is, is we don’t talk about capacity enough. As a matter of fact, I think business coaches and strategists, it’s a huge missing mark because of the fact that we talk about marketing, marketing, get more people and generate leads.

    [00:06:34] But what happens when we’ve generated all those leads in your offers or your suite of offers? Isn’t engineered to hit that capacity. So the problem is, is if we don’t pause to talk about the capacity of your suite of offers, you are never going to reach a million dollars. It’s like building a house where you need a hundred people to sleep there, but there’s only one bedroom.

    [00:07:01] It’s just physically impossible to do it in. So therefore, I want us to come back here and really understand the process of assessing capacity based on the offers that you are offering and your business offers your offering. I know that sounds silly, but you know what you’re selling your, your programs and services.

    [00:07:20] So. Our goal here today is to help you identify your current offers that you have already done, that you’re already selling, and understand if you have hit a threshold. Also today, I want you to understand that any new offers that maybe you have thought about creating, How do they fit into the math to help you reach that million dollar mark or just replace the word million dollar with your next financial threshold?

    [00:07:48] Uh, and let’s just kind of speak to that for a minute. A million dollars is a lot of money for, um, to generate for a single. Consulting business. It’s very important that we engineer your offers correctly so that you can do that. And so, um, but if you’re, if you’re here, maybe if you’re struggling from money mindset, I don’t want you to shut down this training thinking, Oh my gosh, she’s just another person talking about how to hit a million dollars.

    [00:08:11] I could care less. any number with a million dollars. This math works. If you’re trying to hit 250, 000 or 750, 000 or 350, 000, it doesn’t matter. I want you to use this math because it’s going to give you a huge insight. So the process, the method that I am talking about today is a method I created called mathematical Method to millions.

    [00:08:34] So it’s called a method to millions and the worksheet I’m giving you or the workshop and the worksheets that I’m giving you away for free with this episode are is also called method to millions. And so basically what it is is it’s a mathematical equation to add up capacity. With what you’re charging for your offers with the model of your offers and understanding how many people you can actually fit in that offer in a year to see if you can actually mathematically hit a million dollars.

    [00:09:02] And when you engineer your numbers correctly. Basically, when you engineer your suite of offers correctly, then you can do it. But if you’re looking at these numbers after we go through today and you’re realizing, wow, I can’t do any more of this. I can’t sell any more of this. I’m never going to make any more than 75, 000 on this one thing.

    [00:09:23] Then we have a problem. And that is why I want to help you with this today. You know, the end of the year, depending on when you’re listening to this, it’s the end of 2023. It’s a really important time for us to assess. All of the hard work and how we’re serving our clients and what we’re working on. And so that’s why this topic is so important.

    [00:09:43] So first of all, let’s kind of define capacity. What is capacity? Capacity is the maximum amount of people you can serve and the maximum amount of money you can make based on a certain offer or program you’re selling. Now, let’s define offer or program. So an offer is your consulting service, whether it is a one on one service, whether it is a course or a membership or a retreat or a VIP day or a licensed product or a certification program or a mastermind, whatever it is that you sell.

    [00:10:21] Also for you guys that have done for you services, if you have like an agency or if you have a hybrid where it’s kind of done with you and done for you, that’s, that’s what we’re talking about. Right? So when we’re talking about your offer, it’s what you do, what you sell. And so. Inside every single offer, there is usually a capacity and capacity isn’t bad, right?

    [00:10:44] So I don’t want you to think capacity is terrible, like, Oh, my gosh, everything has to scale. I have to fit 5000 people in this offer. That is a wrong approach. All right. I know there’s a lot of coaches out there that are like, Oh my gosh, you need to build these offers so you can sell it to more people.

    [00:10:59] Frankly, I don’t want to be in any program where I’m like one of 5, 000 people. And you probably don’t either. That was a big trend from 2000 and you know, 13 to 2019. None of us want to be a number in a cattle drive anymore. So first of all, it’s important to know that I am not here advocating that you build all these offers.

    [00:11:19] For a low ticket or even other offers for a super high ticket, you know, so you can fit more people. The most important thing I want you to take away from this episode is you can engineer your suite of offers any way you want. And the very first thing I want you to understand is it how you build your suite of offers and how you serve your clients and what you sell.

    [00:11:42] It’s going to affect your lifestyle. And so I want you to actually stop for a minute and I want you to take an inventory and I want you to think about every single thing you’re selling. So here we go with the step by step training. Step number one is make a list of your current offers that you are selling.

    [00:11:59] And again, I have this cheat sheet worksheet for you where you can get access to it for free. When you access our method to millions workshop for free. So in the left hand column, if you’re visual like me, you’re going to list the name of the offer. So it could be one on one coaching or done for you website services, or, you know, my, my week long retreat in Costa Rica, whatever it is you guys sell.

    [00:12:20] Okay. Left hand call. The next column over and the next step I want you to go through is I want you to understand what is the model of that? Is it done live in person? Is it on demand? Is it a hybrid model? It’s important to look at the model of how you deliver your offer because it’s going to tell us whether or not we’re going to hit capacity, right?

    [00:12:44] So we know, for example, let’s use the retreat. If you have a retreat, so the title of the offer is retreat, the model of it is, One time a year and it’s in person. That’s awesome. That’s very exclusive and and I’m sure you know You’re selling that out because people love those type of experiences But the next step is after we do offer and model the next step is how many people can you actually sell that to?

    [00:13:09] Is it a retreat for 10 people? Is it a retreat for five people? What is the total number, what is, what are, what is, let’s say correct English there, what is the total number of people that’s not correct? Alright, help me out here. What, how many people can you sell this baby to, right? So if it’s a retreat, there is going to be a capacity of a lower number.

    [00:13:29] But if your offer is a course or a training where it’s endless, Fantastic, right? So first is offer. Second is understanding the model of each one of your offers. And the third one is understanding the maximum number of people that you can fit into that offer. Here’s the key in one year. So if you have that retreat twice a year, You’re going to say, okay, maybe it’s 20 people total.

    [00:13:53] If you have that course available all the time and you, there’s no limitation. If your model has no limitation, it’s something that’s an on demand training or especially for those of you guys that are getting into licensing. If there’s really no limitation on how many you want to release it to, that’s incredible.

    [00:14:12] That’s awesome. We love that. I want you to put in the goal number of how many seats you want to sell into it. So if it’s on demand with no capacity, the maximum number of people, you’re going to put your goal for the number of people that you want to sell into that program for the year to come. So we’ve done three things.

    [00:14:32] We have assessed your offer. We have assessed the model of how each one of the offers are delivered. And now we’ve assessed the maximum number of people that you can fit into that offer in a 12 month period of time. Now. Part four. Hopefully you guys are with me here. Step four is I want you to multiply the per person cost of what you charge for that offer by the number of people you can fit into it.

    [00:15:00] So if you have a course that has your, your goal is to fit, it’s on demand. Your course course name here models on demand. Your goal is to fit, sell it to 100 people. And the course is, you know, five bucks, right? Whatever, that’s terrible. Don’t charge 5 for your course. But you know what I mean? Then you are going to multiply them the maximum amount of money.

    [00:15:23] If you hit your goal, you can make on that is 500, right? So let’s go. Let’s give a different example here. If, however, let’s go to the retreat example. If your offer is a retreat and you char in, it’s, you know, you can sell it to 10 people at a time and you charge 1, 000 for that retreat, then the maximum amount of money you’re going to make on that retreat is 10, 000.

    [00:15:50] So it’s really important to look at the number at the maximum amount of money that you can possibly make. On a particular offer. And you’re going to do that for every single one of your offers. Now, here’s where it really becomes eyeopening, especially for our clients. If you provide boutique elite high end offers, you’re not going to sell that to as many people.

    [00:16:10] So the idea here is understanding this is the offer. I only can take five private clients. Like for me, for example, I only take four private clients a year. That is my capacity. I cannot take more than that. So I know that I cannot make more than four times the amount of money I charge for it, which is currently 33, 000.

    [00:16:30] So I cannot make more than that on actual private clients. So what it does is when I’m looking at my list and I go through this, my team and I go through this every single year, really, I really don’t love pushing private clients because I have a lower capacity for profit with private clients, even though I charge more because I only can take so many.

    [00:16:51] So the process is you are going to have your list of offers. You’re going to have your model. You’re going to understand how your offers are delivered and you’re going to see where you’re hitting capacity. Now, I have so much more. I want to teach you about this and what we do next, but. Our first goal here today is to have you have an understanding of where you might have hit capacity.

    [00:17:14] And frankly, how much time is it taking for these offers to be delivered? When we understand capacity, when we really talk about capacity based on how you are engineering your suite of offers to reach your profit threshold, then you can take a look and you can be like, there is no way I’m going to hit this.

    [00:17:34] Especially if you only have a few different offers, if you only do one on one services and and their boutique services, and that’s what you’re pushing, especially with that done for your hybrid approach, you’re going to hit capacity. And so what else can you be? Should you be? Might you want to engineer so that you can increase your profit across other methods?

    [00:17:57] So again, there are three reasons why you won’t hit a million dollars or 300, 000 or whatever your profit threshold is. Number one, because your offer model design isn’t engineered. I don’t even want to say the word correctly because it’s different for all of us. It’s just your, your list of offers aren’t engineered.

    [00:18:16] to fit enough people into them for the price that you are charging. Now, most coaches will be like, we’ll charge more. Absolutely. If you are at capacity, if you, if your program is sold out, if you have a wait list, if you are selling at a certain rate, it’s time to increase your prices for sure. But in most cases we’re looking at a list of offers and they just aren’t engineered correctly.

    [00:18:41] Either the price isn’t engineered correctly or the offer itself can’t fit enough people. Recognizing that you’re hitting capacity is a very important thing that I want you to be able to do before you go into the hard work of actually promoting the offer and doing the work of doing the launch and the marketing and all the things.

    [00:18:59] See, now you understand why all the marketing in the world, the biggest list in the world, if your offers aren’t engineered correctly and your suite of offers aren’t engineered correctly, you’re never going to hit that seven figure mark because it’s physically impossible based on the way that you’ve engineered your offers.

    [00:19:14] And then here’s the third really important thing that I want to leave you with. And I really do want you to access the method to millions workshop for free because this is where our clients just, their brain just explodes when they realize what we’re going to talk about next. Even if your list of offers, your suite of offers is engineered that you’re going to be able to hit capacity.

    [00:19:36] Sometimes there is not enough time in the year to market and sell them all. It’s really, really important. This is what I mean. You only can sell so often. If you’re out there being like, buy my this and buy my that. And you know, I have, I have all these great things and I want to work with you. Uh, if you’re selling all the time, people are going to stop following you.

    [00:19:58] You only can sell. so much. And if you are looking at your list and you’re like, wow, I can reach them all, but January I have to sell this and the end of January I have to push for that. And then in February I’m going to have everybody, you know, do a campaign to work with me one on one. And then in March I need to start filling up my retreats, but also in March I need to sell this little workshop.

    [00:20:19] If you realize that There is not enough time in a calendar year to actually market and sell all of the things that you have created in order to hit a million dollars. That is also a big problem. And so that’s kind of this aha that people have. So even if the suite is engineered correctly, we’re going to run into a capacity with time in the calendar based on.

    [00:20:46] Basic relational communication skills. The way around that is if you have lower ticket offers, so we can also, we can always run ads to that, you know, we can just keep pouring in ad spend too, but frankly, ads aren’t converting the way they used to, and they’re much more expensive. And so that’s not usually, uh, a first defense to fix this problem.

    [00:21:05] So let’s kind of recap what we talked about. We talked about a process that I teach called Method to Millions. It’s basically a math formula for you to open up your eyes, take a look at your suite of offers, what you currently have and determine whether or not you are actually physically going to be able to hit A million dollars with the programs and services that you’re selling.

    [00:21:23] This is why a lot of our clients love licensing because there isn’t capacity and it’s very little work and very little marketing. Just a little plug. If you’re interested in learning more about licensing, I have a lot of podcast episodes on that here to help you understand what the model of licensing your courses in a nutshell, take a look and be real with yourself.

    [00:21:43] Also understand how often can you realistically sell to your particular audience? And what I want you to do from this is pause for a minute and I want you to remove any offers that are not profitable or taking too much time. I want you to consider also adding new offers or upgrading current offers to increase the capacity.

    [00:22:04] So either increasing more people. Or increasing the amount of money that you can charge for those offers by engineering them better than they have been done in the past. We don’t want to necessarily just always increase the cost. We always want to look at the ROI of what we’re delivering and making sure that you’re ethically increasing your costs, especially in the consulting and strategist space.

    [00:22:24] Great. Okay. So again, this was the method to millions kind of mini workshop here. We’re talking about how to truly build a million dollar coaching business, what it actually takes. It’s not in the marketing. It’s not in the relationship. Those things come later. It comes in engineering the products that you’re selling, which is based from your amazing knowledge and whether or not you’re capable of actually hitting that number.

    [00:22:47] Again, if you want to access the free workshop that I teach exclusively to our clients, you can go to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash millions and use the coupon code guest. That coupon will only be available for a limited time. So don’t wait to go over there and grab that. And for all of the show notes, the transcript of this, all of the resources and other resources we have for you, please visit SweetLifeCo.

    [00:23:17] com and you can just click right there on the button for the podcast. And I really appreciate you guys. Thank you so much for listening to the show. We are rolling over to year number seven. I absolutely love it. Absolutely. Cannot believe it. And, uh, we’re always here for you. So if you haven’t connected with us on LinkedIn, find me on LinkedIn at April beach.

    [00:23:35] And of course we would love to work with you to bring your business to the next level. Cruise over to SweetLifeCo. com and all of the resources we have are available for you there. Thank you so much. Have a fantastic end of 2023 and we have some exciting episodes to help you kick off the new year coming up here soon.

     
     

    4 Simple JV Partnership Types with April Beach and Charles Byrd (Episode 311)

    4 Simple JV Partnership Types

     

     

    Who is this episode for? 
    Entrepreneurs in Phases 2-4 of our Online Business Roadmap™
     
     
     
    Summary: 
    This episode is tailor-made for entrepreneurs who have an established training or program but struggle to generate leads or have a smaller list. If you want ways to increase visibility for your business without diving into conventional advertising routes like Facebook or LinkedIn ads, then this episode is a must-listen.  
     
    April’s conversation with JV partnership expert, Charles Byrd, provides an alternative path to business growth that is dependable and requires less effort to generate leads. You will be introduced to the world of joint venture (JV) partnerships through Charles, a renowned figure in this arena. They’ll uncover the four distinct types of JV partnerships, learning how each can be a lucrative option depending on your business’s unique needs. This episode delivers actionable steps on implementing these JV strategies. When you’re finished listening you’ll have more clarity on which type of partnership is best for where you are in business currently. 
     
     
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Understand the 4 types of JV partnerships
    2. Determine which type is best for you based on your offers
    3. Gain confidence in starting JV partnerships even if you have a small offer and no list. 
     
     
     
     
    Resources: 
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    311

    [00:00:47] April Beach: Hi, you guys. And welcome back to another episode here of the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach. The host of this show, this is episode number 311. And we are diving in with a friend of mine, Charles Byrd, who’s going to unpack four different types of JV partnerships that feel really good and are very, very profitable for you to get into place for your business.

    [00:01:09] April Beach: So who is this show for? This show is for you. If you have an. Established program or training, doesn’t even matter. The actual cost and the value of that program. Charles is gonna unpack different strategies based on the value of your program here in the show. So if you have an established training or program and you want to get more eyes on you, you don’t probably run ads.

    [00:01:32] April Beach: If you’re like me, you know, Facebook and I had a big, huge divorce that includes my Facebook ads account. And so, you know, and you might not either have the investment or want to invest in running LinkedIn ads. And maybe that isn’t even aligning with your company, but you need to get more eyes on your business in a way that feels really good to you.

    [00:01:50] April Beach: So joint venture partnerships are a great way to do that. And so our guest today. Charles Byrd was referred to me by multiple different people because he is this go to guy on building JV partnerships in the way that he talks about it. And we unpack actually what is a JV partnership and what would be the right next steps for you.

    [00:02:09] April Beach: So if you want to generate your lead, more leads with the right people. In a way that aligns with your time, Charles is very much like I am. He takes his kids to cool places and travels around a lot and just frankly doesn’t overwork himself. He’s been very strategic and actually how he’s modeled his business.

    [00:02:26] April Beach: If you want to do that, get more leads into your business as well as this great episode for you to listen to. So again, this is episode number. 311 and you can visit all of the show notes by cruising over to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash 311 or by just going to SweetLifeCo. com clicking on the podcast.

    [00:02:47] April Beach: This is episode number 311 and everything will be over there waiting for you. If you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive in and meet my friend, Charles. All right, you guys. Thank you for being here this week. I am here with my friend Charles and Charles and I were introduced to each other by a mutual friend who is always looking to connect great people with great people.

    [00:03:07] April Beach: And one of the places that he learned that was from Charles himself. And so Charles has a gifting. of helping you to build your network, build your business by helping you to rethink how you get in front of your ideal audience in a way that it’s a win win for everybody. So I’m really excited to be talking about what we’re going to chat about on today’s show.

    [00:03:28] April Beach: Charles, welcome to the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast. You want to give people a little bit of a background on who you are and how you got to the point where you are right now in your business and your area of expertise.

    [00:03:39] Charles Byrd: Absolutely. And April, thanks so much for having me. So I help businesses scale with joint venture partnerships, referrals, speaking, and for a little backstory straight into what I do today, I worked in the Silicon Valley for 15 years.

    [00:03:54] Charles Byrd: I was a director at a billion dollar software company. I left to get a taste of the entrepreneurial freedom I read about in books. I started with a low ticket and that’s it. Productivity course and being new to the online space. I didn’t have a list or connections at that time. So started going to a lot of events and connecting with people online and quickly found my new peer group of entrepreneurs already had my ideal clients in their communities.

    [00:04:22] Charles Byrd: So I started setting up presentations to other people’s audiences, delivering a high value training and offering the deeper dive course and started growing my email list quickly, making sales, making a positive impact. So I thought, since this is working, what if I take my it and systems background and simplify and systematize the entire joint venture process, which I did.

    [00:04:47] Charles Byrd: And eventually people wondered how I book. Two to six joint venture promotions per week for my offers to other people’s communities. And I was at a mastermind in Aspen and my phone’s blowing up with texts and messenger messages and people knocking on the room door going, how do you line up so many of these deals?

    [00:05:07] Charles Byrd: So I decided to put together my first high ticket event called pure JV and that’s the market I’ve been serving. Ever since, uh, at this point, that’s through one on one work with companies over five weeks and the steps that we walk people through are creating a unique joint venture strategy for their product and market, help them identify their most profitable partners.

    [00:05:31] Charles Byrd: Show them how to connect to those partners through warm channels. My favorite part, how to guide the conversations to land the deals frequently on the first call. Operationally, how to execute those deals from a systems perspective, and then how to turn each deal into two or three more. Eight of my clients in the first year added 1.

    [00:05:53] Charles Byrd: 25 to 6 million in additional revenue. I had three clients on stage with Tony Robbins last month. teaching them how to create embedded partnerships. So their offers inside of Tony’s, uh, one of my clients, Dr. Dan Pompa just booked on Joe Rogan through his PR company. And I’m showing him how to parlay that into warm intros to Lex Friedman and Andrew Huberman to take that win and take it to a whole nother level.

    [00:06:20] Charles Byrd: So it’s, it’s a way to simply get in front of more of your ideal clients. through other people’s communities, audiences, and, and build amazing relationships on the way.

    [00:06:31] April Beach: And now I’m sure our listeners know why I was so excited to bring you here on the show, because this is, this is exactly what people are looking for.

    [00:06:39] April Beach: And the way you go about doing it, we’ve talked about affiliate launches and we’ve talked about those things. This is completely different. So the way you go about doing this is. is very unique and, um, it’s very relational. And that’s one of the reasons why I have been so interested in working with you as well for a long time.

    [00:06:56] April Beach: And I’ve, I’ve seen the case studies and I know your clients and it’s just what you do. You create amazing results in a way that feels really, really good. So let’s kind of go back to the beginning for our listeners who might not know actually what a joint venture is. Let’s define what JV is for our listeners or people who may be confused.

    [00:07:17] Charles Byrd: Yeah. Uh, so again, coming out of corporate, I, I thought a joint venture has been two big companies like Partner together and they’re basically married. And, uh, this is nothing quite like that. This, you can think of them as promotional partnerships. And I’ll just share a basic example, but I’ll point out there’s, um, you have the product or service.

    [00:07:42] Charles Byrd: Someone else has the audience. And so to use an example of like Brian Tracy, he’s got a, an audience of 500, 000 people who’ve subscribed to receive his emails. They follow him because he teaches sales, productivity, high performance. And so He’ll partner with experts that compliment those topics. And so imagine Brian mailing his 500, 000 people, inviting them to a presentation you’re putting on for your product or service, because it aligns with why people follow him to begin with.

    [00:08:19] Charles Byrd: And then everyone who registers for that training is added to your email list. So you can literally add thousands of people to your list. A day during those promotions and then you deliver a high, high value training in this example, everyone who signs up is a new client of yours and you share revenue with Brian because it was his audience to begin with.

    [00:08:40] Charles Byrd: So that would be like an example of a webinar type of promotion, but it also could be, I’ll cover a few different joint venture types in the process. It could also be me simply sending you a referral if we’ve lined up a referral partnership. That’s a type of joint venture as well. Um, and systematizing the joint venture process.

    [00:09:06] Charles Byrd: Um, in my presentation, I have a slide that says, do you get your referrals by luck or by design? Is it baked into the DNA of, of what you’re doing? So I personally get 12 to 20 referrals to million dollar plus businesses a week through this process. Um, so speaking to other people’s groups. Whether that’s a webinar format or a physical stage, um, referral partnerships, embedded partnerships.

    [00:09:38] Charles Byrd: That’s where as other people make sales of their product or service, you’re making a sale of yours because your offers inside of theirs, which I know April, we were chatting and you were excited because that aligns with some of your licensing strategies, creating embedded partnerships around that. And lastly, it would be social JVs, much like this interview is.

    [00:10:02] Charles Byrd: So it’s, it’s a conversation. Um, this of course gets me some exposure to your audience, April. Um, if I’m promoting this show to my audience, that’s getting you more exposure. So this is another form of, of joint venture, uh, which we never even talked about in those terms. It just happens to be. Another way to think about it.

    [00:10:24] Charles Byrd: Yeah.

    [00:10:25] April Beach: So for our listeners who, um, clearly this is somebody, I’m sure it’s something that almost everybody who’s listening is going to be like, this is, I absolutely need to be doing this. This sounds so smart, but what do they need to actually have in place already? To be in a position to start making these JV partnerships, what sort of content or trainings or what level of expertise do you recommend people have before they start moving into this?

    [00:10:53] April Beach: What’s this? That’s the prerequisite to move into this type of a partnership.

    [00:10:58] Charles Byrd: Sure. So I’ll, I’ll, uh, dive into what those specifically are. Um, also addressing. What are some of the things that hold people back from wanting to do these kind of things? Number one, how, how are these configured? If people don’t know how the deals are put together, then it’s easy to avoid them because they don’t know what the next step is, or they feel they could be complicated.

    [00:11:22] Charles Byrd: Um, and you know, or they, even if they see alignment, they don’t know how to guide a conversation into making that a reality, um, or something I call the reciprocation trap where people feel that. If, if someone else promotes them or their offer that they have to promote the other person’s offer, which is simply a story in our head, that’s not actually true.

    [00:11:49] Charles Byrd: Um, or one person’s audience is way bigger and they feel they’re not big enough to participate yet, which is again, just simply a self. limiting, um, thought. So the prerequisites, as, as you asked, are as follows. Now, based on the different JV types, um, some of them have more requirements than others to be able to achieve technically.

    [00:12:17] Charles Byrd: So let’s start at the simple side referrals. Not a lot of infrastructure required for referrals, so you can simply have a conversation with a friend, a peer, a client and talk through who right fit. Connections are for your product service, product services or rooms that you may want to get in front of minimal infrastructure.

    [00:12:45] Charles Byrd: We’re talking texts, emails, uh, those kind of basic things. So, and, and, you know, some way to track. Those from a spreadsheet to however, you feel like tracking them, um, which of course we have super dialed systems for and then, um, to a little more advanced where if you’re doing something like a webinar, like the example I shared regarding Brian Tracy, you would need a little more infrastructure in there’s layers to have very simple approaches versus more advanced, but in general, if you were doing something like a webinar, you would want it.

    [00:13:26] Charles Byrd: emails for a partner to be able to send out on your behalf so that they’re promoting it to their audience because you’re not going to have them write your emails. You’ll share them so their job is easier. Um, then those emails will have links to register for a training. That would mean you’d need some type of landing page where someone can read what the presentation’s about.

    [00:13:50] Charles Byrd: If they’re interested in it, they can sign up. And as they put their name and email in, those folks are getting added to your email list. So you’d have some type of autoresponder email tool to collect those, uh, leads coming through from the registrations. You’d need a tool to be able to deliver the webinar, something like Zoom or GoToWebinar, something like that.

    [00:14:12] Charles Byrd: Point being… Each strategy has its own specific, uh, systems and tools behind it. But keep in mind, a lot of these can be very straightforward. So certainly don’t get intimidated by the tools. It just has to do with which approach is the best for your business and to kind of cut to the chase a little bit on that, if you have higher ticket offers.

    [00:14:38] Charles Byrd: Your, your offers are more expensive. We’re talking 10, 15, 20 K, um, doing big promotions. Isn’t even a good use of your time. You want to simply get in front of your ideal clients going straight to where they are. So where are affluent, uh, entrepreneurs? Well they’re in other high ticket masterminds. They’re in other high ticket programs.

    [00:15:06] Charles Byrd: That, that’s where I spend my time is presenting to rooms full of million dollar plus businesses. So I can do one presentation, which by the way, I’m not even making an offer. I haven’t made an offer in front of a room in probably three years, but I walk off the stage and everyone who’s interested comes and has a chat.

    [00:15:28] Charles Byrd: We line up a followup call and a bunch of those become. Um, clients and then I meet with them a year later and many of them have, they’re over a million in, in a new revenue just from that. So, um, in any case, those are some of the JV types, some of the, uh, uh, reciprocation trap things that can hold people back.

    [00:15:49] Charles Byrd: But really what I want to highlight is it’s a new way of thinking of everyone you meet. They know someone who could be an ideal client for you or an ideal partner for you. So it’s, it’s building better relationships to get to those winning outcomes.

    [00:16:06] April Beach: Yeah. You said, you said so many things there. I want to pull out again and just highlight.

    [00:16:10] April Beach: First of all, is that oftentimes when you speak, you aren’t actually making an offer. And I think that our audience would assume that you’re coming in and you’re doing an actual sales webinar or a training, which could obviously be the case as well. But. Yeah. In what you said, in the way you do it, going in and just organically teaching your area of expertise or introducing a different thought process regarding, you know, what is the solution that you provide?

    [00:16:38] April Beach: That is, I think that feels really good. That’s one of the things that you do that I love the most because that really aligns more with. how we operate as a company. And I think a lot of our listeners are going to are going to find that as well. And I think just allowing for our listeners to, um, perhaps even get permission, maybe they need to realize that it’s okay to go and teach and pour in without feeling the need to sell and sell and sell in.

    [00:17:10] April Beach: According to your system and your process, you’re actually more profitable possibly because you don’t. Actually do that.

    [00:17:18] Charles Byrd: Yeah, absolutely. So again, I’ll draw these distinctions that could be helpful for people to self place where they may fit the best with some of these JV types. For one, I think everyone listening should lean into referrals.

    [00:17:34] Charles Byrd: It’s simple. It’s, it’s, uh, highly effective. Um, especially this doesn’t mean just from your own clients. I mean, I get a ton from clients, but it’s from my peer group. It’s from my friends. In fact, before we hit record here, you and I scheduled a call to line up great connections for each other. How much did that cost either of us?

    [00:17:56] Charles Byrd: Nothing. Um, so, uh, number one, start there. I will make a distinction with, uh, like my offers are quite high ticket because of the value they bring. But I’ll point out if if I had a two K offer or five K offer, I would be in front of broader groups. And I would be making offers in those presentations. It just has to do with where you are in the market where I’m talking to more advanced businesses in general anyway.

    [00:18:32] Charles Byrd: And when they hear a strategy that they don’t have in place and they want in place in a way, they don’t need to be sold. They’re like, I want that. So, um, whereas when I was running a group programs, which I did for many years, I’d actually fill them from, well, I guess three main places. One, I would do broader webinars and the call to action was to a sales call.

    [00:18:58] Charles Byrd: And, and so that would be people mailing their lists like that example, the Brian Tracy one, um, and I would present to the mid level masterminds, people in groups that are eight, 10, 15 K. Which those are way smaller groups, but they’re, they’re full of ideal clients. These people have invested in themselves.

    [00:19:20] Charles Byrd: They’re, they have enough traction in their business to do that. And typically the further along a entrepreneur is the way easier it is to help them because they have so many other ducks in a row. Um, and I’ll point out by consciously choosing to move up market Your life gets way easier.

    [00:19:42] April Beach: I’ve heard people say that for years and it wasn’t until I started doing that myself where I actually believed him.

    [00:19:48] April Beach: I think that was in the beginning, there was just a lot of intimidation there, but uh, over the years I, I realized you’re completely right about that. So that’s a really good distinction to my, yeah. My next question was going to be what, what is the vow? Who do you best connect with based on the value of your offer?

    [00:20:02] April Beach: And I know our listeners have offers absolutely from, you know, a few thousand dollars up to, up to 10 K whereas other, uh, other of our, our listeners have 50, 000 programs that they deliver as well. So what I’m hearing that you just said is based on the actual product that you’re selling, that’s where you’re going to The way that you would approach and deliver your content within this JV partnership would be based on the actual, um, really financial level or the audience.

    [00:20:33] April Beach: Um, I don’t want to say maturity because that’s not right. Uh, the, the audience, how advanced the, the buyer is with, with correlation with that offer in what they usually tend to need to buy because you’re right, because, you know, are more advanced or profitable entrepreneurs. They have their teams, they have their systems, they’re not so busy, uh, in the things that those people that are, are trying to break like that.

    [00:20:58] April Beach: 30 or 40 K a month ceiling or try all of those processes that, that tend to need to be brought into place for those other kind of mid level entrepreneurs. So that’s, that’s a really, really good point. So let’s kind of recap again, some of these, you said there are four primary types of JV partnerships that you love to guide people through.

    [00:21:20] April Beach: Can we recap those one more time? So I’m just trying to cover those again for our listeners.

    [00:21:25] Charles Byrd: Yeah. So number one is presenting to other people’s audiences. And you could kind of put that in a few camps, um, that could be, uh, speaking on a stage in front of a physical room. It could be presenting virtually to a group and, and then the caliber of that group, it, it could be a higher level group or it could be a broader webinar to a big list, a big audience.

    [00:21:51] Charles Byrd: Um, so all of those are. Presenting to a group number two referral partnerships again, highly recommend these and keep in mind referrals. Don’t have to just be to clients. Although those are lovely. Of course, you can get referrals to joint venture partners. You can get referrals to stages like If you want more podcasts, get your referrals to podcasts.

    [00:22:16] Charles Byrd: So you, you aim the cannon at what you are after. Um, then there’s embedded partnerships. Again, this is where there’s different configurations, but in general it’s where your product or service is inside of someone else’s offer or some of your content is in someone else’s offer that’s like a lead source for you.

    [00:22:39] Charles Byrd: And those are Some of my favorite because you’re making a singular deal that represents ongoing lead flow. Um, and just to cite an example of that, uh, one of my clients, Jackson Milan, um, came to me when it was at 1. 8 million a year later is over 6 million in cash collected through joy ventures. He was running Facebook ads that weren’t working particularly well and started working a lot worse when Facebook shut down his account and That’s when he was referred over to me and he’s a quick start.

    [00:23:13] April Beach: I love Jackson I’ve taught I’ve taught a master class in Jackson’s group before I think Jackson actually might have been one of the people that originally introduced us now that I’m thinking back before our other friend Brian this is So I, I’ve seen the ins and outs of how Jackson’s stuff works and, and you’re a genius, my friend.

    [00:23:37] Charles Byrd: Yeah. Um, Jackson, he, this guy’s he implements, so he booked, he hired me. We dove in on a strategy, identifying ideal partners, how to land those partners. He, he landed 70 joint ventures in two months, which is. Um, and then I taught him how to create embedded partnerships, and he lined up 15 of those. Uh, he more than tripled the business all the while touring Australia with his wife and two dogs in a four by four camper van before buying a farm by the, uh, Ocean and jungle.

    [00:24:14] Charles Byrd: Um, he wrote an intro for me two weeks ago. I, I think I got a screenshot of it. He does this intro and he’s like, Charles has made me more money than any human on planet earth. Right.

    [00:24:27] April Beach: Right. I believe it. I, I believe it. Um, Absolutely. What a great case study. And I, and I, and I love, so I can like continue to share a little bit, you know, with, with our audience that I, that I’ve actually been within his ecosystem, um, and seen that.

    [00:24:44] April Beach: And it’s a very well oiled machine. I will say that.

    [00:24:49] Charles Byrd: Yeah. He’s done a beautiful job. Um, I want to point one other thing out is, uh, I started with joint ventures off a 200 product, so you can do this the whole way. Like, and it is a risk free lead source, meaning. You only pay commission on sales that have been made.

    [00:25:13] Charles Byrd: So some, some promos work great. You send your partner money. In fact, I made a sale earlier today from a referral from a good friend of mine. And I’m like, remind me your PayPal, like going to send him money. Um, now keep in mind, he didn’t do the intro to make money. He did it because it’s the right fit for that person, but who doesn’t like getting money in the process?

    [00:25:37] Charles Byrd: So again, 200 product. Successfully jv’d with that. And then as, as I evolved as a entrepreneur and prices went to 2k and then five and then eight and have continued. Up past 45 for different offers. Um, it’s the strategy the whole time. Um, I, I do, I guess personally like it when folks offers are a little higher ticket because they can ROI me so fast.

    [00:26:08] Charles Byrd: Um, just as an example of Todd Hartley, he’s got his core offer was an 8k offer helping. businesses leverage video in their sales process to increase conversion. Um, Tony Robbins hired him to train all of his sales sales teams across his companies that worked so well that now Tony has him on stage for business mastery.

    [00:26:30] Charles Byrd: And he wanted to learn to JV with other people, not just Tony. So within four weeks of working together, he’d. We helped get this whole system in production. He’d lined up six JVs. He happened to pay me 35 K. His first joy venture brought 125 K next joy venture, 125 K. He’s added a hundred thousand a month for the last five months in money.

    [00:26:57] Charles Byrd: He never had previously. So, um, Anyway, with higher ticket offers, like not that everyone does this, mind you, but if, if he can four or five X his money on deal number one, but he’s lining them up multiple per week going forward, it’s a pretty nice thing.

    [00:27:16] April Beach: That’s a pretty great way to justify the investment of the genius you bring to somebody’s business too.

    [00:27:22] April Beach: I mean, this is just like, it’s, it’s great for him. It’s great for you. Um, I want all of our listeners to be thinking about just. Totally a little sidebar here. You guys, um, on your program, you know, can, can, can your students, uh, you know, four or five times the ROI on your program to besides the JV side of it.

    [00:27:43] April Beach: And, uh, it’s always something to, to be mindful about, or how long would that take them or actually what do they need to. do to be able to do that. So this is such a great conversation. Okay. So I think because I totally sidetracked us, you talking about Jackson. So we went over the four, the four basic types.

    [00:28:00] April Beach: Of course, I have my notes here. Cause I, I love learning from you. If you talked about presenting in front of other people’s groups, we talked about the referral partnerships. We talked about the embedded. Um, partnerships, which you and I both love you from a JV standpoint, me from a licensing standpoint.

    [00:28:17] April Beach: Those are just so powerful and so simple. Um, did I miss the

    [00:28:20] Charles Byrd: fourth one? What’s number four? And the fourth one was a social JVs, much like this kind of interview. Social. Oh my

    [00:28:27] April Beach: goodness. So cool. Um, my friend, I have, I have my chicken scratch notes here that I’m going to turn into our show notes, which I’m sure will turn into more resources for our listeners to, to recap, because there was so much, so much wisdom here in this show.

    [00:28:42] April Beach: So thank you. Thank you very much for your time and sharing this. How can people get into your ecosystem? How can people tap into where do you hang out? Uh, how can they continue to learn from you and, and tap into your world? Like, like our company is tapping into your world.

    [00:29:01] Charles Byrd: Oh, wonderful. Well, thanks.

    [00:29:02] Charles Byrd: Thanks for asking. Uh, simply pop over to charlesByrd. com B Y R D it’s got more info on that. the kind of work we do. There’s ways to, to reach me and the team through there. Um, I’m also on Facebook, Facebook slash dot com slash Charles Byrd, B Y R D. I don’t use LinkedIn a ton, but you can find me on there too.

    [00:29:26] Charles Byrd: Um, so yeah, these would be good places to, to connect. Awesome. Thank

    [00:29:31] April Beach: you so very much, Charles. I love learning from you and appreciate you pouring into our community and your

    [00:29:36] Charles Byrd: time here. My pleasure. Thanks for having me.

    [00:29:41] April Beach: All right. What a great episode with Charles. As you heard, and we’ve talked about affiliate launches before on this show.

    [00:29:49] April Beach: You’ve met others that have been in here. Um, I will say to you that personally, one of our strategies is a company that We have been leaning into for the last couple of years is having me teach and other business masterminds in that sort of, um, you know, way number one here is presenting other people’s groups.

    [00:30:08] April Beach: I’ve even taught a podcast on how to create a training program that’s aligned for your next step. here. If you want to go back and relisten to that, um, on how to teach a masterclass and other programs, the way Charles does it, you guys is it’s just so organic. I don’t want to use, I don’t want to use the word authentic because unfortunately I think that great year, that great word has been overused, but it’s very organic and it’s a good fit.

    [00:30:34] April Beach: So my summary for you here is, if you do have a higher ticket, Definitely make sure you’re connecting with Charles Moore. It’s charlesbyrd. com. And especially for those of you guys that hang out on Facebook, it sounds like he’s over there on Facebook and connect with him more, follow along. He’s, he’s very, very smart and, uh, in giving man and will lead you in the right direction.

     
     

    Plan Your Online Business Calendar for Profit and Purpose – with April Beach (Episode 267)

    Plan Your Online Business Calendar for Profit and Purpose
    Plan Your Online Business Calendar for Profit and Purpose

    <>

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Summary:
    There is certain steps that you can strategically follow to create a predictable online business. This is not pie in the sky in the strategies we talk about in this episode we’ve been applying to our own business and teaching others for almost 10 years.
    In the show you will learn the step-by-step process to lay out your entire calendar year for high profit deep impact and lifestyle freedom. Including the nitty-gritty of how to plan out your online offers, your launch campaigns, and those big business projects you have been wanting to work on but I’ve never found the time.
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    1. Know the order of operations in which to plan your yearly calendar
    2. Discover April beach is secret process that has predictably created up to six months of travel time with her family since 2011
    3. You will be able to immediately lay out your calendar and start applying this process to create more intention, and clear marketing campaigns in your online business. 
    Resources mentioned: 
    Guide
    Organize your assets and ideas into a Leading Offer – 

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    267

    [00:00:46] Hey. Hey, you guys. Welcome back to the show. You are listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast as our intro said, and I’m super glad that you’re here. I’m April Beach Show host. And I can’t wait to dive into today’s topic with you. This [00:01:00] is what you can expect from today’s show. At the end of this episode, you are gonna know exactly my process that I have used now for 12 years to lay out my entire calendar year for my online business that has freed me up to, in this past year, have six.

    [00:01:16] Months of travel time with my family and with my kids. You know, we always hear that there’s this pie in the sky or like design your life through entrepreneurship and these kind of fufu unicorn things out there we see on marketing all the time. But here in this show, and what I do is I give you the exact strategy to actually make it happen.

    [00:01:37] And there is some strategy, there are some building blocks that we’re gonna talk about in this show that if you do not have them in. You’re not gonna be able to do this. And so I’m gonna break down the processes in which we go through every single year. And actually I just took a group of clients to Florida for a week to lay out their whole entire business for the year to come.

    [00:01:55] And I’m gonna unpack this process here for you on this show today. At [00:02:00] the end of this episode, you are gonna know this process and you’re gonna know everything you have to have in place to be able to complete this process. And I’m gonna share with. a little bit more of my strategy, some personal behind the scene things, and what we do here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast as well in the process of laying out our year.

    [00:02:20] So all of the show notes can be found by going to sweet life co.com. This is episode number 267. So first of all, I wanna give you a bonus with this. I have created the ultimate Guide to online offers. Now, let me explain why this is not just some freebie you download. So I have successfully had multiple different online offers, everything from MRIs to retreats to courses, and all these different type of offers that you can do, and I’m sure you guys.

    [00:02:53] Often told, you know, from other people, launch a course or launch a membership. So many people love to insert their opinion [00:03:00] in what they think we should do. , have you experienced that also? Uh, but the reality is, is each one of those business offers is going to affect your life. So in order to be successful in what we’re talking about here on the show, you need to.

    [00:03:14] How offering certain programs in your business is going to affect your time and your work cadence, and your family, and even your profit. So to really apply what we’re gonna talk about on this show, go grab the Ultimate Guide to online offers, and you can get that by going to sweet life co.com. Click in on the podcast and you can just search.

    [00:03:36] This is episode number 267, or you can very simply text the word. To the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 and you can download it from there. Okay, so this show is for those of you guys that truly wanna make sure that the business you’re building is going to give you the time and life freedom that you’ve been looking [00:04:00] for.

    [00:04:00] Many of you may have very profitable businesses, may. Programs that you have been running a, a variety of offers in your suite, but your world is not functioning the way you want it to, maybe you feel a little bit trapped. So that’s why you’re here listening to this show. I’m gonna break down this step-by-step process that we use to lay out our entire calendar year with you.

    [00:04:25] You ready? Okay, here we go. So the first thing is that if you have a old school calendar in front of you, I’m, I’m 46, I’m a big advocate of old school things. If you have an old school calendar in front of you, bust it out, get it someplace down on a piece of paper, cuz I’m actually gonna take you through this step-by-step process.

    [00:04:45] And having an old school calendar is really, really helpful. Um, even with post-it notes where we can actually go. Move along our Post-It notes, um, based on what dates that you’re looking at. So step number one, the very first [00:05:00] thing that I do when I lay out my entire calendar. I do this towards the end of one year for the upcoming next year, but I don’t care when you’re listening to this show.

    [00:05:08] You can do this whenever you want. Is I block my time off. It’s the very first thing that I do. I block off my travel and my adventures and my time with my kids and my project time. So step number one is to look at your calendar, look at your personal life lifestyle calendar, and I want you to block off and fiercely protect your travel time.

    [00:05:31] This is very, very important. If you do not do it first, you’re never gonna get it. . Okay, so if you’re not really sure what that time is, I want you to go through and I want you to block off. Hey, I, I think I wanna take a trip sometime in August. Great. We are gonna block that off. Now here’s the thing about this, guys.

    [00:05:49] These things are non-negotiable. Are non-negotiable times off. This is how I approach this. My life always comes first. I learned how to design [00:06:00] businesses from my parents. If you’ve ever heard my story, we have a very long history of a family, of lifestyle entrepreneurs. What does that mean? It means we design our business around our lifestyle.

    [00:06:11] These are not hopeful things. We’re not gonna hope that you’re taking time off. You are going to take this time off. My time off when I block it out. Is absolutely end all, be all non-negotiable. And for me, like this past summer, I was back east with my youngest son at lacrosse recruiting. Years before that, I lived in Los Angeles with my middle son, who was a professional hip hop dancer.

    [00:06:34] Years before that, I traveled with my oldest son in lacrosse recruiting. So these were actually hard dates, so they actually helped me out because I can actually look at the calendar and say, Hey, listen, okay, we’re gonna be at these tournaments, these. And so it does help if you actually have solid dates regardless.

    [00:06:51] Step number one is you need to approach this in a way that is non-negotiable. Mark, off your time, that girl’s trip you wanted to [00:07:00] take, whatever that is, that gets blocked off on your calendar for the entire year First. And it’s like we’re gonna put those big rocks in your jar first. I know you guys have heard this, you know, analogy of, of filling up a jar with your year.

    [00:07:12] The biggest rocks go first. Those big rocks are not how we’re making money. They’re not our marketing, they’re your life. Step number one. Step number two, what you’re gonna do then is you are going to block off your business project time. Remember that book that you know that you really have been wanting to work on.

    [00:07:32] Maybe it’s a second or a third book you’re getting out there. Maybe you want to go on a speaking tour. Um, actually just got off a, a call with a client and she and her whole entire family are going on a month long speaking tour back east to promote her program. So exciting. , right? We have to plan for that.

    [00:07:48] We have to know that’s coming. So whatever project time, as far as work goes, that you need to block that off. That is the second thing you block off your calendar and here is what is gonna happen, [00:08:00] okay? After you’ve blocked off your family time, especially if you’re like me and then you’ve blocked off your project time.

    [00:08:06] There isn’t a lot of landscape like the geography is taken up. We’re looking at a calendar that doesn’t quite have a lot of space left to actually work. Praise the Lord . Okay, so what we do next is now we’re gonna take an inventory of your offers. If you know me, I’m an offer engineer. I help businesses build industry leading programs and offers at scale.

    [00:08:30] So the next thing and how it ties into. Episode bonus that I told you about of the guide of online offers is we need to take an inventory of your online offers, and you should know, number one, what is the most profitable offer that you have? Number one, what is your most profitable offer? Number two, what is the offer that’s most aligned with your life?

    [00:08:53] Basically, which one do you really wanna? , which one do you really wanna put your time into? Which one are you really fired up [00:09:00] about? What people do you really wanna work with? What is the one that like you would do it for free. You love it so much, even though, don’t worry, we are not doing that here. That is what I want you to do.

    [00:09:11] So we need to inventory your offers and you need to determine which ones you are going to sell for the year or the months to come, however long you’re planning this. Okay? Based on number one, which one is going to make enough money? for you to then take that other time off. And number two, which ones do you actually love to do?

    [00:09:32] Now, we’re not getting into this in this episode, but this is all the answers to these questions align around how you’re engineering your offers and the model and the delivery of it. And then the third thing you’re gonna do is you are literally going to plot out on your calendar your sales and promotion dates for your most profitable offer first.

    [00:09:54] Okay? That’s rule number one. Many of you guys have a variety of offers, but [00:10:00] we’re gonna plot out the most profitable one first. Nuro Uno, okay? And you’re gonna plot on your calendar, even if you sell it all year long. We still need to treat that offer as if we were having kind of a launch campaign around it.

    [00:10:18] So even things that are available all the time, anybody can join into them. We still need to plot on your calendar when the promotional times around that particular offer are going to. . So you’re going to now block off the calendar those promotional times. Now, if you’re like me, we don’t really have any promo times in June and July.

    [00:10:37] You know, like I said, I’m back east on a lacrosse field right now. So because of that, we have to make sure that we plot out our promotional times for people to come work with us other months out of the year. So what does that look like for you? Block off those promotional periods for your primary offer First.

    [00:10:56] The next step is to block off your promotional [00:11:00] periods for your secondary offers. So what other offers or programs? Maybe you have like mini master classes, maybe you have, uh, a retreat that you may do once a year or a couple times in a year that fill in around that primary offer, that primary program that you were.

    [00:11:20] And then the next step is you are going to block out the sales campaigns at times around each. So I know we’re sitting here if you’re watching this on YouTube or if you’re watching the video version of it. Awesome. I’m very handy. I use a lot of my hands in the air, but what I’m saying to you here is step number one, let’s.

    [00:11:40] You’re going to block off your personal travel time. Step number two, your business project time. Step number three, your primary offer. Step number four, your secondary offers, and then you’re gonna fill up the sales and marketing campaign times around them. What do I mean by that? I mean, are you having a a three week launch campaign?

    [00:11:58] Do we need to have [00:12:00] webinars? Do we need to build other things around that that are going to require your. And this is an overview of my yearly planning system. I promise you, when you go in this order and when you answer these questions for yourself, again, personal time off business, project time, primary offers, secondary offers, and then the sales campaigns around them.

    [00:12:22] Honestly, number one, you’re probably not gonna have that much time to sell. You know, we always talk about the fact that we probably don’t make enough offers, just hear. We talk often that if a business is having trouble selling something, it’s probably cuz they aren’t offering their services enough, they aren’t making enough offers.

    [00:12:41] And we see that extreme that we aren’t making enough offers. But then the other side of that is that, There’s some people selling stuff all the time. Nobody wants to buy your shit all the time. Mine either, , okay. Nobody wants that, right? So when [00:13:00] we lay out in the calendar of when we have these promotional times where somebody can pay you all the money for the amazing service that you deliver.

    [00:13:09] The other times, what it does usually when you’re traveling is that gives us that time to build relationships with your audience. And so when we look at this calendar, we’re actually gonna see that there’s probably a lot of consolidated sales times and a lot of consolidated relationship building times.

    [00:13:28] And that is amazing. If you’re looking at your calendar and you’re thinking, I don’t have enough time to, to sell things, I’m traveling all the time, and whatever that. No problem. Download that online Guide to the Guide, the Ultimate Guide to online offers, and you can create your own custom programming of offers, what I call your own offer ecosystem to actually fill that up.

    [00:13:53] You don’t have to have one primary offer that you sell all the time and, and then a secondary and a third. [00:14:00] You can engineer your ecosystem of offers according to what you need for your business and your life, as long as, here’s the rule, as long as that offer is guaranteed to be engineered, to deliver your client’s predictable, transformational, measurable results.

    [00:14:16] If you’re not sure about that, then we need to talk about that as. So let me recap the steps here. Number one, in order to lay out your entire year, your entire online business calendar for lifestyle first to actually get that. We have to block off the times that you’re taking personally and professionally off.

    [00:14:36] Then what it’s gonna do is going to give, give us a very sobering look at the months we are selling and the benchmarks we need to hit financially for you, and make sure that you have the right offers that are built and being delivered at the other times throughout the year to actually make sure that the whole entire year is covered.

    [00:14:55] That’s what we need to do, and that is this process. And then we drill down even deeper [00:15:00] into your content marketing calendar, and we plot out all of your marketing campaigns, all of your content marketing communications around, guess what? Your life and your business and your profit and your offers first.

    [00:15:16] And I promise you, when you do it in this order like me, you will get actually more and more time off. Now here, here’s the real truth. The first time I did this, It was really messy. It was back in 2012 and my kids were younger and, um, actually I was planning time off in my offers because my kids, when they were young had a lot of medical needs.

    [00:15:38] It wasn’t like I was taken off to Hawaii all the time. Um, and some, and most people actually don’t even know. That’s how I learned to engineer online business. Was because of my kids’ medical needs at first, and they’re totally healed and they’re awesome and praise God for that. But when you have these things that are non-negotiables in your life, believe me, you will build your business in the profit around [00:16:00] it.

    [00:16:01] So whether, whatever it is, hopefully your kids are super healthy or whatever that is, you’re designing your, your next generation business for, you know, over 50 or whatever this is for you, you, as long as you see it this time off, this way of engineering your business as a non-negotiable. It’s not flexible.

    [00:16:22] We can’t hopefully take this time off. As long as you see this as a non-negotiable, your time off and the offers you need to sell, and when you need to sell them, I promise you, you’ll nail it. It’s when we give ourself space to question whether or not we can do it, that we fail. If you in your mind know that the process of engineering, your offers around your profit and your life are in non-negotiable, I promise you, you will nail it,

    [00:16:55] But like I said, the first time I did it, I really didn’t even nail it. I got like three weeks off a [00:17:00] year, and then the next year we got more and more and more. So it has taken me a long time to do this practice. For now over a decade to get more and more time off each year. Each time you do this, you’re gonna get better at it.

    [00:17:12] But this process is the number one way. I own multiple companies and now have complete LA lifestyle and location and travel freedom with my family, and I want you to have that same thing. Even if you have a brick and mortar, there’s nothing more powerful than being able to just jump on a plane because you want.

    [00:17:33] and or because something cool is happening that you wanna attend or you wanna support a friend. It’s an amazing thing and this is how you do it. Okay, so to recap, in this episode, we talked about how to plan your entire online business calendar for profit and purpose, whatever that profit and purpose is for.

    [00:17:53] Awesome. I have given you a tool that you can download again. You can text the word [00:18:00] guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. You can download my, I think it’s now, it’s like 30 pages, ultimate guide. It breaks down every single online business offer from courses tos, even to podcasting as a business model.

    [00:18:13] To masterminds and retreats and hybrid program design to licensing and certification programs. And I’m gonna break down for you the type of model, and I’m gonna tell you exactly how that model will affect your life. Make sure you grab that, or you can very simply just go to sweetlifeco.com, click on the podcast.

    [00:18:31] This is episode number 267, and there will be a link for you to download and grab that guide and the show notes are in here as well, so that you can revisit what we talked about on today’s. I hope you found that super helpful. I promise you, if you follow these order op of operations and these steps, then you will in fact no longer have a pie in the sky.

    [00:18:53] I hope my business is designed for lifestyle freedom, uh, hope and a dream instead. It is a [00:19:00] strategy and it is a proven strategy that you can bank on, and I can’t wait to hear how it goes if we’re not connected. Please follow me on LinkedIn and over on Instagram so that I can hear about how you are doing in your process of designing your life for high profit, deep impact, lifestyle, lifestyle freedom. Thanks so much for listening to the show and I will talk to you guys next week.

    Next Gen. Kick Off: Preview of New Shows, Guests, and More! – with April Beach (Episode 266)

    Next Gen. Kick Off: Preview of New Shows, Guests, and More!

     

     

    Who is this episode for?
    This quick trailer is for our amazing listeners and those to come! Thank you! 
     
     
    Summary:
    The SweetLife™ Entrepreneur Podcast is back and delivering proven business trainings for coaches, consultants, experts, authors and speakers who are ready to scale their business online. We’re committed to another 5 years of helping you create leading online offers, programs, courses and services that scale your business past a million. Including how to license your content, courses or trainings, how to build certification programs and how to market, gain PR and become known as the leader in your space. 
     
    Get a unique and unfiltered view behind the scenes with online business leader, April Beach and her trusted leading friends, to build your business for high profit, deep impact, lifestyle freedom. 

    Resources Mentioned:

    Resubscribe on Apple

    Link to Apple Podcast

    Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models 
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    266

    [00:00:45] Hey you guys, we are back. Welcome back to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. Year six. I absolutely cannot believe it. Uh, first of all, thank you so much to our amazing listeners who have been sending me messages for the last year [00:01:00] where I took a little bit of a break. And if you are a listener to this show, you know, I share with you all behind the scenes.

    [00:01:06] So I’m gonna catch you up on what’s been happening and I am gonna let you know. All the amazing things that we have in store for you coming in the next year for the next five years of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. But step number one, if you have not subscribed to this show, please click the subscribe button wherever you are listening.

    [00:01:26] If you have been a previous subscriber, you’re gonna have to resubscribe because Apple loves to boot us out of shows we haven’t listened to in a bit. And so that would be really appreciated, um, to make sure that you’re also not missing out on all of the things that we have. If you and I do not know each other yet, I’m April Beach.

    [00:01:43] I have been the host here on this show for five years I’ve been coaching businesses. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs and mentoring businesses online for lifestyle entrepreneurship for high profit and deep impact and deep purpose for a total of 26 years, you guys . [00:02:00] It’s been a really, really long time.

    [00:02:01] With an expertise in online business scaling for the last 17. So you are truly in the right place if you are looking for trusted strategies that you can apply to your business. I’m an online business architect and I’m an offer engineer, so what that means is I help coaches and consultants and authors and speakers scale their business online by creating million dollar programs.

    [00:02:24] Courses, trainings, as well as licensed package programs and certification programs for high profit, deep impact lifestyle freedom. So let’s talk a little bit about that. And first of all, I just wanna say thank you guys so much. As you know, I took a little bit of a break after having Covid in the beginning of this past year, and it had a little break.

    [00:02:45] Turned out to be, uh, a year. So let’s get very real for a minute. I was, Totally burned out on being here every single week. I can be real honest with you guys. And so the first [00:03:00] thing that I want you to do is think about things in your business that used to just totally light you up. And you may be doing them and you may be feeling a little bit burned out on them.

    [00:03:08] And I want you to think about what that could be in your business. And I want you to clean house a little bit, just like I. Because when we set out to do things that fire us up in the beginning and it feels like a job at the end, then that gives us pause to stop it and just decide maybe we need to take a little bit of a break.

    [00:03:27] So my little break turned into a long break, which was a beautiful time, as you guys know, because I share a lot of behind the scenes. I travel five to six months a year with my kids. I did that again this year. My kids are. You guys are not even gonna believe it, especially those of you who’ve been listening to this show forever.

    [00:03:43] They are 20, 18 and 16 now, so time does fly and uh, it was just really a beautiful opportunity for me to reset and think about what this show actually means to the online business space, what it means to me as a leader in a mentor and a teacher, [00:04:00] but most importantly, what this show is delivering to you and why.

    [00:04:05] We want to keep producing this show. I, uh, always say nobody needs more content. They need a transformation. And so before I dove back into committing to do the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, I really needed some time and space to find what I felt like I wanted to bring to the table for you guys this year as well as, and the years to come, as well as the things that I felt were important.

    [00:04:34] For you. And so let’s go back and do a little bit of a history for those of you who’ve been listening to the show for a while. In the beginning we started out and every single thing was get your business online, building your first funnels, launching courses, I mean, just amazing online business foundations.

    [00:04:53] and that was way back in 2017, right? So in the beginning we started talking about those things, but now your [00:05:00] businesses have grown. So for the next generation of the Sweet Life Podcast, we are gonna be focusing on scaling companies online, scaling entrepreneurs, those of you guys that. Are not only hitting consistent con 10 K months, but we’re actually working on building programs where we can license them to other companies and other businesses for hundreds of thousands of dollars.

    [00:05:21] And having an ecosystem of offers that surpasses seven figures in your business. So for you, the next generation of the show is gonna be completely dedicated to scaling companies online. If you are here and you’re still in that launch phase. Please go back and utilize and listen, the 250 episodes that we dropped in this show for the last five years that are all about leveling you up to get you to this place.

    [00:05:49] Because those are amazing and they’re powerful, they’re trusted, and they’re proven, and they are for you to eat up and utilize. And for those of you guys who are scaling your business, I’m so excited to move forward with you [00:06:00] into the next generation of the show and continue to help you level up your.

    [00:06:05] And your decision making, creating a business that truly leads to the life that you want while you’re making the impact. And of course, extracting your genius to create results for other people. So this is a little preview for you of what’s to come. First of all, everything, all of the show notes, all the amazing tools we give here on this.

    [00:06:26] Can still be found by visiting sweet life co.com and simply click on the podcast. Previous listeners, you guys know that with some of the shows, we actually drop totally free masterclass with certain episodes when you opt into them that week. We have given away thousand dollars masterclass to our listeners that subscribe when they opt in the week of that show.

    [00:06:50] So we’re really known. Dropping information for you to actually implement the things we’re talking about each week. So make sure that you’ve subscribed and make sure that you click over [00:07:00] to sweetlifeco.com for all the show notes, all the places to opt in, and of course, getting text messages, updates as well.

    [00:07:07] So let me give you a little sneak peek into what’s to come. As I thought about. How best to support you. I wanted to make sure that we’re consolidating our work here together on this show. So we are going to continue to deliver high value, but shorter time episodes. That’s the first change you’re gonna see here on the show.

    [00:07:29] The second is that we are grouping together our shows into series. So if you’re working on something in particular or you have an objective, I have already laid out the entire. Content show plan for the entire year, you guys, and I wanna give you a sneak peek of what’s to come for the first episodes.

    [00:07:48] After these new ones drop, we are leading into completely helping you become known. We’re talking about becoming known with your method and your frameworks and your value positions. Pitching, [00:08:00] pr, pitching, large scale media to help you become known. Podcast guesting stages and speaking local events. We’re even talking about how to network in your local area to become known after becoming known.

    [00:08:14] Then we are diving into million dollar offers, and I have a whole entire series plan for you on how to build a million dollar business with an ecosystem of offers that works for you, including how to do the math and make sure that you are assessing the profitable offers that you actually want to do versus what people out there are just saying, you know, you hear all the time, like lunch of course, or do a membership.

    [00:08:39] That doesn’t work for everybody, right? So we’re gonna be diving back into business models online offers in the series we actually did, going even deeper, right before I took a pause in this show, all about million dollar offers. It’s an entire million dollar offer and million dollar business model series, including masterminds, retreats, hybrid programs, content licensing, [00:09:00] certification programs, signature offer engineering, even low ticket offers, and so much more.

    [00:09:06] that is going to bring us through weeks and weeks of value that you’re gonna immediately be able to take into your business and apply. And I can’t wait for you to do it. So I promise to be quick. So I’m gonna be quick. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, this is just a hello and I missed you.

    [00:09:23] and message from me letting you know, first of all, thank you for giving me the time and the space that I needed to really assess this show and what, what it meant to me so that it could mean a lot to you. And I just appreciate you guys more than you know I missed you , and uh, that is, it’s been a real pleasure being able to take time off and have that space.

    [00:09:46] But I am super stoked to be back. You here. We have a new intro for you and, uh, this. New Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast should bring another level of energy and profit to your business. [00:10:00] That is my commitment to you, and thank you so much for being here. I’ll see you in the next episode.

     
     

    The Ultimate Guide To Design Your Perfect Coaching Business – with April Beach (Episode 265)

    The Ultimate Guide To Design Your Perfect Coaching Business
    The Ultimate Guide To Design Your Perfect Coaching Business

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for? 

    Phases 2-4

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to level up and stop copying others. Listeners who tap into this show want to get the formula to choose the perfect online business offers, courses, masterminds or coaching programs that give them the life they want. 

    Summary: 

    This episode kicks off a series called  “The Ultimate Guide To Your Perfect Business Model; For Experts, Coaches and Consultants”. In these shows we unpack the process of intentional business design, offer engineering, and business architecture to build a business for high-profit, deep impact, lifestyle results. 
    In this kick off to the series we discuss what business modeling is, who needs to go through this process and why this process is the fastest way to get the life and business you’re working hard for. You’ll also get April’s 7 Questions That Lead To Your Perfect Business Model and Offer Types. 

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Know how to use the power of business modeling to get what you want
    2. Access April’s 7 Questions That Lead To Your Perfect Business Model and Offer Types
    3. Understand where in your business you may need to make changes and alter your offer model

    Resources Mentioned:

    Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models 

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    265

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our best of episodes. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes with the most downloads with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen, this episode you did was really powerful for me. Thank you so much. 

    [00:00:30] And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers and authors. And so this episode is absolutely amazing, though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com.

    [00:00:54] You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes [00:01:00] in there, for you with up to date links, making sure that you’re getting to the right place. If you’re looking for a resource. Now special message to those of you guys that have been waiting for this show to come back.

    [00:01:15] I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s as we roll into the new year, going from 20 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about, but after five years of faithfully dropping a business training or recording, a strategy for you every single week and winning awards for this show, I needed to step back and take a break. And you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. 

    [00:01:51] What turned out to be one month off, turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we have [00:02:00] been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, that entrepreneurs have relied on. I needed to take a step back and get a perspective of what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show. 

    [00:02:15] How should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you are growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like?

    [00:02:27] So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the Sweet Life Podcast for you, and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off. But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. 

    [00:02:50] You guys are amazing and you have really been the fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. It’s gonna sound a little bit [00:03:00] different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come for true proven business trainings that are transformational for your company. That is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air from experts, delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular. Over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you.

    [00:03:25] I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned. The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known and the Experts, so we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings, without a hook to sell you something. They’re just coming in here to pour into you, are absolutely epic. I can’t wait. 

    [00:03:42] So if you haven’t yet subscribe to the show, please click subscribe. Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus. And I just love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and [00:04:00] the episode’s coming for you. And in the meantime, enjoy this best of it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason. I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mentor and entrepreneur activator, April Beach.

    [00:04:32] Hi guys. I’m so excited to talk to you today. This is one of my favorite topics, actually. We’re gonna be moving into my favorite topic for the next couple of weeks on the show. We are kicking off a series here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast that is all geared towards helping you make sure that you are designing your offers and your business structure and your business model correctly in a way that works for you.

    [00:04:57] And this is such an important time to do it. It’s the [00:05:00] end of the year. We’re about to roll over into 2022, and so I wanna make sure that you’re fully equipped. To see the business model, the offer structure, and the business design that’s going to equal that lifestyle and the profit that you want moving forward.

    [00:05:13] And so the next couple of shows are totally dedicated to helping you tap into the ultimate guide, the ultimate database for you to design your perfect business model. And so that’s what we’re talking about, kicking off today’s show. This is episode number 250 here on the podcast. And I’m April Beach host of this show.

    [00:05:36] Thank you so much for being a listener to us. We’re gonna be rolling on five years of producing here in just a couple of months, and I just appreciate you guys so much. So first of all, I just wanted to tell you how much I appreciate all of your listenership over the last four and a half years to this show, sharing this show with your friends.

    [00:05:53] We don’t have any advertising here intentionally. On the Sweet Life Podcast. I hate listening to podcasts and [00:06:00] they’re like, hang on just a second. Let me share somebody else’s unrelated message so I can make more money. Totally drives me crazy. Um, and so we intentionally have refused advertisers here on this show, and we’ll continue to do that because our goal is giving you business trainings and coaching that you can take to the bank.

    [00:06:19] And we would really appreciate if you’d share this show with your friends. And if you have never done so before, if you could just please leave us a review on Apple Podcast or wherever you listen to podcasts, that would just really mean a lot to us. So thank you so much for tuning in. I’m April Beach, as I said here at the, the host of this show and founder of the SweetLife Company.

    [00:06:40] And everything we do as a company is working with entrepreneurs like you to design your business, your suite of offers, your customer journey roadmap, your leading offers in your programs to deliver high profit deep impact lifestyle freedom. So if you would like to work with us to apply to join our business growth programs, please cruise over to [00:07:00] sweetlifeco.com, and I would love to personally meet with you. Okay. 

    [00:07:04] Back to today’s show. Here is what you can expect. Again, this is episode number 250, and there is a very important tool that goes along with this episode in the next couple of episodes. That tool is an 18 page, totally free 18 page ultimate guide to online business models. And so before we get started, you can grab that guide in two different very easy ways.

    [00:07:28] First of all, you can go to. SweetLifeco.com. Click on the podcast and go to this episode. It’s right there. Number 250, and there will be a link for you to download the Ultimate Guide, totally free. Grab that or if you’re on the go, you can text the word guide. Very simple, just lowercase the word guide and you wanna text it to this number.

    [00:07:51] That number is 8 0 5 2 4 5 0 8 8 0. So just text the word [00:08:00] guide to that number and I’ll send you a link so you can go download it there. Okay. This is gonna be an important tool moving forward because the ultimate guide summarizes all of the business models, the most common business models for coaches and consultants and experts and service based businesses in the online space.

    [00:08:18] And why this is so important is I’m literally saving you 20 years of time by giving you this guide. I have ran a business model in every single one of these most common ways, and so I break down in this guide the structure of that business model, everything from courses to masterminds, to live events, to membership communities, to group coaching programs.

    [00:08:40] I break it all down for you, but then I also tell you exactly how it’s gonna affect your life. because it’s all fine and good and dandy, right, when we see it, you know, structurally on paper. But in the end of the day, I’m a lifestyle business designer, and you went into entrepreneurship to change your life. So let’s make sure that the business model you’re choosing is in fact gonna [00:09:00] equal that lifestyle that you want.

    [00:09:02] So I literally drop in 20 years of online business experience. To you in this one ultimate guide so you can see the structure of the business model and I’ll tell you exactly what it’s gonna look like for your life. Here on the next couple of shows, we’re gonna be really diving in more to specific business models and having a conversation about them in depth.

    [00:09:21] So again, go grab that ultimate guide. It’s totally there for you and hitting you, not it will save you decades of time. That’s why I created it. Okay, so in this episode, this is what you can expect. This is a great show for those of you guys who wanna level up and stop copying what others are doing. 

    [00:09:37] Maybe you’ve joined a lot of programs. You have somebody said, oh, you should launch a course. Or, oh, you should host a membership community and it’s not really worked out for you. Or you have thought about doing those things, but you’re not exactly sure whether or not that’s gonna be the right solution for your business. So when you tap into this show, You are gonna get this formula specifically here on this one episode for [00:10:00] how to choose a perfect online business, offers courses and masterminds, and I actually give you my seven questions to ask yourself that lead to your perfect business model and offer types.

    [00:10:12] So I’m gonna tell you those seven questions to ask yourself as well, to get even more clarity, and I’m gonna dive into some of the actual workshopping that we do inside the Ultimate Guide. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive in together.

    [00:10:33] Okay guys. So here we go. Episode number 250. This episode kicks off a series called The Ultimate Guide to your Perfect Business Model for coaches, experts, and consultants. And these next couple shows unpack the process of intentional business design. Offer engineering and business architecture to build a business for high profit, deep impact lifestyle results.

    [00:10:55] And so let’s go ahead and kick off this series together and let’s start with just the [00:11:00] basics. Okay. So the first question we’re gonna talk about and answer is, what is a business model? I was just speaking and teaching at a retreat in Costa Rica last week, and I was teaching on business model. Business design, and I asked the women in the room, you know, who can explain to me what a business model is?

    [00:11:18] And nobody could answer that question. And so if you’re sitting here and you’re listening and you’re thinking, oh gosh, I don’t really know what a business model is, you’re not alone. Right. So let’s kind of start at the basics, and it’s actually not as overwhelming and complicated as it may seem. So the term business model refers to your plan for making a profit by the types of products and services that you sell. Also known as your business model is the way that you serve your clients and make money. 

    [00:11:48] So examples of common business models for coaches and consultants and service based providers and experts are coaching one on one, group coaching, [00:12:00] online courses, membership communities, masterminds, retreats, live virtual events, and more.

    [00:12:08] Those are types of business models. So as we dive in, especially over the next couple of weeks when I’m talking about, Hey, how to find your perfect business model, what I’m really saying is, should you launch a course? Should you launch a membership community? Should you have a mastermind? Should you be doing live virtual events? Should you have a retreat? Those are all the questions that I would love for you to have more information to answer for yourself, and that’s why we’re doing this series. So if that sounds good, let’s keep going. 

    [00:12:36] So the next topic that I wanna talk about regarding business modeling is the power and the importance, and the depth of how your business model affects your life. And if you know me, this is not a surprise. If you don’t know me, let me make it really, really clear. I am a life first business designer. That means that for my own companies, and for [00:13:00] people that I work with, the very, very most important thing is like saying, Hey, listen. 

    [00:13:04] This is all great to make money, but money doesn’t necessarily buy happiness, so let’s make sure the business we’re engineering is in fact gonna give you that lifestyle that you want. And that’s my superpower. That’s my area of expertise. I want you to know that your business model is a primary driver to the life you wanna have. But the reality is, you guys, very few entrepreneurs are actually aware of that. They just think, I’m gonna be happy when I, when I launch a course and sell a thousand seats, or I’m gonna be happy when I have a successful mentorship program. That’s not it at all. The way to happiness is business model design. Then we reverse engineer it into high sales. But it really starts with picking the right business model. If you do not have the right business model for your life, you are not gonna find that happiness that you hoped to find in entrepreneurship.

    [00:13:55] And this is for you if you’re brand new in business. But I’ll be honest, the majority of clients I [00:14:00] work with have been in business for years and years, and they’re ready to scale their business and they really wanna intentionally make sure the programs they’re building in the future. Are done really well and mindfully and are gonna give them the results they want.

    [00:14:11] So whether you’re new or you’ve been doing this for 10 years, this is something that I wanna make sure that you’re aware of the power and the importance of this. Your business model directs the cadence of your year, your quarter, your month, your week, and your day. So your business model is going to determine how you flow through your year and your quarter, and your week and your day, and your months and your time, and all the things it drives, what you do, who you do it for, and how you do it.

    [00:14:43] And so let’s make sure you really, really love those things. And then it also drives your time and your schedule and the expectations that others have of. Those are all the things that your business model does. And so it’s incredibly important that we’re picking the right one for [00:15:00] you. So designing that perfect business model is our superpower, and that’s why I’m gonna geek out on this over the next couple of weeks because it’s pretty much the primary gem and jewel that we start working with clients on when they come into our business growth and mentorship programs.

    [00:15:16] And so I wanna make sure that you are tapping into this as. Okay. And then the next question that we need to answer is, what business models are available to you? The most common business models for coaches, consultants, mentors, experts, especially over the last 17 years, are online and virtual coaching and consulting, whether that’s one on one or one on group.

    [00:15:40] We also have online courses. And those courses are either evergreen, which means they’re available at any point in time. They’re prerecorded or they can be taught live. We also have memberships and communities masterminds, low ticket item grabs, and that business model we’re gonna dive into. And I’m [00:16:00] really excited to unpack that business model where everything is just like a, a smaller mini offer and a mini price.

    [00:16:06] And then of course, our also live virtual events and in-person retreats or in-person. Product based business models, which we are not. Just so you know, really clear up front, we are not diving into product based business models because this podcast is strictly designed for service based entrepreneurs, coaches, consultants, and experts.

    [00:16:25] But we are gonna be talking a little bit about products within the business models. And so those are the most common online business models and they are constantly evolving and as they evolve, one of the things that’s happened over the last couple of years is the business models we’re now designing with our clients are hybrid offers.

    [00:16:44] Starting in around 2016, we started designing what’s called hybrid models, so it’s a combination of some of these primary models that we talked about, and we’re also gonna be talking about hybrid offers and really how to engineer the perfect hybrid offer [00:17:00] here on the show in the series as. So those, those are the business models that are most common.

    [00:17:05] Now. There are so many cool outside of the boxings that are happening, and as things like virtual reality come into play and different technologies, these are gonna continue to grow. But here on the show, we’re gonna start with the core business models for online coaches, consultants, and service base providers.

    [00:17:21] So you can consider those and how they would scale with your business. And so the next question is really to ask yourself what’s happening right now in your sapce. You are an expert in your field or you’re becoming an expert in your field. And so what is available? What are people commonly buying or what are, how are the ways services are being delivered in your field right now?

    [00:17:43] And so first of all, I want you just to take a second and do like a mental inventory of how other people are buying your type of services currently in your area of experise and whether or not they have, or maybe they don’t have [00:18:00] a type of business model that you might want to create for yourself. Just because it doesn’t exist doesn’t mean that you can’t create it.

    [00:18:06] So I wanna encourage you in that. So what business models are available to you truly depends on, first of all, the content that you’re delivering. So your content is going to dictate your business model. That’s rule number one. And that’s also the number one mistake of not doing that that coaches and consultants make, is not letting the content drive the model, what you’re doing, what you’re teaching is gonna dictate the best way to deliver that to people.

    [00:18:33] So the formula, and this is the formula I teach and it’s so fun to teach it. The formula is connecting the way you want your lifestyle to function and your area of expertise in your content, and that’s gonna give us your perfect business model. And so let’s go ahead and move forward a little bit. How is it then that we take this business model and really start designing it for you?

    [00:18:57] So your business model. [00:19:00] Can be one way for one product or service that you offer, and you can have a suite of offers in your business, so a collection of services and programs in your business, and each of them can have totally a different business model. You don’t have to just have one. So we’re talking about business modeling and we’re relating this to one program or one offer, one leading offer, which I love to teach on, as you guys know, leading offers and leading program.

    [00:19:29] Or you can have one business model for all of your offers. And if your offers or your coaching programs take people through a long term journey of progression in working with you, you can have one business model that’s actually broken up into different phases of growth that people would continue to grow with you.

    [00:19:51] That’s how our programs work. And that’s some of the ways that we’ve been engineering our programs for and with our clients. And it’s really powerful because when [00:20:00] we’re doing that, we’re creating a long term roadmap and a client journey that keeps clients with you for years and years and years. So we have a ton of clients that have worked with us for over 10 years.

    [00:20:11] The reason why is cuz we’re constantly developing a different step to keep them growing more and more and more. And you can have one business model that is all of the steps in a long term journey. Or we can just talk about one business model for one offer of yours. So I wanna make sure I’m sharing that distinction for you.

    [00:20:29] If you’re thinking, wow, is this business model just for one program or one coaching program or one offer, or is it for everything? You choose? It can be either. So here are some questions and I want you to break down these questions and I want you to think about them. And this is how we’re gonna end this week’s episode.

    [00:20:45] Just processing these. These questions are also put in a worksheet for you in the ultimate Guide to business model, so make sure you download that, but I’m gonna share them with you so your brain can start processing them right now as we wrap up this week’s show. So I want [00:21:00] you to answer these questions as if it were five years from now.

    [00:21:03] If you can’t figure out five years from now, go to. If you can’t figure out three years from now, I want you to go to the next 18 months, okay? But start out as far as you can, and I want you to imagine yourself there. And if you’re building a business with intention for time freedom, geographic freedom and freedom to scale your services in a way that’s really gonna make you happy, these are important questions to ask yourself.

    [00:21:27] Question number one, how many hours per week do I like to? So again, try to focus five years from now, maybe three. You have to come in close enough. Then you can do 18 months. How many hours per week do you really like to work? How many do you want to be working in the future? How do you really love to serve your clients?

    [00:21:49] So I want you to ask yourself, how do I really love to serve my clients? Do you like meeting with them one on one? Do you like coaching in groups? What really fires you? [00:22:00] How do others love working with me? So do you have a team working with you in the future or is it only a solo gig? That’s question number three.

    [00:22:12] Question number four, do you move and travel or do you stay in one place? Again, this is in the future. Question number five, do you work at home or do you work in an office? What does that really look like to you? Lesson number 6. What are you really good at? We need to ask yourself, what am I really, really good at?

    [00:22:32] And what content are you delivering in your leading program or your leading offer? And then of course you need to ask yourself, what does my perfect client actually really need from me? So how do they need me to work with them? How do they need me to show up for them? 

    [00:22:50] And those are seven key question. Of starting the process of business model design, and there is an eighth question in there that is the most qu, most important question of all, [00:23:00] and that question is in the worksheet for you. So make sure you go ahead and download that. Now, like I talked about, over the next couple weeks, we’re gonna be diving into this entire series all about business modeling, all about business architecture and design.

    [00:23:15] I love this. We have done a ton of shows on this over the last five years because this is my area of expertise, but I’m super excited to do them in a series for you so you can go through and follow with me and process them as we go. And each episode’s gonna focus on one business model type, and I’m gonna give you the pros and the cons of that business model type.

    [00:23:35] And I’m gonna tell you the lifestyle result of that particular business model and whether help you figure out whether or not you’re, you would love that. So my goal is to save you literally at least five years of time launching the wrong kind of offer in this show. And you’re gonna be able to go through and choose which one’s gonna be right for you, so you can stop copying what others are doing, and truly design a business that’s gonna give you the profit and the life that you want.

    [00:23:58] And the reality is this, though. [00:24:00] Your business is totally gonna change just as you change. So by fully considering your long-term business model, revisiting it and revising it as needed for your life, and as your life changes and taking control of the circumstances by pre-planning and building services that can scale, you’ll always have a business that’s built around your life, not your life around your business.

    [00:24:25] And of course, because you know me, I’m always on a plane. I love to travel. If you’re like me or if you want to be like me, if you’re building a business with the, with the intention of time freedom, geographic freedom and freedom to scale your services in a way that makes you happy, then these are the episodes to make sure you’re tuning into.

    [00:24:42] And frankly, that’s what our business growth programs are designed for. So if you’d love to work with us, then you are more than welcome to apply. You can cruise over to SweetLifeco.Com and you can check out our Wavemaker program, our offer engineer masterclass, and our business launch programs as [00:25:00] well.

    [00:25:00] We would love to hear from you and connect with you. Really work through the process as to whether or not working with us is the right fit. And of course, you have these podcast episodes to eat up and take to the bank. Thank you so much for tuning in with us this week. This is Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast, episode number 250, and all the show notes. Can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com. Simply click on podcast and that is also where you can download the ultimate Guide to Business Models. And last thing, again, if you want to get it by text, just simply text the word guide to the number 8 0 5. 2, 5, 4, 0, 8, 8 0. Okay, that’s it for today. Have an awesome week, and I will talk to you soon.

    Using White Board Sessions To Increase Sales – with April Beach (Episode 264)

    Using White Board Sessions To Increase Sales
    Using White Board Sessions To Increase Sales

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs in launch, scale and amplify phases. 

    Summary: 

    Whiteboard sessions are a great conversion tool to convert leads to buyers. If you’re a coach, consultant or niche skill provider, you’re always looking for great ways to deepen your relationships with your followers and position yourself as the ideal solution. In this show I unpack how to use “whiteboard” sessions to further connect with your audience and increase sales. This show details the exact steps to fill and deliver your next white board session. 

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Have the exact process to fill and deliver whiteboard client conversion sessions
    2. Know how to plan your next whiteboard session into your launch

    Resources Mentioned:

    Organize your assets and ideas into a Leading Offer – 

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    264

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our best of episodes. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes with the most downloads with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen, this episode you did was really powerful for me. Thank you so much. And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into, for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers, and authors. 

    [00:00:43] And so this episode is absolutely amazing, though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com. You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes [00:01:00] in there for you, with up to date links, making sure that you’re getting to the right place if you’re looking for a resource. 

    [00:01:08] Now special message to those of you guys that have been waiting for this show to come back. I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s. As we roll into the new year, going from 22 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. 

    [00:01:30] If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about, but after five years of faithfully dropping a business training, a recording a strategy for you every single week in winning awards for this show. I needed to step back and take a break, and you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. So what turned out to be one month off turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we [00:02:00] have been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, that entrepreneurs have relied on. I needed to take a step. And get a perspective of what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show. 

    [00:02:15] How should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you’re growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like? So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the Sweet Life Podcast for you, and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. 

    [00:02:37] So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off. But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. You guys are amazing and you have really been the fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. 

    [00:02:58] It’s gonna sound a little bit [00:03:00] different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come to for true proven business trainings that are transformational for your company. That is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air from experts delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you.

    [00:03:25] I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned. The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known and the Experts, so we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings without a hook to sell you something. They’re just coming in here to pour into you, are absolutely epic. I can’t wait. 

    [00:03:42] So if you haven’t yet subscribe to the show, please click subscribe. Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus. And I just love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and the [00:04:00] episode’s coming for you. And in the meantime, enjoy this best of it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason. I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to The Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business, and launch a life you love faster with business mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach.

    [00:04:31] Hey, you guys, on this week’s show, we are talking about a very cool conversion tool, in order to turn those people on your list to buyers that fervently follow every single thing that you do. This is episode number 244 at the SweetLife Entrepreneur and Business Podcast, which means that all of the show notes can be found by visiting our website. Which is sweetlifeco.com. Simply clicking on the podcast, and this is episode number [00:05:00] 244. I’m April Beach, the host here at the show, and we are known for delivering proven business trainings that you can absolutely bank on. That other coaches will charge you thousands for you. Get them all here free. Advertisement free on this show because this podcast is an extension of the outreach that we do as a company. So welcome to the show. If you’re a new listener, I’m super glad to be connected with you. 

    [00:05:25] So this is what you can expect from today’s episode. First of all, this episode is great for businesses in phases two, three, or four of my business growth roadmap. If you are not sure what business phase that you’re in, please visit sweetlifeco.com/quiz, or you can simply text the word quiz to the number 8, 0 ,5, 2, 5, 4, 0, 8, 8, 0, and you can take a very short self assessment, which will give you a complete breakdown [00:06:00] of all the phases of business growth long term, and tell you exactly what you should be focusing on based on the phase of business that you are in right now.

    [00:06:09] So this show is great for people in phases two, three, or four. And it’s really great for those of you guys who want a conversion tool that moves your leads into buyers. So if you’re a coach or a consultant or a niche skill provider, you’re always looking for great ways to position yourself as the perfect solution to those people that you’re in connection with.

    [00:06:33] And whiteboard sessions are a great way to do that, and that’s what we’re gonna talk about here on today’s show. I’m gonna unpack how to use whiteboard sessions to further connect with your list and increase your sales. And I’m gonna detail out the eight steps that we use as a company and literally giving you our steps of how we plan and host our whiteboard sessions. And at the end of this episode, you’re gonna know our exact [00:07:00] process and you’re gonna be able to plan for your own whiteboard sessions to turn your leads into buyers. All right? So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.

    [00:07:19] First of all, let’s go ahead and answer the question. What is a whiteboard session? So a whiteboard session is like a live webinar where you work with your leads, you help them to solve a specific problem, thereby gaining trust and positioning you as the ultimate solution that they were looking for. 

    [00:07:38] You can host it in Zoom, you can host it in another live streaming platform. But overall, it’s very similar to the webinars of old, but you’re doing it live. It’s not prerecorded where you actually have people show up and you lit, literally get to work their problem with them, and they are an amazing conversion tool. So let’s kind of talk about [00:08:00] that terminology as well. A conversion tool is what we refer to as an event or a way to turn your leads into buyers. So we’re using these whiteboard sessions to turn leads that are already familiar with you into faithful buyers, selling them into your higher ticket programs. Now you can totally use whiteboard sessions to generate new leads as well. 

    [00:08:24] We, in the past, as a company have primarily used them to take our existing leads, our warm leads, and turn them into buyers. I would love for you to go and test these to cold leads as well, because I’m sure that would actually convert very high as well, because very few people are doing this. So I’m gonna break down the eight steps to host these whiteboard sessions and really just pull back the curtains on what we do as a company and give you this step by step process.

    [00:08:50] So let’s go ahead and get started. If you’re taking notes, this is a great episode to take notes. To save it, you can replay it. 

    [00:08:57] So step number one, I need you to choose a [00:09:00] specific problem that you are solving in your session. So one specific problem that you are going to address in your whiteboard session, your whiteboard session shouldn’t be, you know, let’s go ahead and solve the whole world’s, you know, hunger issue. it should be, let’s talk about one specific problem and let’s go ahead and whiteboard out some potential solutions to. 

    [00:09:21] And here is a pro tip for those of you that are really interested in being strategic about your business, I want you to make your whiteboard session a piece of the problem that you solve in your leading offer. So hopefully you caught what I just said. Right. So number one, you’re gonna choose one specific problem that you will solve in your whiteboard session, and one only. 

    [00:09:45] Number two, send out a warmup email to your list, letting them know that you’re aware of the problem that they’re facing and you’re planning something really special for them. It’s like dangling the carrot in front of them. Say, Hey, listen, [00:10:00] you guys, I know that you’re struggling with this. I know that this has been a common issue for many of you, and I just wanted to let you know I’m planning something really special to help you solve that. So stay tuned because I’m gonna tell you what that special thing is that you can be a part of very, very soon. So, step number two is get your list excited about what is to come. 

    [00:10:22] Step number three is to schedule your session. Now, here’s the deal. I recommend you pick two different times to host your whiteboard session. Usually within the same week, try to do them possibly even in the same day, one in the morning, one in the evening, depending on when your clients are, are most available.

    [00:10:39] When your audience is, is most working on the problem that you solve, picking two different sessions gives them an opportunity to say, Hey, yes, I wanna come to session number one or session number two, but make sure that you schedule this in. 

    [00:10:53] And then step number four is to send out an invite to this session. And when you send that [00:11:00] second email invite out and you’re saying, okay, here it is. This is what I’m doing. Call it a whiteboard session. I’m hosting this whiteboard session and it’s gonna be amazing. But here’s the deal. There are limited seats. Now, one of the things that we are not fully addressing here right now in this show. But if you’re a faithful listener to this podcast for the last four and a half years, you know that you will see these trends, right, where we have gone from these mass programs to boutique, very personalized events and programs and leading offers. People don’t wanna be part of the cattle herd. They don’t wanna be in a cookie cutter thing.

    [00:11:37] So when you offer something that’s limited seats, that’s really exclusive, those are the things that people are craving right now at the recording of this in 2021. So just be mindful, mindful for that. So Cindy and I, your invitation and say, Hey, listen, you know, there are limited seats to this. Fyi, make sure you RSVP for your seat right.

    [00:11:57] Step number five, get your tech [00:12:00] set up ready. Okay, so when we say a whiteboard session, I actually mean a whiteboard session. So that is usually a combination between an iPad or something that you can cast sketch on and cast it into Zoom. There are so many different tools that you can do this. We use iPad.

    [00:12:18] We used to use iPad with Notability, but that kind of broke a little bit. So now some of the solutions that we dive into are EAM mixed with Stream Yard. There are a bunch of different technology setups that you can actually do in order to host and cast your iPad live into a Zoom so people can see you actually sketching your whiteboard session.

    [00:12:40] Because this is a true whiteboard session that isn’t like a marketing thing , you’re actually gonna host a whiteboard session and sketch out their results, which I’ll dive into here in just a few minutes. So you need to get your text set up ready. 

    [00:12:53] So, so far you’ve chosen this specific problem. You’ve sent out an email to your list saying, Hey, listen, I know you’re, you’re having this [00:13:00] problem, something special is coming. You’ve scheduled your session in your own planning calendar, and then you’ve sent out the email to your list saying, Hey, it’s scheduled now. Get on the list right now. You’re filling those seats. Meanwhile, while the seats are filling to your event, get your technology set up, practice it, and get it ready. And that was step number five. 

    [00:13:21] Step number six is to send reminders out to your list to make sure they fill up those seats. Just cuz people sign up doesn’t mean they show up. So we need to send reminders, send dms. You wanna blanket those people who have registered, letting them know, Hey, you got one of these exclusive seats to this really special whiteboard. Don’t lose it. Like don’t miss it. Don’t miss your seat. This is really, really special. Get them excited about it. Reiterate how exclusive it is and send them tons of reminders so we’re increasing the show up rate for your event. 

    [00:13:55] And then step number seven is to host this event. And now I’m gonna break it down [00:14:00] into six substeps under the Hosting Your Event. So this is why, if you’re taking notes as a great episode to take notes too. So as you’re hosting your event, I recommend you only do a one hour event, okay? So you’re gonna deliver a lot of value in a very, very short period of time. So you want people wanting more, all right? So in the steps to host your.

    [00:14:23] Step number one is start by sharing like your philosophical genius, well rooted view on the problem that you are solving. So start by sharing. Here is a problem, here is why I know this is a problem. Here’s why I’m so well rooted in part of the solution to this problem. And load your view. Load your intro with case studies of how you’ve helped other people solve the problem that you’re helping this group of people whiteboard about. So you open it up, you position yourself as I’m aware of this problem, [00:15:00] I’m part of the solution to this problem. This is what other clients do that we have helped them work through this problem. And hey, now I’m here to work with you. So you’re fully positioning yourself as being completely aware. Being an expert in this space and having helped other people, and that’s how I want you to open up this strategy session, this whiteboard strategy session. 

    [00:15:22] Step number two is then you open the floor for others to share about their issue with whatever problem it is that you’re solving and why they’re still facing it. What is the problem? What is the struggle? Why are they still here? Why have they not moved forward? What are the other things they’ve. And if you’re a marketer right now in your brain, you’re realizing that these whiteboard sessions are super gold for doing, you know, figuring out what the problem is and doing market research as well.

    [00:15:50] Okay, so later we can talk about transcribing this and turning the, the voices and the, the issues people are saying into marketing copy. But right now [00:16:00] you’re hearing your present in this event. And I want you to open up the floor to others to explain those things. This is my problem. This is why I’m still here. This is my frustration. This is what I’ve tried and open the floor to those people that you’re helping in this whiteboard session to share sharing quickly, because we wanna keep the session moving. We wanna keep it fresh. We wanna, we wanna keep everybody engaged and we really do wanna give them a chance to talk, or at least a chance to post into the chat, depending on how many people you’ve allowed in your session.

    [00:16:29] And then step number three, you’re going to use your whiteboard to visually represent solutions. Demonstrating what people have said and documenting their comments. And collecting their frustrations. So part of your white boarding can be just writing down on the whiteboard, the words people are using, or a list of the problems, which by the way, you already know their problems.

    [00:16:52] But writing down a list. So each time somebody says, oh, this is a problem. Oh, this is a problem. You can be starting to use your whiteboard, [00:17:00] enlist out all of those problem. So you’re gonna document the things that they are saying, and you’re gonna collect it all in this whiteboard session based on what they’re sharing with.

    [00:17:11] And then step number four, you’re gonna summarize all of their pains collectively. And you’re gonna say, Hey, listen, I get it. This is what all you guys are saying. And so what we’ve done there in this whiteboard session is we’ve created community, we’ve created camaraderie amongst the people who’ve been there. They don’t feel like they’re alone anymore. They’re in a place where other people are experiencing the same pain. And guess what? You are the king or queen that leads them out of this. 

    [00:17:36] And so step number six is after you summarize their collective pains, then you start white boarding solutions for them. And this white boarding is gonna look totally different. It’s literally a sketch drawing of how you can take people from one place to one place, or maybe in your white boarding session based on your area of expertise, you can list out key words. Common solutions. [00:18:00] You’re literally going to whiteboard out and draw and draft solutions based on the collective communities problems in your event.

    [00:18:09] And if you have time, depending on how many people showed up, I want you to pull a few specific people out and ask them if they would like to have their specific problem solved for them. Right there in detail in the whiteboarding session. And what that has just done is it’s helped this one person, but it’s also shown everybody else your skills and what an amazing coach that you are and how amazing the results you can get people in a very short period of.

    [00:18:37] And then at the end of your session, you’re gonna restate why this problem exists and why it’s so hard for them to solve it on their own. And so what you’ve done in this session is you’ve positioned yourself as the perfect painkiller that leads them out of it, letting them know you fully understand what they’re dealing with, and sharing case studies of how you have to help the other clients.

    [00:18:58] You’re gonna open the floor for them [00:19:00] to share their collective pains and problems, and then you’re gonna use your whiteboard to visual. Collectively gather together all of their pains and document their comments. The next step is you’re gonna use your whiteboards to start sketching out solutions collectively for the group sharing solutions and doing a short teaching.

    [00:19:20] And then if you have time based on how many people show up, you can pick one or two people from your audience and you can actually go through their very hyper niche specific problem. And at the end of it, you’re gonna restate why the problem is big, why it exists, and you’re gonna position yourself as the solution for that which you’ve already done.

    [00:19:40] At this point in time, you have already fully established yourself as being not only capable, but the perfect solution to their problem. And so how we end these whiteboard sessions is then you make an offer for your next step to work with. Whatever that looks like. You could use a whiteboard session [00:20:00] as a perfect conversion tool into one of your primary offers, one of your leading offers or your whiteboard session could put them into another funnel that warms them up for maybe a live virtual event, then warms them up to, um, maybe have them apply to work for you, work with you, maybe your program is application based and so it’s continuing to be exclusive to work with you. And so your live whiteboard session could perhaps position them just to apply to work with you or you can sell right into your program, whatever works for you.

    [00:20:31] And that is how we use whiteboard sessions, and it’s very, very similar actually. It’s kind of how we use clubhouse rooms, but not as visual, and it doesn’t create such an exclusive community with your group of people that are there. Because when we do this in a whiteboard session, you can see people’s faces.

    [00:20:49] You can really get to know them, and you can help them on the next level because you’re not only having a conversation with them, you are giving them the results right there that they can visually see, and they don’t have to. Just [00:21:00] envision. Whiteboard sessions are a powerful, powerful way to turn your list into buyers. Very faithful buyers. And I’m so surprised that more people don’t do them. We’ve been doing them for years and I’m so happy to teach you how to do it here on this show. An insider mastermind who work with our clients very closely to create their whiteboard sessions and really pick out the problem they’re solving in them and how to convert their leads into buyers.

    [00:21:28] And so I want you to dive into this. Feel free to put this podcast on replay, share this podcast with your friends, and make sure you’re taking notes, because if you follow the steps that we’ve laid out here, you’ll have the same results that we have in our whiteboard sessions, and they’re hugely successful in order to help people build a closer relationship with us, which then in turn, of course, increase our sales because we’ve done a great job establishing you and establishing ourselves has the perfect solution to their problem.

    [00:21:57] Which in the coaching and consulting space, that [00:22:00] is always our number one goal when it comes to marketing. So I hope you found this episode helpful. I feel like I’m losing my voice a little bit here at the end, and I’m so sorry about that. So hope my scratchy voice doesn’t get in the way of your understanding these steps, because I really would love for you to apply them in your business.

    [00:22:18] And when you do tag me on, Instagram. Show me, say, Hey April, I am using this whiteboard session strategy. I’m so excited to do it. Here’s what’s happening. Tag me at April Beach Life because I always love seeing how you guys are applying the business training that we give you here on this show, and we’re here to make you more money and of course, help you build predictably the business and life of your dreams.

    [00:22:41] Thank you so much for tuning in, sharing this show with your friends and being faithful Listeners here of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast, again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com and clicking on podcast and if you’re interested in applying to work with us.

    [00:22:58] And have us roll [00:23:00] up our sleeves with you in your business and get very personalized business blueprinting, architecture, and engineering of your leading offers and your entire long-term business plan. You can find us at sweetlifeco.com. That is our superpower, and that is what we love doing. Have a great day.

    [00:23:18] I’ll talk to you next week.

    How To Disqualify Clients To Grow Your Business – with April Beach (Episode 263)

    How To Disqualify Clients To Grow Your Business
    How To Disqualify Clients To Grow Your Business

    This episode is for those in Phase  3  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who believe in your offer, program and service and you’re ready to grow. 

    Summary: 

    Disqualifying clients is an important part of business growth. This concept comes from the idea that concentrating your sales and marketing on only the most qualified leads is a more successful way to increase sales. But how do you disqualify clients and find the perfect people you’re called to serve? That’s what we’re covering in today’s show. 
    This is not a training on “ideal client avatars” or niche coaching topics – these are the questions no one is telling you to raise, but they must be asked for your happiness and financial success, and that of your clients. 

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Know what topics to qualify and disqualify clients on
    2. Have a list of questions to workshop for yourself to get clear 
    3. Gain confidence in developing a disqualification mindset in your business 
    4. Leave this episode looking at the current clients you have and immediate being able to see who is the perfect fit and who is not.

    Resources Mentioned:

    Organize your assets and ideas into a Leading Offer – 

    www.license2scale.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    263 (245)

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our best of episodes. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes, with the most downloads, with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, Or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen, this episode you did was really powerful for me. Thank you so much. 

    [00:00:30] And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers and authors. And so this episode is absolutely amazing. Though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com. You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes [00:01:00] in there for you with up to date links. Making sure that you’re getting to the right place. If you’re looking for resource. Now special message to those of you guys that have been waiting for this show to come back.

    [00:01:15] I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s, as we roll into the new year, going from 22 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about, but after five years of faithfully dropping a business training or recording, a strategy for you every single week and winning awards for this show, I needed to step back and take a break. And you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. What turned out to be one month off, turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we have [00:02:00] been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, and entrepreneurs have relied on. I needed to take a step back and get a perspective of what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show. How should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you are growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like?

    [00:02:27] So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the SweetLife podcast for you, and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off. But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. You guys are amazing and you have really been the fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. It’s gonna sound a little bit [00:03:00] different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come to for true proven business trainings that are transformational for your company. 

    [00:03:11] That is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air, from experts delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you. I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned.

    [00:03:27] The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known and the Experts, so we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings without a hook to sell you something, they’re just coming in here to pour into you are absolutely epic. I can’t wait. So if you haven’t yet, subscribe to the show, please click subscribe. Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus, and I just, Love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and the [00:04:00] episodes coming for you. 

    [00:04:01] And in the meantime, enjoy this. Best of it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason. I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to The Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business, and launch a life you love faster with business, mentor and entrepreneur activator, april Beach.

    [00:04:31] Hi, you guys. Welcome back to the show. This is week and episode number 245. On the Sweet Life Entrepreneurial Business Podcast and I’m April Beach, host of this show and I’m so glad to talk to you. We are coming up on our fifth year podcast anniversary just in a couple of months, and we just really appreciate all of you guys who’ve listened to this show for so many years, and those of you who share it with your friends, we do not intentionally accept any advertising [00:05:00] on this show. I literally get pitched all the time, every single week from companies that wanna advertise in the show. And I just think that screws up with the flow of this show and our connection and how we really hang out together here. And it’s like you and I are sitting across the table from each other or having to cup of coffee, and we intentionally work hard to give you business trainings and coaching that other coaches charge thousands for. Totally free here on the show. So thank you so much for continuing to tune in. 

    [00:05:27] As you know, if you’ve been here before, all of the show notes and everything we’re gonna talk about today can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com, and this is episode number 245. So let’s get into what you can expect from hanging out with me here for a few minutes on today’s show.

    [00:05:45] Today we’re talking about why disqualifying clients actually helps your business grow. And this is for those of you guys who are in particularly in phase three of business. So this is the scale up phase of your [00:06:00] business. But I will say that I understand that I want you to apply this in the launch phase. There is just a little bit more of a psychological barrier to disqualifying clients when frankly you may not have ever served any before. This show really aligns with those of you who have served clients, you know how great your offer, your program, your solution is. And you’re really looking to scale up your business.

    [00:06:22] And one of the best ways we do that is by actually disqualifying or firing clients. So this is what you can expect. This is a great show for those of you guys who believe in your offer, your program and your service. And you know that you know that, you know that it gives people transformational, predictable.

    [00:06:42] So if that’s you, if you know what you do is amazing and there is no question whatsoever and how great you are at delivering people those results, then continue listening to this show. If you aren’t really sure, then that means that you should probably check out my [00:07:00] OFFER ENGINEER™ MASTERCLASS, and that’s a totally separate thing to talk about.

    [00:07:05] We have literally numerous podcast episodes here about how to create a predictable leading program. But right now, if you are not really sure about the confidence of your program, your course, your membership community, your mastermind, go to theofferengineer.com and there’s a lot of information there to get you started.

    [00:07:25] So for those of you who do know that, like you’re the bomb, right? Like you know that what you deliver is amazing, then let’s continue on to what we’re talking about today. We’re talking about the fact that disqualifying clients is an important part of business growth, and I get that this concept seems counterproductive to sales and marketing, and here is why it isn’t.

    [00:07:47] When you concentrate your sales and marketing on only the most qualified and the best fit leads for your business, then your sales become more productive and the success from your program [00:08:00] increases. And that’s a really important part of what we’re talking about today, and we’re talking about how to go about the process of disqualifying clients and finding the perfect clients that are really the right fit for what it is that you do.

    [00:08:12] So this is not, let me preface this. This is not an ideal client avatar or a niche business coaching podcast training, at all. We’re not talking about ICA development or client profiling. Instead, we’re talking about the questions that nobody tells you, that you really should be asking yourself about who you really want to work with, who you really want your clients to be, and they have to be asked and they have to be asked for, number one, your own happiness. Number two, your client’s happiness. Cuz when you have a great working relationship with your clients, then it’s gonna be much more successful for both of you and therefore for the financial success of both your clients and your company. 

    [00:08:51] At the end of this episode, you’re gonna know what topics or different areas you should be looking at to qualify and disqualify clients on. [00:09:00] You’re gonna have a list of questions to workshop for yourself. These are tough questions that I’m gonna give you in today’s show, and just run through them in your mind. Ask them in the air or when you’re on the treadmill, wherever you are, ask yourself these questions and come up with the answers to these and get some solid clarity, okay?

    [00:09:18] You’re gonna be able to gain confidence in developing your disqualification mindset in your business, and you’re gonna leave this episode looking at your current clients. And you are gonna have an immediate understanding of who’s really a perfect client for you and who might have been somebody that might not have been the right fit for your program.

    [00:09:40] Okay? So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.

    [00:09:53] Okay. Why does qualifying clients helps your business grow? So I totally get, this may sound counterintuitive, but disqualifying clients is an [00:10:00] important part of business growth. I know it sounds scary for those of you guys who are still working to become profitable, but this concept comes from the idea that concentrating your sales and your marketing in only the most qualified and best fit leads is actually more suitable to help your business grow.

    [00:10:18] And so the deal first of all, like in most things, it starts with your mindset. So let’s first start there. If you wanna serve everybody, you’re gonna serve nobody. And here is why you’ve probably heard that statement a million times over again from tons of business coaching. It’s because in order to deliver a top notch result, you need to curate and customize your program.

    [00:10:43] So lemme say that again. In order to deliver a top notch result for your clients, you need to properly curate and customize your program or your solution. And customize solutions don’t serve everybody, right, or they wouldn’t be [00:11:00] customized. So the first thing that we need to realize it is in order to be really great at what you. You have to customize it for a certain group of people, not for everybody, because it’s not gonna give them amazing results. And then from a marketing standpoint, if you don’t speak to a certain specific audience, your message is just gonna be so broad. It’s gonna be lost in all the noise of, of online marketing and nobody’s gonna resonate with it.

    [00:11:23] So let’s get those things out of the way first. Those like negative thoughts outta the way first if, if you might have been having those. And let’s actually dive into the deeper conversation that I wanna have today, which is the point of this show. So we’re talking about disqualifying clients. When you disqualify clients, you make more money because the qualified clients you do accept, number one, have better results with your program.

    [00:11:47] And number two, they have a deeper commitment to their own success. And maybe I should’ve flipped those around the other way. it. It really should. They have a deeper commitment to their own success, and therefore they have better [00:12:00] results in your program. So it all starts with a process of determining who wins with your coaching and who actually doesn’t.

    [00:12:07] Now, don’t forget the prerequisite to applying this strategy is having a proven leading program that delivers a transformation. So everything we’re talking about today is with the understanding that you’ve already met the prerequisite of understanding that your solution you deliver is full blown, top notch, like the best guaranteed transformation for your people.

    [00:12:31] Okay? So it all starts with determining who wins and who doesn’t with that program you’ve already created. All right? So if you’re thinking this ideal client avatar, that’s totally not what I’m talking about. What I’m asking you is this. Do you know where the line in the sand is between the people who are all in for your coaching and service, and those who have one foot in and one foot out? And taking it a step further, [00:13:00] understanding and accepting that only the best clients that are gonna get the best results are the ones who are all in on your program, is what we need to talk about getting to the root of today, and here’s why. Knowing where your clients are psychologically in the belief of themselves and of your services, will affect the results they get with you.

    [00:13:23] Okay. So how your clients are mentally entering your service business, your coaching business, is totally gonna affect how great of results they get, regardless of how great your program is. So even if you have this amazing program in course and service and in coaching, and you have gone through all the steps we’re talking about to layout an industry leading program or offer, when it comes down to it, you still have to be able to identify who psychologically is a great fit and who is not a great fit.

    [00:13:57] So here’s an example. Let me give you an example of this. You’ve gone through all [00:14:00] the work. You have this amazing leading offer, this amazing program or course, or whatever it is that, that you lead, that your business model within your, in your company, right? So if time or financial commitment is a barrier, a hesitation in somebody who’s having a conversation about working with you, then you have already started out by putting yourself in a bad position that you’re gonna have to handhold them.

    [00:14:25] If time or finances or even questioning their own ability to be successful is something they’re already bringing up in the beginning. And these are big red flags, then you’re already starting out by having a struggle to get them results. So these are some of the things that may happen to you. If you’re in a relationship with a client like that.

    [00:14:48] You may feel like you need to show up every single day proving yourself again and again as to why you know what the heck you’re doing. You could feel like you’re walking on eggshells. You could have to hold their hand every single day and reassure ’em how great they [00:15:00] are on top of the strategy coaching that you deliver instead of being the expert and coach that they really need a hundred percent. If you are having to show up and, and reconvince, and it’s almost like reselling them on what you do every single day within the process after they’ve already bought, that is a red flag that they are not gonna get great results in your program. And frankly, it has nothing to do with you. It’s the mindset that they had coming into it. So here are six questions to ask yourself to determine who really wins with your coaching. 

    [00:15:34] Question number one is how committed do they need to be? How committed to themselves, according to your area of expertise and what you teach on, do they need to be to be successful?

    [00:15:46] Some of you guys might have a program where you’re building up their self-confidence, and if that’s a case, Then probably not very committed because that’s your area of expertise. If that’s your area of expertise, then it’s gonna be a different degree of [00:16:00] commitment than somebody who may need their clients to show up fully in and vetted already.

    [00:16:05] Okay? So this totally is dependent on you and what you deliver in the solution you provide within your offers and program. So question number two is how committed do they need to be? Excuse me. Question number one is how committed do they need to be? Question number two is what time allotment do they need to have?

    [00:16:24] If they’re already struggling to find the time to be successful in your program right now, might not be the time for them to join your program. And you should be really honest with them and say, Hey, look it, this is exactly how many hours you need to put into this each, each week, and when you put in this many hours, these are the results you can.

    [00:16:43] Those are things you should be able to answer about your leading offer. Okay? And so then you can ask yourself, what time allotment does somebody need to have in order to be super duper successful within the programs that I provide? 

    [00:16:59] Number three, [00:17:00] what attitude do they need to show up with? So according, again, to you and your expertise in what you do, what is the ideal attitude/ mindset? Of the person who is going to get the very best results with your coaching. 

    [00:17:17] Number four, what might they need to leave behind? This is a really big deal. So a lot of people, especially people who have bought a ton of courses, they’ve spent literally thousands of dollars on coaches in the past. I hear this all the time, you guys, people come to us and they’re like, oh my gosh, you don’t have any idea. I’ve spent $50,000 on coaches and I still don’t have a result. Right. Well that really sucks for them and that’s really devastating and it shows why you really need to question who you’re receiving coaching from. Again, that’s a totally, another podcast. We should do an episode on that. But if they’re coming to you with that background, [00:18:00] you need to make sure that you’re having a conversation with them about why you’re different, why your solutions are proven, why your transformation in working with you is vetted again and again and again.

    [00:18:10] So what might they need to leave behind in past experiences or, you know, bad experiences or good experiences? What preconceived notions or things that don’t serve them might they need to leave behind when they come to work with you? 

    [00:18:27] Number five, what should they be ready for? Some of you guys deliver insane results within your program. Some results are so good that people are like, oh my gosh, shit, I can’t believe this is, this is so amazing, right? If that’s you and you know you deliver an insane result, what do your clients really need to be ready for in working with you? and what other things do they need to have in place to be ready for that? That is a really big deal. That is definitely something that we vet clients before they come in our OFFER ENGINEER™ [00:19:00] MASTERCLASS. Are they ready for this? And you ask yourself like, are people actually really ready for what I’m about to give them? For this awesome sauce that I’m bringing to the table that I’ve worked so hard to curate for them? Are they actually ready for it? What do they need to do to get ready? 

    [00:19:14] And then number six, what personality best fits with your program? This is particularly important for those of you guys that have a community within your program. If somebody is like a total B I T C H and you have this amazing community of these sweet people that are in there, I’m telling you what, like that one bad apple can spoil the bunch, right?

    [00:19:37] And so your onboarding process, your onboarding presale, pre client acceptance process should include somebody talking and vetting and disqualifying people whose vibe and flow just might not align with the rest of your community. And that’s totally okay. But just be honest with yourself about what personality best fits within your program.[00:20:00] 

    [00:20:00] So those are six questions, hard questions that you should know the answers to in order to disqualify. And then let’s flip that around. Pre-qualify the perfect people for your program, your service, your solution, your super power. So here are some of the exercises that we can go through to look a little bit deeper to actually make this job of asking yourself these questions a little bit easier for you.

    [00:20:27] Number one, what was the mindset? We’re talking about past clients now, what was the mindset of past clients and what was their personality of those that got the best results? So in looking at those people who’ve already been clients in the past, what was their mindset and what was their personality like of the freaking winners? The A gamers, the ones that did everything and they came and they saw and they kicked ass, and then they took names and then they went and they were just absolutely incredible. Shouting from the mountain tops about how amazing your program is, right? [00:21:00] What was their mindset and their personality? 

    [00:21:02] Also, looking at your past clients, who did you love working? Who was like the best person that when you got on those Zoom calls or when you saw this person on your calendar, you’re like, yay, I get to talk to so and so today. And what was it about them that you loved working with them? Number three, who contributed to others in your course or your community? Again, for those of you guys that have a community base, who was the one that was always cheering other people on?

    [00:21:31] Who was the one that was always lifting other people up? Who was like that conversation starter? Who was that cheerleader and what was it about them that made it so amazing when they contributed to that space? Number four, who did the work without question. Like who, no matter what happened, and we all know stuff happens all the time in our life, that’s going to get in the way of some of the things that we’re working on, right?[00:22:00] 

    [00:22:00] But who did the work, even when all the things got in the way? Who pushed through? Who was super tenacious? Who were the fighters who refused to quit? Number five, who always needed coddling ? Who always showed up and they’re like, oh, well I don’t know. I don’t know how I am today. What do you think? Like, who needed that?

    [00:22:24] Is that something that you want to help with? That would not fly so well in some of the programs that I have. Let’s just be honest, right? You can probably tell you, listen to my podcast. Like if somebody showed up every day and they were like having major excuses to why they couldn’t do it, I’d be like, you’re right. You can’t. Cause that’s how you’re showing up here. You know? I mean, are you the same way as I am? Is your program a safe place for people to show up who do need your support, who everything you do is to just to pour into them and you’re [00:23:00] the reminder of how amazing they are because they forgot it or they never were told it in the first place.

    [00:23:06] Whatever it is, whatever the degree. Is this, with your past clients who showed up needing that level of support, number six, who complained about the work, the time, or the money. So who complained, if at all? I hope this has never happened to you. I’ve never had this happen to me, but I’m sure this has happened before.

    [00:23:25] Like, who was like, oh my gosh, you know, this takes so much time to do That probably means that you didn’t do a good job explaining the commitment in the beginning if that is the case. So certainly look at the structure of your program and, and how you are selling your program. But after you did that, let’s just say like you totally nailed that.

    [00:23:42] Who still came complaining about the work, the time and the, or the. Number seven, who questioned your processes? Okay. If you are in a space where you deliver a system, a method, or a framework, like most of our clients do, do [00:24:00] you have people who’ve showed up who’ve always kind of questioned what you do? If that is the case, then take a look at their personality.

    [00:24:09] And I’m guessing that that is not the perfect person for your program. Right. Right, and again, this is saying that you’ve gone through the process to develop your leading program in method and framework. That being aside, we’ve established that prerequisite. If people still showed up and they’re like, really?

    [00:24:27] Are you assured you really think that’s the way to do it? And they just constantly have a back and forth, I’m guessing that they are not the perfect fit for you. And then number eight, who left and told all of their friends about how amazing you are, who is like, let me give you testimonies. I can’t wait to tell the whole entire world man alive 95. This was the best money I ever spent. Those people, those are the people we wanna go after. Those are the people that are your perfect fit for your program. [00:25:00] So if they are not like those past clients that were doing all the stuff like that in like making a banner because they love you so much, then they probably need to be considered for disqualification.

    [00:25:13] So after this episode, I’m about to give you some action steps here and how to apply all this. But after this, Then as you move forward, know that you deserve to be praised for the hard work and the time that you have put in strategically developing a solution for people’s problems. And let’s make sure that you are disqualifying the people that aren’t the perfect recipient of your solution.

    [00:25:39] Because when you do this. You’re gonna be able to focus all of your attention, all of your relationship building, all of your actions on those perfect personality mindset, people that are the right fit for your program, and when they are successful, you are successful. Your client’s success. [00:26:00] My client’s success is a direct reflection, A direct correlation to my success. To your success. 

    [00:26:08] So we wanna pick the people that are the A gamers, right? We wanna pick the ones that we know we’re coming to the table mentally and physically prepared for what it is that you are going to give them solutions in, for your solution. And these are just some of the questions that when we talk about like ideal client avatar and client profiling and customer targeting, nobody’s saying to ask these questions and so I really felt like it was important to talk about this.

    [00:26:38] We actually, I actually had this conversation a few weeks ago with a couple of women in our business client family, and this has really come up and I think it’s an important conversation to have and so, Is your action plan moving forward? 

    [00:26:53] Number one, look at your sales copy and see if it clearly disqualifies the wrong people. [00:27:00] So after you’ve gone through the questions above, now let’s like put it into action, right? We’re gonna say, and how do we do this? We’re gonna take it from high level to eye level. Number one, look at your sales copy, copy, look at your marketing copy, and make sure that you’re clearly disqualifying the people that are not the perfect right fit. For you or your service or your program. 

    [00:27:21] Number two, add questions to your sales call process to filter those who are not the perfect fit. So if you use sales calls to qualify or disqualify clients, Make sure you’re adding questions in there that correlate with the answers you’re looking for to either qualify or disqualify clients. Make sure you add those into your sales process. Don’t be afraid to ask the tough questions. Where in this sales call, they might be like, oh wow, yeah, you know what? That’s not me. And that is a great opportunity for you to say, you know what? I am so glad we had this conversation because guess what? [00:28:00] What I have is not the right fit for you. And I don’t want you spending another X, Y, Z amount of money on a program that’s not gonna be the right fit for you. But I have a great friend I can refer you to that might be a better fit, right? These are important things to do in your sales call. You don’t want this person as a client if they do not fit into what you need to deliver the great solutions within your program. And so don’t be afraid to disqualify them right there in the triage call, in the sales. And send them somewhere else. Just bless them to go somewhere else. But you have to make sure you’re adding questions into your sales call process that can give you the answers to that. 

    [00:28:40] And number three, talk to your team. This is for those of you guys with teams that manage your marketing. Some of you, you know, have people that help you do your sales call, help you do your coaching, talk to them about the importance of positioning your solution and your service as the prize. It’s very, very important that once [00:29:00] you have done the work to create a leading program or course or offer, it is the prize.

    [00:29:07] It is the pain killer, as one of my clients calls it, it, it’s like the perfect language. Oh yes, it’s a pain killer. Okay? Make sure that you hold it close to your own confidence level that you worked your booty off to make sure it was a perfect pain killer for them, and that is the prize. And this quote is like one of the best quotes I’ve ever heard from Angela Lauria. She said, ‘the prize never chases’. Let me say that again. The prize never chases, and so here are some final thoughts I wanna leave you with. I totally get that. The thought of disqualifying somebody that comes your way that isn’t the right fit, sounds really scary, especially when you haven’t hit consistent 10 K months or 20 K months, 30 K months, especially when you’re first starting out.

    [00:29:59] [00:30:00] And that’s why at the beginning of this episode, I said, if you are in the launch phase and you haven’t served a ton of clients yet. I get and understand that it’s important for us to go through the process to test your solution on different clients, making sure that you are going through the testing and the traction to find the right fit after, of course, doing market research.

    [00:30:21] So I understand that if you’re listening to this and you’re in the launch phase, definitely take this with a grain of salt. I’m keeping it real, but never, ever, ever sell your program to somebody that you don’t believe a hundred percent, that you can give them results. That is for sure. I don’t care what business phase you’re in that is aligned, we don’t ever cross.

    [00:30:41] If somebody is not a good fit, do not sell to them. Right? But for the rest of you, Don’t be afraid to say no to the money because when you say no to something, you’re opening up your capacity to say yes to more things, and you don’t wanna be [00:31:00] stuck with clients that take a ton of extra time in order to get them results because they didn’t show up with the mindset and the prerequisites in place to get the best results with the service.

    [00:31:13] You. The truth is, you should be disqualifying clients to work with you if they don’t come wanting the results you deliver in full force. If their personality won’t jive with others in your community, if they consistently need affirmation that you know what the heck you’re doing, although please make sure that you know what the heck you’re doing and if they’re only partially committed to their own transformation.

    [00:31:38] And one last thing I’m gonna leave you with today, stop wondering if you’re good enough. And taking clients that don’t fit the whole bill of what you deliver. When you go through the process to diligently develop your leading offer, stop taking clients that don’t fit the bill for the solution you [00:32:00] provide, because we know that you can lead a horse to water, but you cannot make him drink. And I really, really, really want to remind you to only work with clients that are super duper thirsty. 

    [00:32:15] Okay, this was episode number 245 here at the SweeLife Entrepreneur Podcast. You can find the show notes and all of the other amazing info that our guests drop in here for free by visiting sweetlifeco.com. And if you are struggling. If you do not know how to turn your ideas into a leading industry, leading course, offer program, mastermind coaching event or retreat, then go to theofferengineer.com. Our OFFER ENGINEER™ MASTERCLASS is reopening in October. We only open this masterclass twice a year.

    [00:32:54] That’s it. Only twice a year can you get into this masterclass, and it is opening in [00:33:00] October, 2021. So depending on when you listen to this, that’s an important date to note for your calendar. In the event that you’re not listening to this live, you can also go to theofferengineer.com at any time and be notified when this masterclass opens up again.

    [00:33:15] All right, you guys, go grab all the show notes. Thank you so much for staying tuned to this show. I hope you’re having an amazing day, and I truly appreciate your listenership and just being a supporter of this show. Have a great one. Bye-bye.

    3 Types Of Content Companies Will Line Up To License From You- with April Beach (Episode 262)

    How To License Your Course Content or Program
    How To License Your Course Content or Program

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs who have an established method, framework or process and are ready to scale exponentially. 

    Summary: 

    People don’t talk about licensing. In fact, it’s a secret weapon that most companies don’t tap in to. However, licensing when done properly can be the catalyst to higher profit than you ever dreamed possible. And there’s no catch! In fact, the business model of licensing your content, course, or program is quite simple. This week we’re continuing our conversation about from episode #235 and talking about the types of content companies line up to license.
     
    I’m also sharing behind the scenes details of how I’ve licensed my content, methods, frameworks and processes for over a decade. And you can too! 
     
     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Know what makes your content valuable enough to be licensed
    2. Know how to license what you already have and not re-create the wheel
    3. Know how to decide if licensing is right for you
     

    Resources Mentioned:

    www.license2scale.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    262 (236)

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our best of episodes. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes with the most downloads, with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen this episode you did was really powerful for me.

    [00:00:28] Thank you so much. And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers and authors. And so this episode is absolutely amazing, though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com.

    [00:00:54] You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes in there for you with up to date links, making sure that you’re getting to the right place if you’re looking for a resource. Now special message to those of you guys that have been

    [00:01:12] waiting for this show to come back. I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s. As we roll into the new year, going from 22 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about, but after five years of faithfully dropping a business, training, a recording, a, a strategy for you every single week in winning awards for this show. I needed to step back and take a break, and you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. So what turned out to be one month off turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we have been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, and entrepreneurs have relied on.

    [00:02:06] I needed to take a step back and get a perspective. If what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show, how should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you are growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like?

    [00:02:27] So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the SweetLife podcast for you and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off. But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. You guys are amazing and you have really been. The fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. It’s gonna sound a little bit different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come to for true proven business trainings that are transformational for your company.

    [00:03:10] That is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air. From experts delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you. I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned.

    [00:03:27] The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known in the Experts. So we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings without a hook to sell you something. They’re just coming in here to pour into you are Absolut. Epic. I can’t wait. So if you haven’t yet subscribe to the show, please click subscribe. Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus. And I just love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and the episode’s coming for you. And in the meantime, enjoy this best of it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason. I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach.

    [00:04:31] Hi guys, and welcome back to this show. I’m April, and I’m so glad to be talking to you. Today’s podcast is an extension of last week’s podcast, episode number 235. Honestly, if you haven’t listened to episode 2 35 yet on licensing 1 0 1, how to license your course and your content to scale your company exponentially, that’s where I would start.

    [00:04:53] But if you were with me last week, I’m so glad that you were back here again and I can’t wait unravel this conversation a little bit more today. We’re continuing our conversation by specifically talking about three types of content. Companies will line up to license from you and all the show notes and everything that we’re discussing today can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com.

    [00:05:19] You can just click on the podcast and everything is right there for. Now a couple of kind of behind the scenes as I’m recording this for you guys. This morning I took an ice bath. It was the polar plunge, and I still feel like I’m a little bit shaky, but frankly, I feel better than I ever have in my life.

    [00:05:38] We were hosting a human performance summit at our lab, and I usually don’t talk about this very much here on the show, but we actually own an entrepreneur lab, which is a place where we help entrepreneurs turn their thoughts into reality in Boulder, Colorado. And we dive into a lot of peak performance things and it’s really amazing. So four 30 this morning I was in an ice bath, completely focused and visualizing what we want our 2022 to look like and um, I just wanted to share that with you first of all, because I get so many comments from you guys about when I share stuff behind the scenes and the fact that you appreciate it.

    [00:06:20] But then also to show that it’s so important that we’re always working on ourselves, physically on top of what we’re doing in our business. And all these shows, all these podcast episodes are quote ,unquote business strategies and trainings that you can take to the bank, right? But the truth is, it really does all start with you.

    [00:06:40] And so I wanted to bring that up. So before we start diving, How literally you can blow your business up through licensing. I wanted you just to take a pause and just to reflect on what did you do for your physical body and for your mind this week, because that’s where it all starts. And I just wanted to encourage you in that.

    [00:07:02] Okay. Squirrel moment over . Let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. Here is what you can expect by hanging out with me for the next couple of minutes. First of all, this is gonna be a shorter episode because the last couple episodes have been a little lengthy longer than we usually do for the summertime, and I know that you’re busy and out there living the dream or building the dream or both.

    [00:07:24] And so I wanna be respectful of your time. This particular episode is for those of you guys who are in business phases three, four, or five. If you don’t know what phase of business you’re in, you can take the quiz by visiting sweet life co.com/quiz. And this is a great show for those of you guys who have an established method, framework or process, and you are ready to scale your business exponentially.

    [00:07:51] So here’s the deal. People don’t really talk about licensing. In fact, it’s like a secret weapon that most companies don’t even realize that they can tap into. However, licensing, when it’s done right, can be like the super catalyst for a higher profit than you truly ever dreamed possible because, and if you listen to that last week, you know this.

    [00:08:15] Because we are giving other companies the power to distribute your content. It’s not always coming directly from you. And frankly, there isn’t any catch to this. The business model of licensing is really simple, and that’s what we’re talking about even more in depth than last week. So if you didn’t listen to last week’s again, go back and listen to episode number 235.

    [00:08:36] At the end of today’s episode, you’re, you are gonna know what makes your content valuable. And whether or not you are ready to license your content and you’re gonna have more information so that you can really lean on and even evaluate the opportunity of licensing. Most companies that we talk to love the idea, but it’s very new to them because frankly, business coaches don’t talk on or teach on this very often. And so I understand this might be a totally new concept to you, and so you’re gonna have more awareness and understanding of whether or not this is a great opportunity for you and your company moving forward. So let’s go ahead and dive into the show.

    [00:09:23] Okay, so let’s do a mini recap of last week’s episode. This will not replace listening to last week’s episode, and I really don’t want you to miss out. So this is just kind of a refresher if it’s been a hot minute since you listened to last week’s. First of all, what is licensing? Licensing is creating content for other companies to use so that they can grow faster, they can make more money. Or they can provide better services because of licensing your content.

    [00:09:52] The sister, I’ll call it a sister, the twin of licensing, which the process of doing this is almost identical to the process of creating your license material, is training other people in your method. So if you have a signature method or a signature framework or a signature process that you wanna train other people, even if it’s under your brand or they can become certified in your process. It’s the same thing we’re talking about here. So really getting your wheels spinning. Have you been listening maybe the last weeks and you’re like, gosh, you know, I don’t really know if I wanna do this.

    [00:10:29] But then when I say, Hey, but what about bring in other people underneath you and training them on your method, just so you know, pretty much the exact same process to get your content. So that’s a little recap of last week. The benefits of licensing are number one, for you to demonstrate thought leadership in your space.

    [00:10:48] So when you start licensing your material, all of a sudden people look and they’re like, oh, wow, man, she’s awesome. Look at that. She’s licensing her material that they, you know, other companies or he, you know, number two, increases credibility across your own audience. So even if your audience isn’t the one, Licensing the material from you, they think you’re even more badass because of the fact that you’re licensing your material to other people.

    [00:11:14] It certainly helps you exponentially scale because in the process of licensing, we really create something one time and then you can profit through multiple different opportunities and it is a perfect bridge for those of you guys who have been a B to C. Moving over to a B2B or even a B2 G, like a business to government.

    [00:11:36] Great opportunity here for those of you guys who are, who are interested in that. So whether or not you are ready to license your programs and you’ve met kind of those prerequisites for licensing, go back and listen to the last week’s episode because we, we dive into that even more in depth. So today we’re talking about the three types of content that companies literally will line up to license from you.

    [00:11:59] I have companies line up and join my wait list to license our courses and I release them one month a year, and that has been happening for over 11 years. Actually, probably should look at the date and throw myself a big ass party for that. I think that’s actually more than that. The deal is, is we create something that is amazing, that gives you the advantage that other companies want and they need, and then they literally will line up to license this material.

    [00:12:29] Why is it, why do they do that? Why do they pay so much money? Is because you are giving them the ability to profit faster and or you’re making their life easier. And or you are positioning them to be better at the content they’re already delivering. Maybe what you are licensing fits a missing piece to what a company needed, or maybe they’re taking your whole entire program in white labeling it, which we talk about last week. So those are kind of some of the reasons why this is such an incredible opportunity for you.

    [00:13:05] So three types of content that companies will line up to license. Number one is actual content itself. So content that people need to fill every distribution channel. Let me say that again. The first type of content that people will line up to license, I say people that companies, organizations, or other entrepreneurs will line up to license from you is content that feeds every distribution channel.

    [00:13:32] Examples of that are blogs, articles, newsletters, emails, so written emails, imagesand videos are examples of that type of content. So anything that another company needs to fill their content distribution channels, if you already have great content in that area, believe me, I mean, let’s take another sidebar here for a second.

    [00:14:01] You and I both know how tiring and time consuming and exhausting it is sometimes to create content, video content, written content, podcast. Content. Right? Content is king, right? The truth of the matter is, is that if you can speed up that process by delivering amazing content for other companies to distribute on their channels, through their channels, they will line up to license that content from you.

    [00:14:29] That’s number one. Number two, type of content that they will line up to license are. Let me give you an example of assets. Assets are anything that these companies need to communicate an end result or to add to their established content or program. So an example of an asset could be, it’s something very workable and usable.

    [00:14:54] It’s like a tool. Examples of those could be worksheets or blueprints or templates or forms. Anything that is an asset, that is a tool that they need, that they can add to their established content, that becomes a tool within what they are already delivering. So number one is content to feed their distribution channels.

    [00:15:20] Number two are assets. And third, and which is the king of them all are, I call them completes. These are complete package. That companies and other entrepreneurs or organizations need. Here are examples of completes. These could be your complete program or services, your complete courses curriculum, even if it isn’t built into a course yet. Steps of service systems or processes, so these are complete packages that companies can take. It is like full blown turnkey. You already have these complete programs. and you are giving another company, an organization or another business, an opportunity to plug and play where you’ve already created your complete package, your videos, your content, your worksheets.

    [00:16:17] It could even include you coming in and teaching some part of that live. And this is when you have the great privilege of creating an amazing custom package. Whatever works out for you and the licensee. Completes are where it is you guys completes, are the ones that companies are really paying hundreds of thousands of dollars for.

    [00:16:40] Or you can start really down, and I don’t even mean to say down, but you, you know, it doesn’t have to be licensing your whole program to a corporation org organization. You can start by licensing your content to other small businesses starting at only a couple thousand dollars. Whatever works based on the value of the content that you are delivering.

    [00:17:01] But completes are really where it is. And the more complete and the more valuable your program, the more of a transformation you deliver within your program, then the more somebody is going to pay you to use it to license it from you. So let’s go ahead and recap the three types of content that companies line up to license.

    [00:17:21] Now, if you’re driving and you can’t take. I wanna invite you to a totally free one hour video. It’s called Content Licensing 1 0 1, where I go even more in depth than all of this, and you guys can tap into that video anytime. I would call it a webinar, but I’m not selling you anything on it, there’s, you know, I’m not like there with you live saying, and now, you know, do this.

    [00:17:44] It’s literally a video. For those of you guys who are interested in learning more about content licensing, you can tap into this video anytime by visiting license, and then the number two and then the word scale.com, or by visiting our website sweetlifeco.com. So if you can’t take notes, I break down these three types of content. And I actually show examples of these inside that video, and you’re welcome to tap into that. So let’s do a really quick recap. Number one, content to feed any distribution channel. Number two, any sort of assets or tools. Again, these are worksheets or blueprints or templates or forms. And then number three are completes. These are your curriculum or your course, or your complete program, or your complete service package that’s already done and ready to go. And those are the three types of content that companies, organizations, and corporations and other entrepreneurs will line up to pay you to please let them use it in their content distribution or in their program.

    [00:18:48] Please let them sell it, and it’s a win-win for everybody. A couple things moving forward, and I’m not gonna dive into these things in depth because we’ve covered so much over the last two podcast episodes, but I want to make sure I’m at least getting your wheels turning because I want you making more money faster by using the work you’ve already done.

    [00:19:10] And so what I want you to do at this point, if you’re thinking about this, definitely cruise over to license2scale.com. Grab the resources we have there for you, but just be thinking right now, what do you already have? What do you already have in your arsenal? What do you already have that you have already created that other companies could use that you see other companies missing? It could be a good opportunity for both you and another company. What do you already have that you can maybe repurpose or tweak? Maybe you just need to scale it up just a little bit and then you can have an opportunity to sell that exponentially. It could be a course or a mini course or a training, written content, programs.

    [00:19:54] And don’t forget, going through the process of packaging your material to license to another company is the same process we would take you through if you want to certify or accredit or train others on your method. These are the same steps in the same process. It’s just the distribution and the actual usage.

    [00:20:15] The sales side of it looks a little bit different. So licensing your content is the same process that we take clients through as those of you guys who are launching a certification or a train the trainer type program. So if you don’t have assets, then we wanna really think about what are you currently building in your business that we can mindfully in advance, build in a way for part of it to be licensed out.

    [00:20:41] And there are a lot of things to consider really, like what is best for your brand. I was in a clubhouse room a couple of months ago and I was talking about licensing and, and somebody asked me, you know, what’s the deal with white labeling? And I answered that question. In last week’s podcast about whether or not white labeling is is right for you. And so again, make sure you tapped into last week’s podcast. And of course I discuss it more in that license to scale video for you as well.

    [00:21:09] So other decisions you need to make, and we again talk about it in this video, are, should you license your material only locally to businesses, or are we talking about licensing your content to companies that have a global reach and they’re completely online? Should you geographically bind or restrict the content you license to maybe only a limited number of companies or organizations, either within a certain geographic area or perhaps within a certain niche. Those are all strategic questions that we go through in this video training, but also that those are great things to think about, and I want you to be thinking about how the answers to these affect you and your brand and your leadership first, before we’re thinking about how they affect the end user.

    [00:21:57] And then of course, other things like do you license your content as is or are you willing to update. What’s the minimum price? What is the license length? How many people is your licensee allowed to distribute your content to? There’s so many other details frankly, there are questions you didn’t even know you had, but I wanted to hone in on these two podcast episodes and start with the foundations.

    [00:22:19] This is content licensing 1 0 1. This is the conversation that is so exciting you guys. This is literally how I brought my first business consulting firm to seven figures and it. Hard work. I’m not gonna lie about that. It was definitely hard work, but it was way easier than I ever expected because I have, and I had something that was incredibly valuable that other companies want.

    [00:22:44] If you have something that other companies, organizations, entrepreneurs, want and need, that again makes them make more money faster. It makes them be better at what they do. It can level up their brand and it cuts their time. Then you have just made yourself the most valuable person in the room. I guarantee it, and I’m super excited about talking about this content, this, this topic.

    [00:23:10] I geek out on it because I’ve experienced it personally and I’ve seen the opportunities my clients have had when we help them build out their license programs, and I want you to have those opportunities as well. So this is episode number 236 at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast. I’m April Beach your host.

    [00:23:30] Thank you so much for hanging out with me. Happy summertime. I hope you’re doing something that you love that makes you laugh. That’s good for you and good for all the people that you love, and that you get a chance to really spend some quality time. And don’t forget to invest in yourself. You might not wanna jump in an ice bath at 04:30 in the morning like I did, but whatever it is for you, okay, now I’m just gonna do a little, little teeny tangent.

    [00:23:55] This is what I learned about myself today. I am way stronger mentally than I even thought I. And I’m really proud of myself for what I did today, and it feels really, really good. And frankly, I was in that ice bath for a really, really long time, and it was unexpected how good not my body did. My brain and my mental toughness surprised me today.

    [00:24:21] And that was freaking awesome. And so I just wanna encourage you to push yourself and you will surprise yourself. We are so much more than we even think we are. We have so many more resources and so much more strength that we can tap into. And when we put ourselves in those positions where we have to see what we’re made, You will not only rise to the occasion, you will blow past it.

    [00:24:47] I know you will. Whether we’re talking about licensing your content or building funnels or launching your first online course, or your business or mastermind or we’re sitting here and we’re helping you determine how to take a great article you wrote and get it distributed so that you can make thousands of dollars, whatever it is, we’re into holistic business building here, and that is your body, your mind, your family.

    [00:25:12] and of course, High profit, deep impact lifestyle for you. Thanks so much for hanging me, hanging out with me today. See, I’m still a little bit shaky here. I’m like drinking my coffee. I really appreciate you guys. I can’t wait to connect with you. Connect with me on Instagram at April Beach life and of course on Clubhouse where I’m there every single week at April Beach, and I would love to hear what you are doing to invest in yourself this summer.

    [00:25:39] And I am there to take your licensing questions, especially in Clubhouse. So don’t forget to hit me up with those because that’s what I’m there for, is to support you guys in these business. Okay. Have an awesome day, and I will talk to you next week. Bye-bye for now.

     
     

    How To License Your Course Content or Program- with April Beach (Episode 261)

    How To License Your Course Content or Program
    How To License Your Course Content or Program

    This episode is for those in Phase  3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for established entrepreneurs who are interested in learning how to scale your business exponentially  through licensing your content, course or program. 

    Summary: 

    If you’re an established entrepreneurs with a proven programs, courses, or content, and you’re looking to grow exponentially, then this episode is for you. By creating content to license you can demonstrate thought leadership in your space, increase credibility across your audience, expand your business to B2B or create a dual business model. 
    This an intro to licensing for entrepreneurs those want to know how content licensing works, those who want to demonstrate thought leadership in your space through Licensing, those interested in transitioning from B2C to B2B in some capacity. This show will give you a good foundation and knowledge base to consider your options. 

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. know what licensing is and how to make money doing it
    2. know the business model of licensing and if it’s right for you
    3. know the prerequisites to license your content 

    Resources Mentioned: www.license2scale.com April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    261 (235)

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our “Best of Episodes”. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes with the most downloads with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen, this episode you did was really powerful for me. Thank you so much.

    [00:00:30] And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers and authors. And so this episode is absolutely amazing, though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com.

    [00:00:54] You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes in there for you with up to date links, making sure that you’re getting to the right place. If you’re looking for a resource. Now special message to those of you guys that have been

    [00:01:12] waiting for this show to come back. I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s as we roll into the new year, going from 22 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about but after five years of faithfully dropping a business training, a recording, a strategy for you every single week, and winning awards for this show, I needed to step back and take a break.

    [00:01:46] And you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. What turned out to be one month off, turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we have been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, that entrepreneurs have relied on.

    [00:02:06] I needed to take a step back and get a perspective of what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show. How should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you are growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like?

    [00:02:27] So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the SweetLife Podcast for you and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off.

    [00:02:46] But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. You guys are amazing and you have really been the fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. It’s gonna sound a little bit different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come to for true, proven business trainings that are transformational.

    [00:03:09] For your company, that is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air, from experts delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you. I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned.

    [00:03:27] The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known in the Experts. So we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings. Without a hook to sell you something, they’re just coming in here to pour into you are absolutely epic. I can’t wait. So if you haven’t yet, subscribe to the show, please click subscribe.

    [00:03:45] Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus, and I just, Love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and the episodes coming for you and in the meantime, enjoy this best of, it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason.

    [00:04:08] I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, Simplified strategies to grow your service business, and launch a life you love faster with business, mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach.

    [00:04:32] Hey guys, and welcome to episode number 235. This one is really juicy. It is jam packed with the secrets to how I grew my first business consulting firm to over seven figures. So I’m super excited to share this with you and all the resources that we have here available for you on the show can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com. And this is episode number 235.

    [00:05:00] Welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast of your new my name’s April Beach. I am the host here of this show. I am a business consultant and strategist that works with entrepreneurs and experts to design, launch, and scale your business in today’s episode is literally a secret weapon.

    [00:05:18] If you are listening to this, if you’re a regular subscriber or you just happen to land here, this is something that nobody’s talking about and I’m so excited to share it with you on today’s show. We’re talking about how to license your content to scale your business and increase profit.

    [00:05:35] And this particular episode is a best for you, it’s most appropriate for you if you are in phases three, four, or five. Of my entrepreneur roadmap. What that means is that you have to be in a specific phase to be ready for this level of business, scalability and this level of growth. And so if you’re in phases three, four, or five, this is a great episode for you to listen to.

    [00:06:00] If you don’t know what phase of business design, growth, scale, and impact you are in. Take a second pause here and cruise over to sweetlifeco.com/quiz and you can take a really short quiz and I’ll tell you exactly where you are in your business and what you should be working on right now. You can also text the word quiz to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0.

    [00:06:32] So here’s what we have in today’s show. It’s really great for those of you guys who are established entrepreneurs and you’re interested in learning how to scale your business exponentially through licensing your content course or program. If you have a proven program, course or content, and you are looking to see even the greater impact that you can make.

    [00:06:55] You’re trying to find even more ways to make more money and to create the impact that you know that your program can, than this episode is for you. And so at the end of this episode, you are gonna know what licensing is and how to make money doing it. You are gonna know the business model of licensing and be able to have insight on whether or not this is even right for you, and you’re gonna know the prerequisites that you need to have in place in order to license your content.

    [00:07:24] And there is a super special bonus with today’s episode. If you wanna know more about this, you do not want to miss this bonus. I am giving you a completely free one hour licensing your content, Quick Start video training, and you really don’t wanna miss it. It’s one hour training on the quick start guide of how to prepare and license your content, and you can find that totally free by visiting licensetoscale.com.

    [00:07:58] It’s the word license. The number two and then the word scale.com, and I’ll make sure that that is in the show notes for you. So that’s another resource for you to grab here. I love giving you guys awesome very highly valuable stuff here for free that other businesses charge you thousands for. So definitely go grab that.

    [00:08:18] Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. This is episode number 235, and so all the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com number 235 under podcast.

    [00:08:41] Okay, so let’s start out by answering the question. What is licensing? Licensing is creating content for other companies to use. Think of it as renting your content, renting your course, renting your program, so it’s creating content for other companies to use, and they rent it from you and it’s called licensing so that they can grow faster or so that they can make more money or so that they can provide better services or training or support for their people, whoever their people happen to be. And now let me read you the legal definition of licensing. But just so you know, I wanted to make sure I gave you the, the April entrepreneur regular person’s definition of it too. So the legal definition of licensing is content licensing is a legal agreement between two parties known as a licensee and a licensure.

    [00:09:38] Licensees can purchase the rights to republish content from a licensor. Licensing is extremely versatile and allows for brands to repackage content in a variety of forms across desktop and mobile platforms. And that official definition came from news cred. So let’s go ahead and dive in a little bit more.

    [00:09:59] You have a program or you have a course and you wanna make more money, you want to go from what I call in our business, where we take our clients from scale to amplify. There is a difference between scaling your business and amplifying your business. And this my friends, is how you do it. So the benefits of licensing are really important to think about as you’re considering whether or not you wanna license your program to other companies.

    [00:10:28] Here are some of the benefits that you can flow through your mind as I’m saying these to you, and really hold each one up and see if it fits you right. The first one is if you wanna demonstrate thought leadership in your space. If you wanna become a thought leader in your particular niche, your particular area of expertise, then licensing is a benefit in that area.

    [00:10:53] Number two, licensing increases credibility across your own audience. So even though you’re creating content that’s used by other companies, when your audience knows that other companies are buying your content, all of a sudden they are really confident in your ability to get them direct results.

    [00:11:14] Number three, licensing enables for what I call exponential scalability. So let’s talk about scale for a second. Scale in most cases, as we talk about here on the podcast, and most entrepreneurs and online businesses are familiar with it. In that case, we’re talking about taking a one-on-one service or a one-on-one program and turning it into one on group. We’re creating different business models so that you can reach more people and increase your profit usually in the same amount of time.

    [00:11:46] Scaling is a precursor to licensing. Licensing is where you still create that one piece of content and then you’ve tested it in the scale capacity and now you are willing to rent it or allow other companies to borrow it from you called licensing it for them to distribute. So we have gone from scaling you to literally exploding so fast your reach with your content through licens. And then another benefit of licensing is for those of you, if you’re listening to this and you wanna figure out how to go from B to C, so you have a consulting firm or a coaching firm, or you’re a speaker or an author, and you are used to serving one particular client that gets direct results from you and you wanna transition, you wanna start coaching other businesses.

    [00:12:39] Licensing is also a really great benefit for you. So there are multiple benefits to licensing your content, if any of those fit into what aligns with your strategic objectives for your life and your brand.

    [00:12:53] So really the question that we need to dive into here before I share anything else is, is licensing right for you? But not only that, are you ready to license? I have so many people. Literally, we have a waiting list of entrepreneurs who really want to learn how to license their materials, but they aren’t ready yet. So let’s talk about what is a prerequisite for being. To join my masterclass called License to Scale. To learn how to do this, the prerequisite is that you have to have a proven course or program or content that’s gotten people transformational results in the past.

    [00:13:39] So this means if you have never created a course before, or if you do not have a membership community with curriculum, if you have not developed transformational curriculum or a transformational program and you have not tested that, you are not ready for licensing. And so at this point in time, if that is you, of course you’re welcome to sit here and hang out with me for the rest of this episode, but I would put it on pause because we have a program to teach you how to do that.

    [00:14:07] You can find that program by visiting theofferengineer.com. And so the process we take companies through is first we help businesses launch, and then the second phase is scale, where entrepreneurs join our transformational program Design masterclass. Again, you can find that at theofferengineer.com if this is where you are.

    [00:14:26] And then you can go onto licensing your material. So the prerequisite is you have to have a proven program course or content that’s gotten people results in the past. If you don’t have that, you’re not quite ready for that yet, and that’s okay. This is a very cool episode to know what is the potential for you is in the future.

    [00:14:44] So I’m gonna give you guys a peek behind the scenes. I’m pulling back the curtains, and I’m gonna share with you two case studies out of five different case studies in which I have licensed my content for over 12 years, because I want you to get your wheels spinning about what you have or what you can do with your business.

    [00:15:02] All five case studies and they’re all different. All five case studies are available by going to licensetoscale.com and joining that licensing 101 webinar. But I’m just for the sake of time and to get your wheels spinning. I’m gonna share with you two here. Okay, so the first case study I wanna share is the fact that I had a collection of courses, a collection of online courses back in 2009.

    [00:15:29] I’ve been doing online courses before they were even a thing. You listen to the show, you know that, right? So I had a collection of eight full online courses and there were eight different courses that were for a very specific niche. They were totaled 198 slides, 13 hours of recorded classes, and they came with teacher guides and supplemental worksheets and even project plans.

    [00:15:53] I licensed. That collection of courses and I have licensed these collection of eight courses that is currently still to this day, licensed in over 13 countries to other businesses. They included business coaching videos, swipe files, and we licensed it in different formats so that the business could use it in even co-brand it.

    [00:16:15] So that is case study number one. So I had a collection of courses that served a specific audience. And people line up, people literally join my waiting list to license my courses. I only release them once a year in the month of November, and they join a waiting list to license my courses once a year.

    [00:16:36] And I have been doing that since the beginning of 2009. And so that’s one way. So if you have a collection of courses, not just one. Think about all of the material you have created, all of the mini videos, all the things that you’ve done, that we can package together into a complete package. And I promise you, when it’s done correctly, they will line up to license that from you.

    [00:17:01] So I’ve done this for years and I’m still doing this today. So that’s case study number one. And then case study number two is that I have a full coaching program that includes the courses, but it also includes consulting for corporations and content that that corporation can distribute to all of.

    [00:17:21] People, in this case it’s a corporate program, and so they wanna take my content and my courses and use my consulting. And that’s another case study. And I first started doing this back in 2010. So these are two case studies and again, I have five some smaller ones for those of you guys that are just getting started.

    [00:17:39] And you can see all five by going to the license to scale.com and you can join that information webinar. So hopefully that gets your wheels spinning a little bit about what you already have. We want to dive into your assets, dive into your method, dive into your process and what you’ve already created, and then have a conversation about who can this really benefit so it’ll benefit your business and it’ll benefit their corporation and their company as well.

    [00:18:09] The next thing I wanna kind of transition here because I know that for many of you, this is a new conversation. This is a new topic, is sharing with you that there are three primary ways to license your content, and each one of these ways is going to equal the branding and the future goals for you that you have for your.

    [00:18:32] So the first way you can license your content is straight as it is with your branding, your logo all over it. So that would be somebody borrows or quote unquote licenses, rents your course or your class, and they plug it into their lms. They plug it into their system or wherever they’re distributing it, but it’s your logo all over it.

    [00:18:54] That’s way number. Way number two is co-branded, where you allow for your them to add their name and logo to it. It could be co-presented by, co-branded by, and that’s a really great way for you to retain the ownership and the authority of that content, but also to really help your licensee level up as well.

    [00:19:17] And then the third way you can license your content is completely white labeled. White labeled is where nobody even knows it’s yours. Some operations expect that to happen, so some companies will only license your content if it’s completely white labeled. Some companies only wanna license your content if it’s co-branded, and so every single one of the licensees has their own goals for licensing in your content.

    [00:19:42] Now let’s like talk about for a second what is really actually good for you, those three levels. Number one, straight As is, is your trademark. Number two, co-branded, or number three, white labeled. They follow the flow of the value, which means that someone will pay you less to take it straight as your own, a little bit more to co-brand it and a little bit more to white label it, or in some cases, a significantly more amount of money to let white label your content.

    [00:20:15] But let’s ask the really important question here. Is that right for you? Is it right for you to have no stake and for nobody to know that that was your genius? And out of all the companies and all the entrepreneurs that I coach to license their courses and their content, very, very few of them go with the white label, even though the end user, the licensee, will pay all the tea in China.

    [00:20:43] Is that really worth it to not get recognition for your brand? And so those are some things that I just want you to be thinking about. I know this is an intro to licensing conversation, so I wanted to make sure that you knew about those three primary ways to license your content. So as you’re going through, as you’re thinking about what you have that you can license, you’re also thinking about in what capacity that that could work best for you and what you want your brand to be 2, 6, 10 years down the road.

    [00:21:14] And then the last question I wanna answer for you today is, who licenses your content? Who should you license it? This is a very common question. I answer this in clubhouse rooms all the time, and I get emails very often, especially when we are leading up to opening up my license to scale masterclass and people are saying, Well, who, who wants this? Who do I sell it to? So let me give you two very clear examples of who should you license your li your content too. The first one is other companies who are not in direct competition with you. But they serve the same audience and they wanna look better or expand their reach, grow their list, increase their sales, and save time.

    [00:21:57] The second opportunity for an audience for you are companies that are exactly like yours, but they’re missing something they need, and they want your expert content. They want turnkey offers, so they wanna be able to take your course and just plug it in to their system and sell it right away. And they wanna have faster, instant results.

    [00:22:21] So you can license your content to a company whose audience needs it, but the company is not in direct competition with you. Or you can license your content to a company that is just like yours, but perhaps they don’t have as great of content as you do. Perhaps they need some more content to level up what they already have to shore up their offering, and they need your help to do that.

    [00:22:44] So those are two general examples of audiences who you could consider licensing your content. So today we’re talking about how to license your content to scale your business and increase profit. And I talked about a lot of things. We talked about what is licensing. We talked about the benefits of licensing.

    [00:23:04] We discussed whether or not you’re ready to license. I gave you two of five different case studies of when I have licensed my content. And hopefully in doing so, your wheels are spinning and you’re thinking about what you already have that you can license or how you can package together. Content courses, programs, your framework, your methodology to license to other people.

    [00:23:28] We also talked about three primary ways to license your content, and we talked about who should you license your content to. So we discussed a lot, but I’ll be really honest. This isn’t even the tip of the iceberg. I have so much more to share with you. So if you are interested in licensing your content or learning more about licensing your content, I highly recommend you join the licensing 1 0 1 training, and it’s totally free where I’m also gonna give you a quick start guide.

    [00:24:01] To learn how to get your content licensed faster and to determine if it’s right for you, and you can grab that anytime by visiting license. And then the number two, and then the word scale, S C A L E.com Or of course, all of the show notes will be found in the episode show notes. This is episode number 235.

    [00:24:25] And you can visit us at sweetlifeco.com, click on the podcast, and this is number 235. And just so you know, this is part one of a two part podcast episode I’m doing for you. Next week in episode number 236, I’m going to tell you the four types of content that companies line up to license. They will literally line up flood your list, begging for you to license your content to them.

    [00:24:56] And there’s four different kinds of content that companies line up to license. We’re talking about that next week on the show. That’s gonna be episode number 236. So thank you so much for joining me. I am very excited to share this. This has been my secret weapon. Many of you might not know. I own two different business consulting firms and this is how my first, very first business consulting firm really broke through that glass ceiling, and I’m so excited to share this with you. It’s been kind of a secret. I’ve been holding in my pocket for quite a few years, and I’ve had the privilege of working with so many businesses, one on one to do this, but we do have our license to scale masterclass.

    [00:25:38] Visit licensetoscale.com. If you are ready to take the steps and license your content to hit that amplified level in your business. All right, you guys have an amazing night. Happy July, 2021 when I’m recording this. I hope you’re doing something super fun that you love that really fills you up. I’ll talk to you in another episode soon.

    Episode 258: The Business Focus Framework – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Join the 2022 Sales, Marketing and Calendar Fill Up Event

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    Established entrepreneurs in all phases of business development.

    Summary:

    There’s a key to success that you’ve heard before, but it’s harder to implement than it sounds. This key is “simplicity”. When you’re able to clarify and simplify the punch list that needs to be done in your business, your implementation will be faster, you’ll be less overwhelmed and you’ll make your life as an entrepreneur much happier. 
     
    This week on the show, I’m sharing the simple framework I give to our clients, to get fast clarity and immediate results. When you what to focus on, when to apply that focus, and how… you’ll make massive business gains. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Get April Beach’s secret framework for focus and success
    2. Know how to think about business focus in a new and faster way
    3. Understand what you need to do to implement this framework and start taking action in your business

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 257: How To Create More Time Freedom As An Entrepreneur – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Download: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Online Business Model That’s Right for You

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz
     
    Small business owners who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. 

    Summary:

    Growing a company while raising a family is a lot of work. Oftentimes entrepreneurs feel maxed out, and “Cat’s in the Cradle” by Harry Chapin breaks your heart. You started your company for freedom, and you know you can obtain it, but you don’t want to wait to sell or years more of hard work before reaping family life’s rewards. 
     
    In this episode we break down 3 practical systems you can implement this week, that require minimal work and will gain you maximum time freedom.

    At the End of This Episode You Will

    1. See how you can tweak your business model right now to create more time
    2. Know the power of messy days, how to schedule them and why you’ll love them
    3. Know more creative ways you can connect with your #1 team (family)

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     
     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

     
    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 206 of the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, and Merry Christmas to those of you who are listening to this live and happy holidays to everybody, regardless of what you celebrate here,
     
    we are celebrating family, and I just hope that this show reaches you and that you’re blessed by what we talk about today. Thank you so much for tuning in with us over the holidays. We’ve never missed an episode so far. And this year with all that’s happened in 2020 is no exception. And so today we are talking about three simple ways to put family first as an entrepreneur and create more time.
     
    So whether you’re listening to this live and it is Christmas week here in 2020, or you’re listening to this down the road, everything we’re talking about is a proven business strategy that you’re going to be able to take to the bank and create more time in your life, whatever you want your life to look like. I know that many of you who’ve listened to this show for years.
     
    You know, that half of the time my teenage boys are walking in and out of the door. On the other side of, of my office recording here, you know, with their friends or to the skate park, you know, wherever it is that you are doing life, we need to create a business model, a lifestyle around enabling that. And so this show fits really well into what we’re talking about right now with the holidays,
     
    with, you know, really cherishing life. I think the one thing that for us, it was just such a hidden blessing that came out of 2020 is just really loving being together at home and cherishing time. The one thing that money can’t buy is a second of time. And so a lot of things we’re talking about here on the show we’ve been talking about for years,
     
    but in this episode is all strategies to control time into a create as much time so that you are enabling family first in your business. This episode is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my start to scale up system. And so that’s phase one through five, whether you’re just thinking about starting a business, or you are a seasoned entrepreneur,
     
    that’s making a huge impact this show. And what we’re talking about here applies to all of you guys who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. Because the reality is, is a growing a company and raising a family is a lot of work. And oftentimes we as entrepreneurs feel super maxed out right in that song, cats in the cradle,
     
    I’d sing it to you, but I’ve a really terrible voice that song comes on and it’s like heartbreaking. And, and I was actually just listening to it last week with my boys. And one of my kids asked guys, you know, I love song, but what does it actually mean? And I was like, ah, you know, it’s about this dad that worked so hard that he never had time for his kid and he regretted it.
     
    And it was like, Oh, that through the gut, I know we feel that as entrepreneurs. So that’s how we were talking about some strategies here on the show. At the end of this episode, this is what you’re going to know. So you are going to see how you can tweak your current business model right now to create more time like instantly right now,
     
    as you’re listening to the show, we are going to talk about the power of messy days, how you can schedule them and why you will love messy days. And I’m going to share with you some behind the scenes about how I schedule these types of things. And you are going to know more creative ways that you can connect with your number one team,
     
    which is your family. And if you don’t have kids in your listening to this show, this family, your family is your support system, your network, whatever that looks like to you, all of our lives are beautifully different. And so whatever that looks like to you, you’re going to be able to take the strategies that we talk about here on this episode and apply them right away to your business and for all the show notes and the resources we mentioned here in the show,
     
    cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. Again, that Sweetlife co.com click on podcast. And this is episode number two, zero six. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s strategies. It’s going to be a real quick show cause it’s a holiday week, but really powerful. So stick with me.<inaudible> Step number one, in order to create more time in your business for family and lifestyle freedom,
     
    we need to look at your business model. So your business model can either bury you or save you. So the first thing I want you to look at is really how you’re serving clients. How much of that time does that of your time, does that take within a week and understand the demands of delivering certain projects or services places on your time, energy and your ability to focus.
     
    First of all, what do you do? Take a look at what you do. Just kind of picture your, your week and how you’re working with clients. Do you work with people? One-on-one do you work with people, one on group? How does that really look in your life? And right now I want you to assess that. And I want you to understand the time that’s required,
     
    that you are spending currently working with your clients and take a look at this current business model that you have. What does that look like? How do you work with people? Is it one-on-one? Is it one on group? How frequently in the first thing you want to do is you want to ask yourself, you know, Hey, is this working for me or is the actual amount of time that I’m spending with my clients taking away time from family?
     
    Now one might say, well, wow, isn’t that great? You know, you’re, you’re so busy. Your business is so busy. You have so many clients. Yes, that is true, but busy doesn’t equal. Good. So we’re going to give you some tips here to take a look at turning busy-ness into profit and time. And so the first thing I want you to do is I want you to ask yourself,
     
    what can I change right now? So that would be, are you seeing clients five days a week? You and these are just some suggestions for you. Can you block and tackle your client days as an example, I only work with clients privately on Thursdays and Fridays. And I’ve shared this with you guys on the show before, and I’ll share with you again,
     
    because I just get great feedback from this time. Number one, I think, I think best when I consolidate my work. So if I know that Thursdays and Fridays are, or my business coaching days, when I work with entrepreneurs and small businesses, then I get in that mindset and I know what I’m doing. I also then can look at my business model and I can say,
     
    okay, all of these businesses are in this same type of need, this same type of area. And so now I’m going to create groups and I actually scale my business model and I always do this again, reassess it. So I have, if I have five clients that are in the same place and need the same things, I actually will offer a group strategy call for those clients.
     
    It’s great for me, it’s great for them to network with other people and everybody gets the same results. So I want you to look at your business right now and ask yourself, can I number one block and tackle my days. And then within those days, what sort of smart scaling can I do for my business model? So can you create group offers?
     
    Can you create some on-demand content that your clients or your customers might want to absorb, instead of saying the same thing to different people? One-on-one can you create maybe an online resource center for your clients to tap into some of your more, more frequently asked questions to help save some of that time or even create a course or an actual program for them to go through online.
     
    Other strategies for you are creating maybe a membership committee, unity, or an online forum this year can be done with Slack or something easily with boxer, where you create a group of people that you want to connect with and you want to help them Connect with each other, but you don’t want to launch a full-blown membership site because that might not really work with your actual business model.
     
    So those are some suggestions of things that you can look at right now in your business, so that you can say, Hey, listen, what can I actually change immediately? What can I actually group together to save my time? And what are the dates phase where I would like to serve my clients? Another reason I haven’t mentioned it here, but why I serve clients on Thursdays and Fridays is because of the entire beginning of my week is on business building content creation and actual strategy.
     
    And so I take care of the business building inside in the beginning of my week, when my mind is fresh. For example, I’m recording this podcast episode on a Monday, usually record on Mondays or Tuesdays. When I know that I can put really powerful, highly impacting content. And then I take care of serving my clients because once I go in and I start immersing myself in my client’s businesses,
     
    it fully takes over all my thought processes. So that’s one of the reasons why I serve clients towards the end of the week. And then I have that weekend break in between. So action item. Number one is take a look at your current business model. Can you group together the days that you serve your customers, serve your clients, and can you make some changes to how you’re serving your clients?
     
    Creating group offers a membership community, or even just an online forum and really take a look at controlling instead of spreading yourself out throughout the week, consolidating your work into different types of work that you were doing at a time. That’s really strategy. Number one, within that same strategy. We talked about this a few episodes ago on the show within that same strategy,
     
    you should be planning your year in advance. So planning what you’re selling when you’re selling it. So, you know, we have a big macro plan and then we have a micro plan week by week. So you really should be taking a look at what’s happening for the year to come. Regardless of when you’re listening to this episode, you can do this at any point in time and really know what you’re selling when you’re selling it and what demands that’s going to put on your life and your family,
     
    okay. Strategy, or I should say, tip number two is my favorite. And I call it for the love of messy days. This is what a messy day is. A messy day is a day that I have scheduled in the middle of my week. My messy day is always Wednesday. And that day is a break between my strategy and my content creation at the beginning of the week.
     
    And my client service at the end of the week, messy days are totally to be spontaneous. And this is an amazing thing. It’s especially amazing if you have teenagers like I do. So on my messy days, I really don’t schedule any client meetings, but this is the day I schedule like the kids’ teeth cleaning, or if I need to stop by the grocery store or any appointments like I would have for myself,
     
    like going to get my eyelashes glued on or a haircut, all of those things are always scheduled on a Wednesday. This is also the day where I am completely able to be spontaneous with my kids. Do I have to get work done? Yes. I still work on messy days. So Wednesday is my favorite day to be this day. But it’s also the day that,
     
    you know, if my kids just want to sit down and, and have a cup of coffee and hang out where I always don’t have somewhere to be, I always can make sure that that is in that day. And they literally throw the plan out the window again. Do you have a list of things you have to get done on messages? Yes.
     
    Are they so regimented and scheduled? Not at all is one of the things I love doing with my kids on messy days is we have this taco wagon down the street and it’s just this amazing Mexican food that’s here in Lafayette, Colorado love taco wagon, and the kids will just be hungry. I’ll say, Hey, let’s, let’s go to taco wagon and grab some tacos and it’s super spontaneous and they love it.
     
    We listen to music. We play music messy days are the days where I can just stop and walk out of my office and share songs with the kids and listening to what they’re listening to, or watch YouTube videos or sit down and play call of duty, which by the way I suck at on Xbox. But I try, you know, those are the things we do on messy days.
     
    And so messy days are a day sometime in your week, if you can’t fit it in every single week, maybe plan and schedule a messy day every two weeks. And again, this is the time for you to know this is when you can fit in your haircuts teeth, cleaning, having to run an errand, maybe go to the post office. But it’s also the day where you can totally stop and have a cup of coffee with a friend who just might really need you call your aunt on the phone,
     
    who you haven’t talked to in forever. And all those things that get scheduled out because the schedule is too regimented. Messy days is totally to not be regimented, but you will love it because you’ll actually get more work done in the other days. When you know, you have your messy day, wherever that may land in your week. And then the third tip I have for you is to really over communicate with your family over communicate with your team.
     
    Again, whoever that is, it can be, you know, young, old, it can be your dog. You know, I used to communicate with my toddlers, my boys, when I was working from home and say, okay, you know, mommy really has a lot of work to do for the next two hours. But after that, we’ll sit down and we’ll watch Mickey mouse together or whatever.
     
    And so as long as you’re over communicating, what’s about to happen with your team. Then everybody is going into that with open eyes and they understand how they can support you in that process. Again, it doesn’t matter if they’re three or if they’re 35, they all understand that. So some suggestions on how to over communicate with everybody, but in a way,
     
    that’s not going to take you too much time because that’s would be against the point of this whole entire episode is number one. Every single Sunday night, just have a quick weekly powwow. We do this all the time. We go through the week, we look at our calendars, see what’s coming up and everybody’s just on the same page. It literally takes five minutes and that’s for a family of five to do,
     
    but it helps to just communicate and what’s to come. It also helps us all mentally prepare for the week ahead and how we want to show up in that week. We also have a nightly pregame. And so a nightly pregame again, literally takes like one minute saying, okay, this is what the morning is going to look like. This is what I have today.
     
    This is what you know, you have going on this next day. This is what this looks like for our family. Let’s again, have everybody be on the same page. It’s also the place where I can take a minute. If my kids need to talk about school or things they’re struggling with and help them strategize a plan to, you know, maybe make up some schoolwork,
     
    which frankly has been a lot since everybody’s doing online school and it’s a freaking mess. I won’t go down that rabbit hole, but it’s a time for me to really connect with my boys and hear like, yeah, I just have this, I have this math test tomorrow. I have no clue what I’m doing and really be able to focus in on them.
     
    And I know that they really appreciate this nightly pre-game as well. Couple of things we also do and we’ve done for years and years and years is we calendar share. We’ve also taught our boys how to add things to our family calendar. So we have one Gmail address where we manage all of our kid and family things. And so anytime one of our kids has something they want to do.
     
    They want to ride to the skate park or they want to go sleep over with a friend or whatever it may be. My boys can add that event and share it to our family calendar. So without even talking, we all know what everybody wants and needs over a period of time. And so everybody’s on the same page without taking any time whatsoever. And you might be asking like,
     
    okay, how do I do this? My kids are five. Well, of course this is age appropriate, but I will say that we started teaching our boys to add things to our family, shared Gmail calendar when they were as young as nine years old. So these kids can do anything with tech, right? So you would be very surprised at the wishes we receive on our family calendar.
     
    And it’s really cool. That’s how our kids get to do things because it’s planned in a way that works for everybody. And then the last suggestion that I would have for you is a family chat or a family WhatsApp channel or family Voxer. If you’ve never tried any of that, those are all awesome places to create a group chat where everybody’s on the same page.
     
    And you as the business owner can even just shoot, instead of calling this person and telling this person to pick up that person, you can just get on your boxer and just say, okay, you know, I’m running 10 minutes late from this meeting. We’re having chicken for dinner. I’ll see you soon, whatever it is that you need to say,
     
    you can, you can put in a box or chat to your family. And it’s a really efficient way to actually create more time. Again, if your family is, is a roommate, if your family is, you know, your other business team, or if it’s friends, whoever your people are, these are three simple ways to put those people,
     
    to put your family first as an entrepreneur and create more time in your business. And so here’s what we talked about today. We talked about how does your current business model and know how to group your days together and what you can tweak and scale and your business model right now, in order to create more time each week, we also talked about messy days,
     
    why you need messy days, why you’ll love them, why your family will love your messy days and really why it just frankly, it’s going to make you think, wow, I’m so glad I’m an entrepreneur instead of wow, crap. This is way harder than I thought it would be. Is there ever going to be a light at the end of this,
     
    you know, constant tunnel of demands, messy days, fix that, like in an instant. So if any of these things I can say, I love my messy days the most. And then the third thing is think of more creative ways to connect with your family, whether it’s calendar share or Voxer and different ways to communicate, whether it’s a weekly powwow or a nightly powwow.
     
    We talked about that as well. I hope you found some of these suggestions helpful to you and your team, your people, all the people that love you. And you know what it’s really special to have people in your life that love you so much. They just want more of you and they need more of you. That’s a gift. And you know,
     
    I know we’re also grateful for that. So it’s really important as small business owners that we take strategies like this business model, calendar share and more practical lifestyle strategies in order to create this time and in life freedom, I’m here to help. I’m here to support you. It’s what I do here on the show. I’m a business strategist, but I’ve built multiple companies with kids.
     
    I think I launched my first business when my youngest was six weeks old. So I totally get it. Whatever phase you’re in of parenting. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, happy holidays. Happy new year, let’s kick 2020, like to the curb behind us. And I’m so excited to start 2021 with you. We have a lot of amazing things coming up on the show,
     
    including commitment week 20, 21, five days. I’m only 10 minutes a day to completely lay out your entire 20, 21 business plan coming up here next week. And so I dive into commitment week 2021 with us next week’s episode number 207. All right, you guys, I will talk to you soon. Have an awesome day.

    Episode 256: The Business of Podcasting – Part 2 – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs who are thinking about launching a podcast.

    Summary:

    When it comes to podcasting, everyone thinks ads are the way to monetize, but in this episode I’m breaking down other ways to grow your business with a podcast, and how to choose which is right for you. Podcasting is a great way to become known, grow your following and build relationships with your audience. Podcasting is also a great way to fill your coaching services, but it’s definitely not for everyone. 
    Tune into this show to hear behind the scenes of the business of podcasting, how to use a podcast for business exposure, and how to monetize your podcast in the best way for your goals and capacity.  For most people, monetizing a podcast is a no-brainer but figuring out how to go about doing it in the right way for your company can be tricky. This show solves that issue.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Have a clear understanding if you should launch a podcast
    2. Know the 3 ways to monetize your podcast

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 255: The Business of Podcasting – Part 1 – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs who are thinking about launching a podcast.

    Summary:

    When it comes to podcasting, everyone thinks ads are the way to monetize, but in this episode I’m breaking down other ways to grow your business with a podcast, and how to choose which is right for you. Podcasting is a great way to become known, grow your following and build relationships with your audience. Podcasting is also a great way to fill your coaching services, but it’s definitely not for everyone. 
     
    Tune into this show to hear behind the scenes of the business of podcasting, how to use a podcast for business exposure, and how to monetize your podcast in the best way for your goals and capacity.  For most people, monetizing a podcast is a no-brainer but figuring out how to go about doing it in the right way for your company can be tricky. This show solves that issue.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Have a clear understanding if you should launch a podcast
    2. Know the 3 ways to monetize your podcast

    Resources Mentioned:

     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 254: Should You Launch A Membership Program? – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for businesses who are investigating the idea of launching a membership community.

    Summary:

    This is a great show for businesses who are investigating the idea of launching a membership community. If you want to increase profit and serve more people at a time in the form of a membership community, this show will give you more clarity on how that type of program structure will work in your business and your life. 
    Membership programs deliver reoccurring information, content, trainings and/or engagement to clients on an ongoing basis. But, to create an excellent membership program that keeps people engaged, with ongoing monthly reoccurring revenue, you need to do a few things right. In this episode, we’re talking about those things…

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Understand membership offer structures
    2. Get insider help on how to keep your members engaged
    3. Have a structure to scale your time for more money with less work

    Resources Mentioned:

    Text CALL to 805-254-0880 to Receive a Free Business Priority Mapping Call


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 253: How To Launch Group Coaching – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for coaches and consultants who are ready to grow and increase sales.

    Summary:

    When it comes to the business of coaching or consulting, 1-1 services dominate the market, However, coaching people 1-1 takes a great deal of time and you’ll hit a financial and physical ceiling. This mistake often causes coaches to stay stuck in busy work and lifestyle cages and then many burn out completely. Instead, we’re diving into the business model of group coaching and how to shift your business from 1-1 to 1-group.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Hear how easy it is to go from 1-1 to 1-group
    2. Know why your 1-1 clients will like group coaching better
    3. Have the steps to move into group coaching services 

    Resources Mentioned:

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 65: Doing Things That Don’t Scale – with John Lee Dumas

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 252: How To Launch Your Coaching or Consulting Business – with April Beach


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if y